Doc: ETD 20 (26877) WC

May 2025
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
DRAFT FOR COMMENTS ONLY

(Not to be reproduced without the permission of BIS or used as a STANDARD)

Draft Indian Standard

Code of Practice for Earthing

(Third Revision of IS 3043)

(ICS 91.140.50)

Electrical Installations Last Date for Comments: 25/07/2025

Sectional Committee, ETD 20

FOREWORD

(Formal clauses shall be added later)

The Electricity Act, 2003, together with The Central Electricity Authority (Measures Relating
to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2023, made compliance to IS standards including
IS3043 a mandatory requirement for safety, to govern the electrical installation work in
generating stations, substations, industrial locations, buildings, etc, in the country. The code of
practice for earthing was formulated with the intention to serve as a consolidated guide to all
those who are concerned with the design, installation, verification and maintenance of electrical
systems and apparatus.

This standard was first published in 1966 and revised in 1987 and 2018. The Central Electricity
Authority (Measures Relating to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2023 made several
changes in the regulation, subsequently, National Electrical Code was revised in 2023. Also,
the Code of Practice of Electrical Wiring Installation (IS 732) has been revised in 2019 and
IS/IEC 61936-1 published in 2021, demand improvements in earthing arrangement. Therefore,
the revision of this standard was undertaken to align with the latest practices and the
requirements of regulation.

The terms earth and earthing have been used in this Code irrespective of reliance being placed
on the earth itself as a low impedance return path of the fault current. As a matter of fact, the
earth now rarely serves as a part of the return circuit but is being used mainly for fixing the
voltage of electrical energy system.

The object of an earthing arrangement is to provide as nearly as possible a surface under and
around a station which shall be at a uniform potential. In general, all parts of apparatus other
than live parts, shall be at equal potential and avoid touch/step potentials during fault. The
recommendations in this Code are made in order that these objects may be carried out.
 Doc: ETD 20 (26877) WC
May 2025
In this Code, the terms ‘earth' is used as a verb as defined in IEV 195-01-08. In many places,
the noun form of ‘earth’ is mentioned as ‘ground’.

The Code includes comprehensive guidelines on earth fault protection in consumer's premises.
The rules given in the Code should be read in conjunction IS 732 and IS/IEC 61936-1. Guidance
on achieving fault protection by protective equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection
of supply is covered in this Code. Other fault protective measures are subject of IS732.

The revision of the Code aims at consolidating in one volume all the essential guidelines needed
for preparing a good earthing arrangement and equipotential bonding in an electrical
installation.

The major changes in this revision from the previous standard are as follows:

a) Updating of requirements based on Central Electricity Authority (Measures Relating

to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2023.
b) Detailed explanations about various statutory requirements of earthing are included
in clause 4.
c) Aligning the disconnection times, touch/step voltages and Temporary Overvoltage
(TOV) and the rules for designing substations as per IS 732, IS/IEC 61936-1.
d) New colour figures for easy understanding.
e) Mis concepts of earthing explained in reference to IEC 61000-5-2 and IS 732.
f) Explanation of protective earthing from majorly used product standards (see 7.1).
g) Different type of earth electrodes (see 8.2.1 and Table 26), its installation and
limiting the usage of earth enhancing compounds (see 8.1.7).
h) Concrete embedded foundation earth electrodes (see 8.2.5).
j) Global Earthing System and modern methods of Substation earthing and GIS (see
10).
k) Earthing of specific applications such as industrial and commercial (see 11.1)
medical establishments (see 11.2) Solar PV (see 11.3), Data Centre (see 11.8).
m) Measurement of touch / step voltages (see 13.5) and continuity resistance
measurement (see 13.7).
n) Earthing of multiple sources in modern and upcoming applications as an informative
annex (see Annex A).
p) Earthing and Bonding for EMC in buildings (see Annex B).
q) Portable earthing and short-circuiting devices for live working (see Annex C).
r) Maximum allowed continuity resistance of conductors used in protective
equipotential bonding (see Annex D).
s) Calculation of Earth Fault Loop Impedance (see Annex E).
t) Shared protective earthing conductors and protective earthing (Annex F).
u) Information on construction sites and streetlights are referenced to NEC 2023 as
various additional measures are also necessary for increased safety.

In the preparation of the Code, assistance has been taken from the following:

IEC Pub 60364 (all Parts) Electrical installations in buildings. International Electrotechnical
Commission.

For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with,
the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis shall be rounded
 Doc: ETD 20 (26877) WC
May 2025
off in accordance with IS 2: 2022 ‘Rules for rounding off numerical values (second revision)’.
The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that
of the specified value in this standard.
 CONTENTS
FOREWORD ........................................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
1 Scope .................................................................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
2 Reference ............................................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
3 Terminology ....................................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
4 Statutory provisions and requirements ..................................................................................................................
4.1 CEA Safety Regulations ........................................................................................................................
4.2 Low Voltage electrical installations ......................................................................................................
4.3 Installations with a voltage exceeding 1 kV a.c ....................................................................................
4.4 Overhead power lines. ...........................................................................................................................
4.5 Protective bonding and conductors .......................................................................................................
5. General information ...................................................................................................................................
5.1 Calculation of earth fault currents .........................................................................................................
5.2 Tolerable values of touch and step voltage ...........................................................................................
5.3 TOV at LV installation during faults in the system exceeding 1 KV a.c .............................................
5.4 Safety in earthing ..................................................................................................................................
6. System earthing for A.C and D.C ..............................................................................................................
6.1 Factors influencing the choice of earthed or unearthed system .............................................................
6.2 System earthing (electrical system earthing) .........................................................................................
6.3 Misconcepts in earthing and the recommendation. ...............................................................................
7. Earthing at low voltage consumer premise ................................................................................................
7.1 Equipment earthing ...............................................................................................................................
7.2 Earthing arrangement in an installation .................................................................................................
7.3 Minimum cross-sectional area of conductors and their usage. ..............................................................
7.4 Earth fault protection in installations ....................................................................................................
7.5 Selection of devices for automatic disconnection of supply ..................................................................
7.6 Earthing requirements for installations having higher PE conductor current ........................................
7.7 ICT: Telecommunications bonding networks for buildings and other structures ..................................
7.8 Earth free equipotential bonding ...........................................................................................................
8. Resistance to earth (ground) and earth electrodes ......................................................................................
8.1 Resistance to earth (ground) ..................................................................................................................
8.2 Earth electrodes .....................................................................................................................................
9. Earthing of generating plants .....................................................................................................................
9.1 LV portable generators ..........................................................................................................................
9.2 Standby generating plants (including portable and mobile generators). ................................................
9.3 Generators with voltage exceeding 1kV a.c. .........................................................................................
10. Earthing in power stations and substations exceeding 1 kV a.c .................................................................
10.1 General .............................................................................................................................................
10.2 Fundamental requirements ...............................................................................................................
10.3 Design of earthing systems ...............................................................................................................
10.4 Safety measures to observance the permissible touch voltages ........................................................
10.5 Calculations of earth electrode resistance and current to earth. ........................................................
10.6 Recommended additional safety measures and their condition of use. .............................................
10.7 Detailed measures for earthing of equipment and installations ........................................................
10.8 Typical earthing arrangement ...........................................................................................................
10.9 General earthing arrangements at power stations of electricity supplies ..........................................
10.10 Equipment earthing at power stations ...............................................................................................
10.11 Power station and substation earth electrodes ..................................................................................
10.12 Earthing conductors for power stations and substations ...................................................................
10.13 Earthing of high voltage cable sheaths .............................................................................................
10.14 Miscellaneous matters in power stations and substations .................................................................
10.15 Transferred potentials to telecommunication and other systems ......................................................
10.16 Reduction factors related to earth wires and metal sheaths. .............................................................
10.17 Special considerations for GIS .........................................................................................................
11 Examples in typical buildings/applications.................................................................................................
11.1 Industrial and commercial installation ..............................................................................................
11.2 Medical establishments.....................................................................................................................
11.3 Solar pv.............................................................................................................................................
11.4 Potentially hazardous areas ..............................................................................................................
11.5 Construction sites .............................................................................................................................
11.6 Mines and quarries ...........................................................................................................................
11.7 Street lighting ...................................................................................................................................
11.8 Data Centres ..........................................................................................................................................
12 Maintenance of earthing arrangement and earth electrodes. ......................................................................
12.1 Maintenance of protective earthing ..................................................................................................
12.2 Maintenence of earth electrodes .......................................................................................................
13 Measurement of soil resistivity and earth electrode. ..................................................................................
13.1 Measurement of soil resistivity .........................................................................................................
13.2 Measurement of earth electrode resistance .......................................................................................
13.3 Measurement of earth fault loop impedance .....................................................................................
13.4 Measurement of resistances to earth and impedances to earth .........................................................
13.5 Measurements of touch voltage and prospective touch voltage........................................................
13.6 Elimination of interference and disturbance voltages for earthing measurements ...........................
13.7 Continuity resistance measurement ..................................................................................................
Annex A Earthing of multiple sources ....................................................................................................................
Annex B Earthing and bonding: EMC in buildings.................................................................................................
Annex C Portable equipment for earthing or earthing and short-circuiting for live working ..................................
Annex D Maximum allowed resistance of protective conductors ...........................................................................
Annex E Calculation of earth fault loop impedance ................................................................................................
Annex F Shared PE conductors and protective earthing .........................................................................................
 BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
DRAFT FOR COMMENTS ONLY
(Not to be reproduced without the permission of BIS or used as a STANDARD)

Draft Indian Standard

CODE OF PRACTICE FOR EARTHING

(Third Revision of IS 3043)

1 SCOPE

1.1 This Code of practice provides recommendations and guidance on meeting the requirements
for the earthing of electrical installation for the purpose of:
a) Protective earthing to limit the potential of non-current carrying metal work
associated with equipment, apparatus and appliance connected to the system with
respect to the general mass of earth during an earth fault,
b) Protective equipotential bonding to protect living beings from electric shock due to
touch and step potentials,
c) Electrical Systems (called as system earthing) to limit the potential of current
carrying conductor with respect to general mass of earth,
d) Earthing and changeover arrangement of multiple sources.

The earthing of an electrical system or installation is generally provided for reasons of safety
and functionality.

1.2 This Code applies only to land-based installations.

It does not apply to:

a) ships, aircrafts, off shore installations.

b) equipment sensitive to static electricity.
c) the internal earthing of the equipment (see 7.1.2 for some examples).
d) the design of earth electrode stations for high-voltage direct current (HVDC) links.
e) Measures for Telecommunication systems in or in the vicinity of MV/HV/EHV
earthing systems.
f) Traction application of Railways

2 REFERENCES

2.1 The standards listed below contain provisions which, through reference in this text,
constitute provisions of this standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were
valid. All standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this standard are
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the standards
listed below. In case the standards are to be referred in this clause they are to be listed as follows:

IS No. Title
IS 732 : 2019 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations (fourth
revision)
IS 9409 : 2023 Protection against electric shock — Common aspects for
installation and equipment (first revision).
 IS/IEC 61936-1: 2021 Power installations exceeding 1 kV a.c. - Part 1 Common Rules
SP 30 : 2023 National Electrical Code of India 2023 (SP 30)
IS 13234 (Part 3) : 2017 Short - Circuit Currents in Three-Phase a.c. Systems Part 3
/ IEC 60909-3 : 2009 Current During Two Separate Simultaneous Line-to-Earth Short
Circuits and Partial Short-Circuit Currents Flowing Through
Earth
IS 11353 : 2023 Basic and Safety Principles for Man-Machine Interface Marking
and Identification - Identification of Equipment Terminals
Conductor Terminations and Conductors (first revision).
IS 13252 (Part 1) : 2010 Information technology equipment - Safety: Part 1 General
requirements
IS/IEC 60479 Effects of current on human beings and livestock:
(Part 1) : 2018 General aspects
(Part 2) : 2019 Special aspects
(Part 3) : 1998 Effects of currents passing through the body of livestock
(Part 4) : 2004 Effects of lightning strokes on human beings and livestock
(Part 5) : 2007 Touch voltage threshold values for physiological effects
IEC 61000-5-2 : 1997 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 5: Installation and
mitigation guidelines – Section 2: Earthing and cabling
ISO/IEC 30129 : 2019 Information technology – Telecommunications bonding
networks for buildings and other structures
IEEE 80 IEEE Guide for Safety in A.C. Substation Grounding

3 TERMINOLOGY

For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions shall apply.

3.1 Arc-Suppression Coil (Peterson Coil)

A single-phase neutral earthing reactor intended for compensating the capacitive line-to-earth
current due to a single-phase earth fault.

3.2 Bonding Conductor (protective bonding conductor)

A protective conductor providing equipotential bonding.

3.3 Class I Equipment

Equipment with at least one provision for basic protection and with means for protective-
equipotential-bonding for fault protection.

3.4 Class II Equipment

Electrical equipment where basic protection and fault protection are provided by double
insulation or reinforced insulation.

NOTE — For information on classification of equipment with regard to means provided for protection against
electric shock (see IS 9409).
3.5 Current to Earth (IE)

Current flowing to earth via the impedance to earth.

NOTE — Current to earth (IE) is different from Earth fault current (IF).

3.6 Dead

At or about earth potential and disconnected from any live system and is used only with
reference to current carrying parts when these parts are not live.

3.7 Discom

Licensee or supplier who supply electricity.

3.8 Double Insulation

Insulation comprising both basic and supplementary insulation.

3.9 Earth (Verb)

To make an electric connection between a conductive part and a local earth.

NOTES

1 The connection to local earth can be intentional, or unintentional or accidental and can be permanent or
temporary.
2 The noun form of "earth" is mentioned as "ground" also in this document.

3.10 Earth Electrode

Conductive part that is in electric contact with local earth, directly or through an intermediate
conductive medium.

3.11 Earth Electrode Resistance

The resistance of an earth electrode to earth.

3.12 Earth Fault

Occurrence of an accidental conductive path between a live part and the Earth

NOTE — The conductive path can consist of faulty insulation, structures (Example: poles, scaffoldings,
cranes, ladders), or vegetation (Example: trees, bushes) and can have a significant impedance.

3.13 Earth Fault Current (IF)

Current which flows from the main circuit to earth or earthed parts at the fault location (earth
fault location)

3.14 Earth Fault Loop Impedance

The impedance of the earth fault current loop (phase-to-earth loop) starting and ending at the
point of earth fault. This impedance is denoted by the symbol Z. The earth fault loop comprises
the following, starting at the point of fault:

a) the protective earthing conductor from the fault point up to the MET.

1) for TN systems, the MET and the metallic return path.

2) for TT systems, the return path through earth electrodes.
3) for IT systems, the earth electrodes and neutral grounding impedance.

c) the earthing conductor up to the neutral terminal of the source which may include the
neutral of the supply conductor (if applicable).
d) the source winding.
e) the line conductor from the source to the point of fault.

NOTE — See 7.4.2.5 for TN system and 7.4.3.2.2 for TT system and Figure E1 and Figure E2 for more
information.

3.15 Earth Grid

A system of interconnected earth electrodes arranged in a pattern over a specified area and
buried below the surface of the ground embedded in soil or concrete.

3.16 Earth Leakage Current

Current flowing from the live parts of the installation to earth, in the absence of an insulation
fault.

NOTE — This current may have a capacitive component including that resulting from the deliberate use of
capacitors.

3.17 Earth Potential

Electric potential with respect to general mass of earth which occurs in, or on the surface of the
earth around an earth electrode when an electric current flows from the electrode to earth.

3.18 Earth Potential Rise (UE)

Voltage between an earthing arrangement and reference earth.

3.19 Earthed Concentric Wiring

A wiring system in which one or more insulated conductors are completely surrounded
throughout their length by a conductor, for example, a sheath which acts as PE/PEN conductor.

3.20 Earthed Conductor

Protective conductor provided by the supplier for protective earthing of consumer electrical
installation. (Example: Protective Earthing conductor in a TN-S system)
 NOTE — Earthed conductors originate from the earthed point of the source and runs along with Live
conductors.

3.21 Earthed Neutral Conductor

Combined Neutral and protective conductor (Example: PEN conductor in a TN-C-S system)

3.22 Earthed Terminal

A terminal which is solidly connected to the earthed conductor or earthed neutral conductor of
an incoming service line. (Example: PEN conductor in a TN-C-S system or PE conductor in a
TN-S system)

3.23 Earthing

Electric connections between conductive parts and local earth.

NOTES

1 The CEA Regulations 2023 define earthing as Connection of the exposed conductive and extraneous parts
of an installation to the MET of that installation or connection of neutral of transformer or generator to
general mass of earth or to earth bonding bar of that installation

2 The IS 732 defines earthing as Connection of the exposed conductive parts of an installation to the MET of
that installation.

3.24 Earthing Arrangement

All the electric connections and devices involved in the earthing of a system, an installation or
equipment.

3.25 Earthing Conductor

Conductor forming a conductive path between a conductive part and an earth electrode.

3.25 Earthing System

Earthing Arrangement (earthing system is a deprecated word. See IEV 826-13-04).

3.26 Equipment

Single apparatus or set of devices or apparatuses, or the set of main devices of an installation,
or all devices necessary to perform a specific task.

NOTE — Examples of equipment are a power transformer, the equipment of a substation, power supplies,
Generators, measuring equipment.

3.27 Equipotential Bonding

Set of electric connections intended to achieve equipotentiality between conductive parts

NOTE — In a building installation, equipotential bonding conductors shall interconnect the extraneous
conductive parts to the MET:
3.28 Exposed Conductive Part

A conductive part of equipment which can be touched and which is not a live part but which
may become live under fault conditions.

3.29 Extraneous Conductive Part

Conductive part not forming part of the electrical installation and liable to introduce an electric
potential, generally the electric potential of a local earth.

3.30 Final Circuit

Electric circuit incorporating current using equipment and/or socket outlets.

3.31 Foundation Earth Electrode

Conductive part buried in the soil under a building foundation or, preferably, embedded in
concrete of a building foundation, generally in form of a closed loop.

3.32 Functional Earthing

Earthing for purposes other than electrical safety.

3.33 Global Earthing System

Equivalent earthing System created by the interconnection of local earthing system that ensures,
by the proximity of the earthing system, that there is no dangerous touch voltage.

NOTES

1 Such a system permit the division of the earth fault current in a way that results in a reduction of the earth
potential rise at the local earthing system. Such a system could be said to form a quasi equipotential surface.

2 The existence of global earthing system may be determined by simple measurement or calculation for typical
system. Typical examples of global earthing systems are in city centre, urban or industrial areas with
distributed low and high voltage earthing.

3.34 Independent Earth Electrodes

earth electrode located at such a distance from other earth electrodes that its electric potential is
not significantly affected by electric currents between Earth and other earth electrodes.

3.35 Impedance to Earth (ZE)

Impedance at a given frequency between a specified point in a system or in an installation or in

equipment and reference earth.

NOTE — Impedance to earth is composed of the resistance to earth of the substation and connected parallel
impedances such as overhead earth wires and cable sheaths.

3.36 Live Part

Conductive part intended to be energized under normal operating conditions, including the
neutral conductor and mid-point conductor, but excluding the PEN conductor, PEM conductor
and PEL conductor.

3.37 Local Earth

Part of the Earth that is in electric contact with an earth electrode and that has an electric
potential not necessarily equal to zero.

3.38 Main Earthing Terminal (MET)

Terminal or busbar that is part of the earthing arrangement of an installation and enabling the
electric connection of a number of conductors used for earthing or bonding purposes.

NOTE — Main Earthing Terminal is also called as Main Earthing Busbar / equipotential bonding conductor.

3.39 Neutral Conductor

A conductor connected to the neutral point of a system and capable of contributing to the
distribution of electrical energy.

3.40 Origin of The Electrical Installation

Point at which electric energy is delivered to the electrical installation.

3.41 PEN Conductor

A PEN conductor is a conductor where the function of a protective earthing conductor is

combined with the function of a neutral conductor. By definition, the PEN is not a live
conductor but a conductor carrying an operating current.

NOTES

1 In case of a single-phase 2-wire arrangement which is derived from a three-phase 4-wire arrangement, the
two conductors are either two line conductors or a line conductor and a neutral conductor or a line conductor
and a PEN conductor.
2 PEN conductor is also called as Earthed Neutral Conductor in CEA Regulations.

3.42 PEL Conductors

A PEL conductor is a conductor where the function of a protective earthing conductor is

combined with the function of a line conductor. By definition, the PEL is not a live conductor
but a conductor carrying an operating current.

3.43 PEM Conductors

A PEM conductor is a conductor where the function of a protective earthing conductor is

combined with the function of a mid-point conductor. By definition, the PEM is not a live
conductor but a conductor carrying an operating current.

3.44 Permanently Connected Equipment

Equipment that can only be connected to or disconnected from the electric power system by the
use of a tool.

3.45 Permissible Touch Voltage (UTp)

Limit value of touch voltage UT

3.46 Pluggable equipment type A

Equipment that is intended for connection to the mains via a non-industrial plug and socket-
outlet or via a non-industrial appliance coupler, or both.

NOTE — For non-industrial plug and socket-outlets, see IS 1293. For non-industrial appliance couplers, see
IEC 60320-1.

3.47 Pluggable Equipment Type B

Equipment that is intended for connection to the mains via an industrial plug and socket-outlet
or via an industrial appliance coupler, or both.
NOTE — For industrial plug and socket-outlets, see IS/IEC 60309-1. For industrial appliance couplers, see
IEC 60309-1.

3.48 Portable Equipment

Equipment which is moved while in operation or which can easily be moved from one place to
another while connected to the supply.
NOTE — Portable equipment carried by a person during its operation is sometimes referred to as hand-held
equipment.

3.49 Potential Grading

Control of the earth potential, especially the earth surface potential, by means of earth
electrodes.

NOTES

1 In the case of high-voltage installations and equipment, potential grading shall prevent persons or livestock
from hazardous step and touch voltages under normal conditions by providing a potential grading earth
electrode.

2 Potential grading may be used by installation of additional earth electrodes to reduce the touch voltage and
step voltage which appear in the case of a fault.

3 Earth electrodes are usually buried at a horizontal distance of 1 m from the equipment or any conductive
part, at a depth of 0.5 m below ground level and are connected to the earthing arrangement.

3.50 Protective Conductor

Conductor provided for purposes of electrical safety.

NOTE — Protective conductor is used for connecting any of the following parts:
 1 Exposed conductive parts,
2 Extraneous conductive parts,
3 Main earthing terminal (MET), and
4 Earthed point of the source or an artificial neutral.

3.51 Protective Earthing

Earthing for purposes of electrical safety

3.52 Protective Earthing Conductor (PE conductor)

Protective conductor provided for protective earthing.

3.53 Prospective Touch Voltage (UvT)

Voltage between simultaneously accessible conductive parts when those conductive parts are
not touched simultaneously by a person.

3.54 Prospective permissible touch voltage (UvTp)

Limit value of prospective touch voltage UvT.

3.55 Reference Earth

Part of the Earth considered as conductive, the electric potential of which is conventionally
taken as zero, being outside the zone of influence of any earthing arrangement.

3.56 Reinforced Insulation

Insulation that provides a degree of protection against electric shock equivalent to double
insulation.

NOTE — Reinforced insulation can comprise several layers that cannot be tested singly as basic insulation or
supplementary insulation.

3.57 Residual Current Device (RCD)

Mechanical switching device or association of devices designed to make, carry and break
currents under normal service conditions and to cause the opening of the contacts when the
residual current attains a given value under specified conditions.

3.58 Residual Operating Current

Value of residual current which causes the residual current device to operate under specified
conditions.

3.59 Resistance Area (for an Earth Electrode only)

The surface area of ground (around an earth electrode) on which a significant voltage gradient
may exist.

3.60 Resistance Earthed System

A system earthed through a high resistance to limits the earth fault current.

3.61 Simultaneously Accessible Parts

Conductors or conductive parts which can be touched simultaneously by a person or, where
applicable, by livestock.

NOTES

1 In the context of protection against direct contacts a live part may be accessible with:

i) another live part, or

ii) an exposed conductive part, or
iii) an extraneous conductive part, or
iv) a protective conductor.

2 The following may constitute simultaneously accessible parts in the context of protection against indirect
contacts:

i) Exposed conductive parts,

ii) Extraneous conductive parts, and
iii) Protective conductors.

3 It should be noted that the word touched signifies any contact with any part of the body (hand, foot, head,
etc).

3.62 Structural Earth Electrode

Metal part, which is in conductive contact with the earth or with water directly or via concrete,
whose original purpose is not earthing, but which fulfils all requirements of an earth electrode
without impairment of the original purpose.

NOTE — Examples of structural earth electrodes are pipelines, sheet piling, concrete reinforcement bars in
foundations and the steel structure of buildings, etc.

3.63 Supplementary Insulation

Independent insulation applied in addition to basic insulation, in order to provide protection

against electric shock in the event of a failure of basic insulation.

3.64 Switchgear

An assembly of main and auxiliary switching apparatus for operation, regulation, protection or
other control of electrical installations.

NOTE — A more comprehensive definition of the term ‘Switchgear’ can be had from IS 1885 (Part 17).

3.65 System-Referencing-Conductor (SRC)

A system-referencing-conductor is a conductor between a live part and an earthing arrangement

for enabling the live part to be substantially at the potential of the earthing arrangement.
 NOTE — Where it is considered necessary, a system-referencing-conductor may be provided with protective
provisions to ensure its effectiveness throughout the lifetime of the system. It shall be ensured that those
provisions will not have a detrimental effect on the characteristic behaviour of the system.

3.66 Solidly Earthed System

System in which at least one live part is earthed directly.

3.67 Step Voltage

The voltage between two points on the Earth's surface that are 1 m distant from each other (see
Figure 1).

Key
E Earth electrode
S1, S2, S3 Potential grading earth electrodes (Example: ring earth electrodes), connected to the earth
electrode E (see Figure 44)
UE Earth potential rise
UvS Prospective step voltage
UvT Prospective touch voltage
A Prospective touch voltage resulting from transferred potential in case of single side cable
sheath earthing
B Prospective touch voltage resulting from transferred potential in case of cable sheath earthed
on both sides
φ Earth surface potential

NOTE — For More information see 10.

Figure 1 Example for The Surface Potential Profile During an Earth Fault in System with A
Nominal Voltage (Un) Exceeding 1000 V a.c., The Resulting Step and Touch Voltages,

3.68 Touch Voltage

Voltage between conductive parts when touched simultaneously.
NOTES

1 Voltage between conductive parts when touched simultaneously that is the potential difference between an
exposed conductive part and a point on a extraneous conductive part liable to transmit a potential including
earth potential and not forming part of the electrical installation or a point on earth’s surface separated by a
distance equal to the maximum normal reach (hand to hand or hand to foot) approximately one metre
(see Figure 1).

2 The value of the effective touch voltage is influenced by the impedance of the person in electrical contact
with these conductive parts.

3.69 Transferred Potential

Potential rise of an earthing system caused by a current to earth transferred by means of a

connected conductor (for example a metallic cable sheath, PEN conductor, pipeline, rail) into
areas with low or no potential rise related to reference earth resulting in a potential difference
occurring between the conductor and its surroundings.
NOTES

1 The definition also applies where a conductor which is connected to reference earth, leads into the area of
the potential rise.

2 Transferred potential can result in electrocution path through the human body other than the ‘touch
voltage’ path that is hand to hand.

3.70 Voltage Nominal (Un)

Voltage by which an installation (or part of an installation) is designated and identified.

3.68.1 ELV (Extra Low Voltage) A system with a nominal voltage

Un ≤ 50 V a.c. or ≤ 120 V d.c.
3.68.2 LV (Low Voltage) A system with a nominal voltage
Un ≤ 1000 V a.c. and ≤ 1500 V d.c.
3.68.3 MV (Medium Voltage) A system with a nominal rms voltage is
1 kV < Un ≤ 33 kV.
3.68.4 HV (High Voltage) A system with a nominal rms voltage is
33 < Un ≤ 150 kV.
3.68.5 EHV (Extra High Voltage) A system with a nominal rms voltage is
> 150 kV.
NOTE — ELV is a subcategory under LV, hence minimum value is not considered.

3.71 Symbols and Numbering Used in Earthing and Bonding, for Use on Equipment and
Their Definition.
 Figure 1 Symbols/Numbering Used for Earthing and Bonding on Equipment
No. 5017 Earth — To identify an earth terminal in cases where neither the symbol 5018 nor 5019 is explicitly
stated.

No. 5018 Functional Earth — To identify a noiseless (clean) earth terminal, of an equipment. These terminals
are to be connected to specially designed functional earthing arrangement to avoid causing malfunction of the
equipment.

No. 5019 Protective Earth — To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external
conductor for protection against electrical shock in case of a fault.

No. 5020 Frame or chassis (also called as functional bonding) — To identify a frame or chassis terminal.
(Example: measure to enhance the immunity of the equipment against conducted and radiated RF disturbance
- connection of sensitive electrical circuits to the chassis).

No. 5021 Frame or chassis Equipotentiality — To identify the terminals when connected, bring the various
parts of an equipment or of a system to the same potential, not necessarily being the earth potential, Example:
for local bonding.

No 5173 Signal low terminal — To indicate the signal terminal the potential of which is closest to the earth or
chassis potential.

No 6032 — Do not connect to protective earth.

4 STATUTORY PROVISIONS FOR EARTHING

4.1 Requirements from CEA Safety Regulations

4.1.1 Earthing must be in accordance with the requirements of Central Electricity Authority
(Measures Relating to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2023, as amended from time-
to-time. Regulation 14 (2) and (3) need compliance to NEC and IS Standards.

NOTES

1 Regulation 14 (2): Save as otherwise provided in these regulations, the relevant standards including National
Electrical Code and National Building Code shall be followed to carry out the purpose of these regulations
and where relevant Indian standards are not available, international standards shall be followed and in the
event of any inconsistency, the provisions of these regulations shall prevail.

2 Regulation 14 (3): The material and apparatus used shall conform to the relevant standards.

3 When the earthing of a consumer’s installation is planned, prior consultation should take place between the
consultant or contractor and the supply authority. Where necessary, precautions will be taken in order to
avoid any interference with the telecommunication system.

4 The regulations made by CEA require that every electrical network at whatever voltage be connected with
earth and that the connection is maintained under fault conditions in a sound manner. This requirement is
primarily to preserve the security of the system by ensuring that the potential on each conductor is restricted
to such a value as is consistent with the level of insulation applied.
4.2 Requirements for Earthing in Low Voltage Electrical Installations

NOTE — See requirement from CEA Safety Regulation 16, 17,18, 43 and 74 for public distribution system.

4.2.1 Where the neutral and protective conductors (earthed conductors) of electricity supply
system up to 1000 V a.c of electrical supply undertaking are combined, it is called as TN-C-S
system. The PEN conductor, which is referred to as a combined neutral and earth conductor, is
earthed at the source and extremities of the distribution mains and point in between. This is also
called as protective multiple earthing (PME), which is the recommended system in the
regulations to be adopted by the Electrical supply undertakings.

4.2.2 Multiple earthing of the PEN conductor ensures that if this conductor becomes open
circuit for any reason (probably cut or snapped at the distribution), exposed-conductor parts
remain connected to earth.

4.2.3 In a TN-C-S system, where the supply is TN-C and the arrangement in the installations
is TN-S, the PEN conductor shall be separated into PE and N conductor at the origin of
installation, through a link suitable for disconnection (Example: disconnection required during
insulation resistance test).

Figure 3A: Typical Connection Diagram of A

Pen Conductor in A Tn-C-S Network And
Separation of Pe Conductor Through A Link
(Case 1).

Figure 3b: Typical Connection Diagram of A

Pen Conductor In A Tn-C-S Network And
Separation of Pe Conductor Through A Link
(Case 2).
 Figure 3c: Typical Connection Diagram of A
Pen Conductor in A Tn-C-S Network And
Separation of Pe Conductor Through A Link
(Case 3).

4.2.4 All equipment of voltages of 250 V to 1000 V shall be earthed by two separate and
distinct connections with earthing arrangement. However the number of connections should be
restricted to one, if only one provision is provided by the equipment manufacturer, and the
equipment confirm the relevant Indian/IEC standard.

4.2.5 Every building shall have protective equipotential bonding by interconnecting the
exposed and extraneous conductive parts as per this code of practice.

4.2.6 All earthing systems shall, consist of protective equipotential bonding capable of
carrying the prospective earth fault current without exceeding the allowable temperature limits
as per this code in order to maintain all noncurrent carrying metal works reasonably at earth
potential and to avoid dangerous contact potentials being developed on such metal works.

4.2.7 All earthing system shall have earth fault loop impedance sufficiently low to permit
adequate fault current for the operation of protective device within the time stipulated in Table
1 (also see 7.4.1.8 to 7.4.1.12).

4.2.8 Where multiple sources are used (Example: DG), the requirement of sufficiently low
earth fault loop impedance is applicable for every source.

Table 1 Maximum Disconnection Times.

(Clause 4.2.8)

Sl No. System 50 V < UO ≤ 120 V 120 V < UO ≤ 230 V 230 V < UO ≤ 400 V UO >400 V
s s s s
a.c d.c a.c d.c a.c d.c a.c d.c
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
i) TN 0.8 Note 1 0.4 5 0.2 0.4 0.1 0.1
ii) TT 0.3 Note 1 0.2 0.4 0.07 0.2 0.04 0.1

iii) Maximum disconnection times as per this table are applicable, where fault
protection is achieved by protective earthing, protective equipotential bonding and
automatic disconnection of supply as per clause 4.2.11.3 of IS732. In locations
where protective equipotential bonding does not exist, the maximum allowed
disconnection time shall be 0.2 s. The existence of protective equipotential bonding
shall be proved by a touch voltage test.
 In TT systems where the disconnection is achieved by an overcurrent protective
device and the protective equipotential bonding is connected with all extraneous-
conductive-parts within the installation, the maximum disconnection times
applicable to TN systems may be used.

Uo is the nominal a.c. or d.c. line to earth voltage.

Clauses 7.4.1.8 to 7.4.1.12 applies along with this table on disconnection time.

NOTE — Disconnection may be required for reasons other than protection against electric shock.

4.2.9 Be mechanically strong, withstand corrosion and retain electrical continuity during the
life of the installation and all earthing arrangements shall be tested to ensure effective bonding
before the electric supply lines or apparatus are energised.

4.2.10 Each earthing arrangement shall be so devised that the testing of protective conductors
is possible.

NOTE — Continuity of protective conductors and efficiency of automatic disconnection shall be tested as per
clause 6 of IS 732 or part 1 section 17 of NEC 2023 (SP 30).

4.2.11 It is recommended that a drawing showing the main earthing arrangement be prepared
for each installation.

4.2.12 No addition to the current-carrying system, either temporary or permanent, shall be

made which will increase the maximum available earth fault current or its duration until it has
been ascertained that the existing earthing arrangements are capable of carrying the new value
of earth fault current which may be obtained by this addition.

4.2.13 No cut-out, link, switch or circuit breaker other than a linked switch arranged to operate
simultaneously on the earthed or earthed neutral conductor and live conductors shall be inserted
or remain inserted in any earthed or earthed neutral conductor of a two wire-system or in any
earthed or earthed neutral conductor of a multi-wire system or in any conductor connected
thereto: This, however, does not include the case of a switch for use in controlling a generator
or a transformer or a link for test purposes.

4.2.14 As far as possible, all earth connections shall be visible for inspection.

4.2.15 In cases where direct earthing such as TN/TT system may prove harmful effect rather
than provide safety (for example, power supply to Operation Theatre in hospitals /
Instrumentation system / Building Management and security system), IT system may be used.

4.2.16 Earthing arrangements at origin of installation for PEN, PEL or PEM conductors.
PEN, PEL or PEM conductors serve two functions, as PE and either as N, L or M conductors,
all applicable requirements for the relevant functions should be considered.

NOTE — N – Neutral conductor, L – Line conductor and M – Midpoint conductor. See 4.1.5.8 of IS 732.

a) PEN conductor should not be installed downstream of the origin of the installation.
b) PEN, PEL or PEM conductor are not permitted in explosive atmospheres.
c) For mechanical reasons, PEN, PEL or PEM conductor shall have a cross-sectional area
not less than 10 mm2 copper or 16 mm² aluminium.
 d) PEN, PEL or PEM conductors are not permitted downstream origin of installation. The
neutral/mid-point/line and protective functions are provided by separate conductors
downstream origin of installation. It is not permitted to connect the neutral/midpoint/
line conductor to any other earthed part of the installation.

e) The PEN, PEL or PEM conductor shall be insulated for the rated voltage of the line
conductor or made inaccessible.

f) Metallic enclosures of wiring systems shall not be used as PEN, PEL or PEM
conductors, except for busbar trunking systems complying with IS 8623 (Part 2) and for
power track systems complying with IEC 61534-1.

g) The PEN, PEL or PEM conductor shall be connected to the terminal or bar intended for
the protective conductors (see Figure 3A), unless there is a specific terminal or bar
intended for the connection of the PEN, PEL or PEM conductor (see Figure 3B and
Figure 3C).

h) Extraneous-conductive-parts shall not be used as PEN, PEL or PEM conductors.

j) Earthed Neutral conductor from the supplier can be connected to earthed terminal as per
the Figure 3 (A to C).

4.2.17 Protection against earth fault and additional protection.

4.2.17.1 The CEA Safety Regulation 44 require RCD for certain application and not for every
application.

NOTES

Regulation 44 Residual Current Device as below.

1 The use of electricity to electrical installation, shall be controlled by a residual current device to
disconnect the supply having rated residual current and duration as per the relevant standards:

2 Provided that in domestic installation, residual current device having residual operating current not
exceeding 30 milliampere shall be used:

3 Provided further that such protective device shall not be required for supply lines having protective
devices which are effectively bonded to the neutral of supply transformers and conforming to regulation
76.

4.2.17.2 The regulation 43 (xi) and (xii) need automatic disconnection of fault by testing and
ensuring low earth fault loop impedance. However, in TT system earth fault loop impedance
may not be sufficiently low to disconnect an OCPD, hence an RCD may be required as an earth
fault protective measure to disconnect the supply within the time specified in Table 1.

4.2.17.3 The Regulation 44 (para 2) Every domestic installation RCD having IΔn 30 mA shall
be used. Providing 30 mA RCD at origin of installation may not be practical due to higher
leakage current inherent in the installation. In such cases RCD with IΔn ≤ 30 mA should be used
in circuits.

4.2.17.4 Regulation 44 (para 3) relaxes the use of RCD. In such case fault protection shall be
achieved in compliance to regulation 43(xi) and (xii) with an OCPD. (see 7.5.3 to 7.5.4).
Requirements of RCDs for additional protection against shock and fire protection apply as
relevant (see 7.5.5 and 7.5.6).

4.2.17.5 RCDs are classified into Type a.c., Type A, Type F and Type B. Appropriate types
shall be used in a given application (see 7.5.7)

4.3 Requirements for Earthing in Electrical Installations with A Nominal Voltage

Exceeding 1 KV A.C

NOTE — See requirement from CEA Safety Regulation 16, 17,18, 50 and 74 for public distribution system.

4.3.1 Requirements from Regulation 50.

a) The entire switchyard or substation equipment and buildings including all non-current
carrying metal parts associated with an installation shall be effectively earthed to an
earthing system or mat which shall,

b) limit the earth potential rise to tolerable values as per relevant standards, so as to prevent
danger due to transfer of potential through ground, earth wires, cable sheath, fences,
pipelines or other such equipment; and

c) maintain the resistance of the earth connection to such a value as to make operation of
the protective device effective.

4.3.2 In the case of high and extra high voltages, the neutral points shall be earthed by not less
than two separate and distinct connections with earthing arrangement. If necessary, the neutral
may be earthed through suitable impedance.

4.3.3 In cases where direct earthing may prove harmful rather than provide safety (for example,
high frequency and mains frequency coreless induction furnaces), relaxation may be obtained
from the competent authority.

4.3.4 Earthing arrangement shall be provided at generating stations, substations and consumer
premises in accordance with the requirements of this Code. (see clauses 7, 10 and 11).

NOTE — See Figure 5 for Permissible touch voltage limits UTp and 5.1 and 5.2 for calculated touch
voltage.

4.4 Earthing Associated with Overhead Power Lines.

4.4.1 General

a) Earthing systems of overhead lines must be designed to prioritize public safety by

maintaining touch and step voltages within tolerable limits (see Figure 5) during fault.

b) Continuous overhead earth conductor shall be provided for all lines with a nominal
voltage exceeding 1 kV a.c.

NOTES

1 The continuous earth conductor form a low resistance return path for earth fault currents necessary for the
operation of protective systems, and
2 To reduce the effects of induced voltage in adjacent communication circuits under fault conditions.

c) Metallic poles / structures are earthed to the continuous earth wire.

d) Supports of non-conducting material such as wooden poles need not be earthed.

e) The design of earthing systems must satisfy the following key requirements:

1) Protect personal safety by limiting touch and step voltages during an earth fault.

2) Ensure mechanical strength and resistance to corrosion by adhering to minimum

dimension of earthing conductors.

3) Withstand the maximum fault current, as determined through calculations, from a

thermal perspective.

f) The supplier shall provide fault current levels.

g) The sizing of earthing conductors should be based on fault current levels governed by
the electrical system rather than the overhead line and the values shall be provided by
the network utility. In some cases, steady-state zero-sequence currents should be taken
into account for the dimensioning of the relevant earthing system. For design purposes,
the currents used to calculate the conductor size should take into account the possibility
of future growth. The fault current is often subdivided in the earth electrode system; it
is, therefore, possible to dimension each electrode for only a fraction of the fault
current.

h) When overhead lines of two or more voltage levels are taken on same support, the
earthing system must meet the requirements for each voltage level individually.
However, simultaneous faults in the different voltage circuits need not be considered.

j) The tower footing resistance values have an influence on the back-flashover or the
induced lightning surge of the line and therefore affect the lightning performance of the
lines. Hence the maximum resistance of tower footings may be arrived.

k) Back flashovers are most likely to occur on the phase which has the highest
instantaneous power-frequency voltage value of opposite polarity. This means that, for
substations, the representative longitudinal lightning overvoltage shall be equal
to the sum of the representative lightning overvoltage to earth at one terminal and of
the operating voltage peak at the other (opposite polarity).

m) Insulated cables shall be installed so that touch voltages are within the permissible
values, or so that accessible parts with impermissible touch voltages are protected
against contact by adequate measures.

n) When earthing metallic screens and sheaths, consideration should be given to issues
such as induced voltages, fault currents, transfer voltages and current transformer
locations.

p) When earthing metallic screens and sheaths, there may can be a risk of high circulating
currents in screens of sheathed single-core cables, especially when laid flat.
 q) In some special cases, Example: cathodic protection of cables, it may be necessary to
separate the earth connection of the cables from the GIS enclosure. In this case, the
installation of a voltage surge protection device is recommended between the sealing
end and enclosure.

r) For further reference see IS 5613 (all parts).

4.4.2 Type of Support

Any consideration of whether metalwork associated with overhead power lines should be
earthed and/or bonded has to take account of the type of support. Some overhead lines are
supported by lattice towers of metallic construction, others by poles, which may be of steel,
wood, concrete or of fabricated construction, for example, glass-reinforced plastics; brackets
attached to buildings are also used to support conductors.

4.4.3 Insulation Failure

Following an insulation failure, a voltage may exist between any supporting metalwork and
earth. The public are generally protected if no metalwork within 3 m of the earth is liable to
become live on failure of insulation. If the supports are close to buildings, etc, the particular
circumstances have to be considered.

4.4.4 Lattice Steel Structures

There will often be satisfactory earthing of lattice steel structures, poles of metallic construction
and reinforced concrete poles through their contact with the earth. In areas of high earth
resistivity, special earthing arrangements may be necessary; an overhead protective conductor
attached at each support and connected to the neutral of the supply and of the line may be the
most economical solution. This conductor if positioned above the live conductors will also
provide a measure of lightning protection.

NOTE — See IS 5613 (all parts) for more information.

4.4.5 Poles of Non-conducting Material

4.4.5.1 General

Where a pole is of non-conducting material, for example wood or glass-reinforced plastics, the
pole will act against the flow of leakage current and can be expected to prevent danger near
ground level due to leakage across or failure of any insulator supporting a line conductor, except
where there is intervening equipment or metalwork that is or may become live.

For the reasons given in 4.4.5.2 to 4.4.5.4, there are advantages in not earthing the pole-top
metalwork of such poles and in not making bonding connections to it.

NOTE — This does not omit the usage of continuous earth wire required under various Regulations.

4.4.5.2 Omission of bonding

Where insulators are attached to a pole or to non-conducting cross-arms, etc, attached to the
pole, omission of bonding of pole-top metalwork gives a greater impulse withstand voltage, so
there is less risk of faults due to phase-to-phase flashover. To reduce risk of fire, where wooden
cross-arms are used, care should be taken to make close, fire contact between the cross-arm and
the insulator pipe.

4.4.5.3 Omission of earthing

If pole top metalwork is not earthed, transient faults due to birds, flying branches, etc, bridging
the clearance between line conductors and the metalwork are greatly reduced.

4.4.5.4 Transformers, rod-operated switchgear and cable terminations

In cases where equipment, such as transformers, rod-operated switchgear or cable terminations

are mounted on a wooden or reinforced plastics pole, the impulse flashover value of the
additional insulation provided by the pole is impaired, and all the metal work on the pole needs
to be bonded and earthed.

4.4.6 Stays

To prevent stay corrosion that would otherwise occur due to passage of small leakage currents
occurring even in normal operation, stay insulators should be fitted in stay wires on poles.

No part of the stay insulator should be less than 3 m above ground; it should be fitted as high
up the stay as possible, but the stay insulator should be so positioned that there can be no contact
below the stay insulator between the stay wire and any phase conductor (including a jumper
connection), should either of them break or become loose.

4.4.7 Earth Wires and Earth Connection

Any connection between metalwork and earth has to be of low resistivity, both to provide for
prompt operation of protective equipment and to minimize inductive interference with
communications circuits in the event of a flow of fault current. Electromagnetic interference is
reduced if the resistance of the earth return path is small compared with its reactance. At 50 Hz,
inductive interference may be caused by the use of a high-resistivity wire (for example, steel
wire) even if it is perfectly earthed. A single low-resistivity earth wire made of copper,
aluminium etc, should be used and it should avoid passing close to conductors or cables
belonging to other circuits. It should be protected against mechanical damage for a distance of
3 m above ground level.

4.4.8 Lightning Protection

A lightning conductor attached to a structure and earthed at its lower end acts to reduce the
likelihood of an arching during a lightning strike. An over-running aerial earth-wire on overhead
power line, besides forming part, of the earth return path, also gives a degree of lightning
protection. The lower the impedance between aerial earth-wire and earth, the better is the
protection since this reduces the possibility of a back flashover from the earthed metalwork to
line conductors on the occasion of a direct strike to the earth wire.

4.5 Protective Bonding and Conductors

4.5.1 Two distinct and separate earth connections are recommended (called as double earthing),
to ensure redundancy in protective earthing. However modern, indoor/outdoor equipment may
not have provision for double earthing. In such case modifying the equipment for making
additional provision for second protective earth connection may damage the equipment, under
such condition duplicate connection shall not be made, provided the class 1 equipment satisfies
the requirement of the relevant product standard. A typical schematic of earthing and protective
conductors for Low Voltage electrical installation in a building is given in Figure 4.

M = Exposed conductive parts of class I

equipment
P = Incoming metallic service
C = Extraneous conductive parts
EE = Earth electrode
1 = MET (Equipotential bonding conductor)
2 = Protective earthing conductor (in duplicate)
3 = Earthing conductor

Figure 4 Typical Schematic of Earthing and Protective Conductors

4.5.1.1 Protective earthing conductor (Sl No 2 in Figure 4) connects exposed conductive part to
MET. Protective earthing conductor shown in duplicate (meaning two connection /
conventionally called as double earthing) can be made if the class I equipment have provision
for duplicate connection.

4.5.1.2 The number of PE conductor connections to MET can be restricted to one, if only one
provision is available in the equipment, provided the equipment confirms the relevant IS/IEC
standard.

4.5.2 Duplicate connection of PE conductor shall be required in cases where reinforced

protective earthing conductors as per clause 5.4.3.7 of IS732 is necessary.

4.5.3 If industrial sockets as per IS/IEC 60309 are used, the PE conductor shall be a part of
multi core cable (Example: 3 core cable for 1 phase and 5 core cable for 3 phase applications).
In such conditions, duplicate connection may be avoided.

4.5.4 Where a protective conductor is common to two or more circuits, its cross-sectional area
shall be:

a) calculated in accordance with 7.3.2.1 for the most onerous prospective fault current and
operating time encountered in these circuits; or

b) selected in accordance with Table 12 so as to correspond to the cross-sectional area of

the largest line conductor of the circuits.

4.5.5 The protective conductor shall be incorporated in the same wiring system as the live
conductors or in their immediate proximity to avoid creation of large loops, which may create
EMI and electromechanical forces during an overcurrent.

4.5.5.1 EMI produced due to large loops may affect the performance of electronic equipment.

4.5.5.2 Complete electrical installation including cables installed in cable trays / ladders and
wiring inside switchgear and controlgear assemblies should be protected against
electromechanical forces.

4.5.6 For industrial and commercial installations, where multiple runs of cables run through
trench / trays / ladders, at least one run of shared PE conductor (or equipotential bonding
conductor (sl no 1 in Figure 4) is required. The armoring of cables may be used as additional
PE conductor, provided the armoring is bonded to earthing arrangement by materials which
satisfy the requirement of 7.3.2.1 or table 12.

4.5.7 For larger buildings (typically more than 20 meters in length), it is recommended to repeat
the equipotential bonding at every 20 m.

4.5.8 For buildings with several floors, it is recommended that, on each floor, an equipotential
bonding system be installed. The bonding systems of the different floors should be
interconnected, at least twice, by conductors.

5 GENERAL INFORMATION

5.1 Calculation of Earth Fault Currents

5.1.1 The magnitude of the current that will flow in the event of a line-to-earth fault on an
earthed system is determined by the impedance from the source to the fault plus the impedance
of the earth return path, including the impedances of earthing transformers, resistors and
reactors (see IS 13234). For interconnected systems, the calculation of the current may be
complicated.

5.1.2 When a single line-to-earth fault occurs on a resistance earthed system, a voltage appears
across the resistor nearly equal to the normal line-to-neutral voltage of the system.

5.1.3 In solidly earthed systems of more than 1000 V a.c., the current is approximately equal to
the line-to-neutral voltage divided by the impedance of the loop in ohms (Ω). This simple
method is only suitable when the earth fault current is small compared to 3-phase fault current.
The fault current can be computed from:

3𝐸
𝐼𝐹 =
𝑋1 + 𝑋2 + 𝑋0 + 3𝑋𝐺𝑃

5.1.4 In a resistance earthed system of more than 1000 V a.c with a single line-to-earth fault,
the earth fault current may be computed from:

3𝐸
𝐼𝐹 =
𝑋1 + 𝑋2 + 𝑋0 + 3(𝑋𝑛 + 𝑋𝐺𝑃 )

where
IF = earth fault current in A,
X1 = system +ve sequence reactance in Ω /phase including the sub transient
reactance of the rotating machines,
X2 = –ve sequence reactance as for X1,
X0 = zero sequence reactance as for X1,
Xn = reactance of neutral earthing reactor,
XGP = reactance of earth return circuits, and
E = line-to-earth voltage in V.

In most industrial and commercial systems without in plant generator X2 = X1.

NOTES
 1 Clause 10.2.5, also can be referred for calculating earth fault current.
2 The current to earth electrodes IE shall be calculated from the fault current IF.

5.1.5 For Low voltage applications, the following formula shall be followed to determine the
earth fault current, considering the increase of resistance of the conductors with the increase of
temperature due to faults.

2 𝑈0
𝑍𝑠 (Ω) ≤ ×
3 𝐼𝑎

where

ZS(Ω) = the calculated and / or measured impedance of the fault current loop starting and
ending at the point of fault (measured in Ω);
Uo = the line conductor to earthed neutral voltage (V); and
Ia = the fault current causing the automatic operation of the protective device within the
allowed disconnection time.

5.2 Tolerable Values of Touch and Step Voltage

5.2.1 General

The tolerable values of touch and step voltages can be calculated as per 5.2.1 to 5.2.4.

a) IS/IEC 60479 – (part 1 to 5) Effects of current on human beings and livestock.

b) IS 9409: Protection against electric shock – Common aspects for installations and
equipment.
c) IS/IEC 61936 – 1 Power installations exceeding 1 kV a.c. and 1.5 kV d.c. Part 1: a.c.
d) IS/IEC 61936 – 2 Power installations exceeding 1 kV a.c. and 1.5 kV d.c. Part 1: d.c.
e) See Figure 5 for Permissible Touch Voltage.

5.2.1. Permissible Touch Voltage

The equation to calculate the permissible touch voltage in a.c. system is as follows.

1
𝑈𝑇𝑝 = 𝐼𝐵 (𝑡𝑓 ) × × 𝑍𝑇 (𝑈𝑇 ) × 𝐵𝐹
𝐻𝐹
Where,

UT is touch voltage
UTp is permissible touch voltage
tf is fault duration
IB(tf) is body current limit c2 in Figure 20 and Table 11 of IS/IEC 60479-
1,where probability of ventricular fibrillation is less than 5 percent. IB
depends on fault duration
HF is heart current factor Table 12 of IS/IEC 60479-1, example: 1.0 for left
hand to feet, 0.8 for right hand to feet, 0.4 for hand to hand
ZT(UT) is body impedance Table 1 and Figure 3 of IS/IEC 60479-1:2018, ZT
not exceeded by 50 percent of the population, ZT depends on touch
voltage. Therefore, first calculation has to start with assumed level
 BF is body factor Figure 3 of IS/IEC 60479-1, example: 0.75 for hand to
both feet, 0.5 for both hands to feet

NOTE — Different touch voltage conditions, Example: left hand to feet, hand to hand, lead to different
tolerable touch voltages. Figure 5 of this code is based on a weighted average taken from four different touch
voltage configurations. Touch voltage left hand to feet (weighted 1.0), touch voltage right hand to feet
(weighted 1.0), touch voltage both hands to feet (weighted 1.0) and touch voltage hand to hand (weighted 0.7).

Figure 5 Permissible Touch Voltage. (Tolerable Fault Voltage Due to An Earth-Fault in The HV
System)

NOTE — The curve is based on data extracted from IS/IEC 60479-1 as below:

a) Body impedance from Table 1 of IS/IEC 60479-1, (not exceeded by 50 percent of the population);
b) Permissible body current corresponding to the c2 curve in Figure 20 and Table 11 of IS/IEC 60479-1
(probability of ventricular fibrillation is less than 5 percent);
c) Heart-current factor according to Table 12 of IS/IEC 60479-1.
d) See IS/IEC 61936-1 for more information.

5.2.2 Prospective Permissible Touch Voltage

For specific consideration of additional resistances, the formula to determine prospective

permissible touch voltage becomes:

1
𝑈𝑣𝑇𝑝 = 𝐼𝐵 (𝑡𝑓 ) × × (𝑍𝑇 (𝑈𝑇 ) × 𝐵𝐹 + 𝑅𝐻 + 𝑅𝐹 )
𝐻𝐹
Where,
UvTp is prospective permissible touch voltage,
RH is additional hand resistance,
RF is additional foot resistance. RF includes resistance of footwear (RF1) and resistance to
earth of standing point (RF2).

Where,

RF2 = 1.5 m-1 *ρS

ρS Specific soil resistivity of surface.
If specific soil resistivity of surface is unknown, RF2 can be neglected. Method of measurement
of specific soil resistivity of surface is under consideration.

NOTE — For calculation of permissible Touch voltage UTp in d.c. systems, refer IS/IEC 61936-2.

5.2.3 Permissible Touch Voltage with Additional Resistances

5.2.3.1 Touch voltages with additional resistance shall be considered only in substation where
the public are not allowed.

5.2.3.2 Calculated values of the permissible touch voltage with out and with additional
resistance as a function of the fault duration is provided as an example in table 2. Calculation
based on 5.2.2 considering actual conditions of additional resistances shall be considered.

Table 2 Calculated Values of The Permissible Touch Voltage with Out and With
Additional Resistance as a Function of The Fault Duration.

Sl Permissible Touch Voltage Permissible Touch Voltage (UvTP) with

Fault
No. (UTp) without additional additional resistance (RF)
Duration
resistance (UvTP1) in (UvTP2) in (UvTP3) in (UvTP4) in
(tf)
in V V V V V
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) 0.1 478 1040 1790 2350 3470
ii) 0.2 428 870 1470 1920 2820
iii) 0.5 199 350 550 700 1000
iv) 1 104 160 240 300 420
v) 3 77 115 160 200 280

NOTES

1 RF considered in UvTP1 is 750 Ω, UvTP2 is 1750 Ω, UvTP3 is 2500 Ω, and UvTP4 is 4000 Ω
2 Body factor of 0.75 considered in Table 2. See IS/IEC 60479-1 Table 3.

5.2.4 Permissible Step Voltages

5.2.4.0 General

As a general rule, the touch voltage requirements satisfy the step voltage requirements, because
the tolerable step voltage limits are much higher than the touch voltage limits due to the different
current path through the body (heart current factor HF = 0.04).
5.2.4.1 In special cases with high UE (earth potential rise), step voltage limits shall be
considered. In this case the permissible step voltage is derived similar to the method in 5.2.1
and taking into account the following factors, but without weighing.

Step voltage should be considered at the boundaries of the earthing system when Example: UE
> 20 x UTp depending on fault duration.

Body current limit IB(tf) c2 in IS/IEC 60479-1, c and Table 11 where

probability of ventricular fibrillation is less than 5 percent,
Heart current factor HF IS/IEC 60479-1, Table 12 example: 0,04 for left foot to the right
foot,
Body impedance ZT(UT) IS/IEC 60479-1, Table 1 and Figure 3, ZT not exceeded
by 50 percent of the population
Body factor BF IS/IEC 60479-1, Figure 3, example: 1 for left foot to right foot.

5.2.4.2 Permissible step voltage with additional resistances

5.2.4.2.1 Step voltages with additional resistance shall be considered only in substation where
the public are not allowed.

5.2.4.2.2 Calculated values of the permissible step voltage with out and with additional
resistance as a function of the fault duration is provided as an example in table 3. Calculation
based on 5.2.2 and 5.2.4 considering actual conditions of additional resistances shall be
considered.

Table 3 Calculated Values of Step Voltage with Out and With Additional Resistance as
A Function of The Fault Duration.

Sl Permissible Step Voltage Permissible Step Voltage with

Fault
No. (USP) without additional additional resistance (RF)
Duration
resistance (UvSP1) (UvSP2) (UvSP3) (UvSP4)
(tf)
in V
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) 0.1 15900 16500 17250 17800 18900
ii) 0.2 14250 14700 15300 15750 16650
iii) 0.5 6600 6750 6950 7100 7400
iv) 1 3450 3500 3550 3650 3750
v) ≥3 2550 2550 2600 2650 2750

NOTES

1 RF considered in UvSP1 is 750 Ω, UvSP2 is 1750 Ω, UvSP3 is 2500 Ω, and UvSP4 is 4000 Ω
2 Body factor of 1 considered in Table 3. See IS/IEC 60479-1 Table 3.

5.2.5 Permissible values

The limit value of the touch voltage (UT) is the permissible touch voltage (UTp) and is given in
Figure 5, representing the limit values of permissible touch voltage UTp depending on the fault
duration.

Step voltage limits can be derived according to 5.2.4, but are only needed in exceptional cases.
Any voltage over the human body (bare skin to bare skin) due to the simultaneous touching
(bare hand to hand or hand to feet contact) of two conductive parts shall be lower than or equal
to the values of the curve in Figure 5.

Every earth fault will be disconnected automatically or manually. Thus, touch voltages of very
long or indefinite duration do not appear as a consequence of earth faults.

5.3 Temporary Overvoltage at LV Installation During Faults in The System Exceeding 1

KV A.C And Mitigation

5.3.1 General

The rules of this clause provide requirements for the safety of low-voltage TN/TT installation
in the event of a fault between the high-voltage system and earth in the transformer substation
that supplies the low-voltage installation,

NOTES

1 See clause 4.5.2.2 of IS732 for IT systems.

2 See 10 for earthing arrangement at power stations and 11.1 for transformer substation in industrial
premises.

5.3.2 Rules for designer and installer of substations

This clause gives rules for the designer and installer of the substation. It is necessary to have
the following information concerning the high-voltage system:

a) quality of the system earthing.

b) maximum level of earth fault current.
c) resistance of the earthing arrangement.

The following symbols are used for further explanation.

IE part of the earth fault current in the high-voltage system that flows through the earthing
arrangement of the transformer substation.

RE resistance of the earthing arrangement of the transformer substation.

RA resistance of the earthing arrangement of the exposed-conductive-parts of the equipment of

the low-voltage installation.

RB is the resistance of the earthing arrangement of the low-voltage system neutral, in which the
earthing arrangements of the transformer substation and of the low-voltage system neutral are
electrically independent.

Uo in TN- and TT-systems: nominal a.c. r.m.s. line voltage to earth.

Uf power-frequency fault voltage that appears in the low-voltage system between exposed
conductive parts and earth for the duration of the fault.

U1 power-frequency stress voltage between the line conductor and the exposed conductive parts
of the low-voltage equipment of the transformer substation during the fault.
U2 power-frequency stress voltage between the line conductor and the exposed conductive parts
of the low-voltage equipment of the low-voltage installation during the fault.
NOTES

1 The power-frequency stress voltage (U1 and U2) is the voltage that appears across the insulation of low
voltage equipment and across surge protective devices connected to the low-voltage system.

2 An earthing arrangement may be considered electrically independent of another earthing arrangement if a

rise of potential with respect to earth in one earthing arrangement does not cause an unacceptable rise of
potential with respect to earth in the other earthing arrangement. See IS/IEC 61936-1.

5.3.2.1 Effect on LV installation due to fault in HV side of substation.

In case of a fault to earth on the HV-side of the substation including faults created due to failure
of HV surge arresters, the following types of overvoltage may affect the LV-installation:

a) power frequency fault-voltage (Uf);

b) power frequency stress-voltages (U1 and U2).

Table 4 explains the methods of calculation for the different types of overvoltages.

Figure 6 Representative Schematic Sketch for Possible Connections to Earth in Substation and
LV-Installation and Occurring Overvoltages in Case of Faults.

Where high and low voltage earthing systems exist in proximity to each other, two practices are
presently used:

a) interconnection of all high voltage (RE) and low voltage (RB) earthing systems.
b) separation of high voltage (RE) from low voltage (RB) earthing systems.
The general method used is interconnection. The high- and low-voltage earthing systems shall
be interconnected if the low-voltage system is totally confined within the area covered by the
high-voltage earthing system (see IS/IEC 61936-1).

Table 4 Power-Frequency Stress Voltages and Power-Frequency Fault Voltage in Low-

Voltage Tn/Tt System.

Type of
Type of earth
system U1 U2 Uf
Sl No. connections
earthing

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

RE and RB connected Uo★) (RE × IE) + 0★)

Uo
i) TT
RE and RB separate (RE × IE) + Uo★) 0★)
Uo

RE and RB connected Uo★) Uo★) RE ×

IE★★
ii) TN
RE and RB separate (RE × IE) + Uo★) 0××
Uo
★)
– NO consideration necessary.
★★ -
refer clause 5.3.2.2 second para.

NOTES

1 The requirements for U1 and U2 are derived from design criteria for insulation of low-voltage equipment
with regard to temporary power-frequency overvoltage (see also Table 5).

2 In a system whose neutral is connected to the earthing arrangement of the transformer substation, such
temporary power-frequency overvoltage is also to be expected across insulation which is not in an earthed
enclosure when the equipment is outside a building.

3 In TT- and TN-systems the statement “connected” and “separated” refers to the electrical connection
between RE and RB.

5.3.2.2 Magnitude and duration of power-frequency fault voltage

The magnitude and the duration of the fault voltage Uf (as calculated as per Table 4) which
appears in the LV installation between exposed-conductive-parts and earth, shall not exceed the
values given for Uf by the curve of Figure 5 for the duration of the fault.

Normally, the PEN conductor in a TN-C-S system is connected to earth at more than one point
at the distribution. In this case, the total resistance is reduced. For these multiple earthed PEN
conductors, Uf can be calculated as:

Uf = 0.5 RE × IE
5.3.2.3 Magnitude and duration of power-frequency stress voltages

The magnitude and the duration of the power-frequency stress voltage (U1 and U2) as calculated
as per Table 4 of the low-voltage equipment in the low-voltage installation due to an earth fault
in the high-voltage system shall not exceed the values given in Table 5.

TABLE 5 Permissible Power-Frequency Stress Voltage.

Duration of the earth fault in the HV Permissible power-frequency

Sl No. system stress voltage on equipment
t in LV installations (U1 and
U2)
U
(1) (2) (3)
i) >5s Uo + 250 V
ii) ≤5s Uo + 1200 V
iii) In systems without a neutral conductor, Uo shall be the line-to-line voltage.
NOTE — The first line of the Table relates to high-voltage systems having long disconnection times, for
example, isolated neutral and resonant earthed high-voltage systems. The second line relates to high-voltage
systems having short disconnection times, for example low-impedance earthed high-voltage systems. Both
lines together are relevant design criteria for insulation of low-voltage equipment with regard to temporary
power frequency overvoltage, see IEC 60664-1.

1. In a system whose neutral is connected to the earthing arrangement of the transformer substation, such
temporary power-frequency overvoltage is also to be expected across insulation which is not in an earthed
enclosure when the equipment is outside a building.

5.3.2.4 Limits of TOV

The permissible power-frequency stress voltage calculated based on Table 4, shall not exceed
the value given in Table 5.

The permissible power-frequency fault voltage shall not exceed the value given in Figure 5.

The requirements of 5.3.2.2 and 5.3.2.3 are to be fulfilled by the supplier for installations with
a low voltage supply from a public electricity distribution system.

For HV supply from supplier, to fulfil the above requirements, coordination between the HV
system and the LV system is necessary. Compliance with the above requirements mainly falls
into the responsibility of the substation designer/installer/owner/operator who needs also to
fulfil requirements provided by IS/IEC 61936-1.

Possible measures to fulfil the above requirements are Example:

a) separation or interconnection of earthing arrangement between HV and LV.

b) change of LV system earthing.
c) reduction of earth resistance RE.

5.4 Safety in Earthing

5.4.1 General

In principle, a protective earthing has the following two objectives:

a) to provide means to carry electric currents into the earthed point of electrical system
under normal and fault conditions without exceeding any operating and equipment
limits or adversely affecting continuity of service.
b) to reduce the risk of a person or livestock from electric shock.

5.4.2 Condition of Danger in Substations exceeding 1 kV a.c.

During an earth fault, the flow of current to earth electrodes will produce potential gradients
within and around a substation. Due consideration shall be taken in design, installation,
verification and maintenance of the system to avoid dangerous voltage between earthed
structures or equipment frames and the nearby earth (See 10 for more information).

6 SYSTEM EARTHING FOR A.C AND D.C

6.1 Factors Influencing the Choice of Earthed or Unearthed System

6.1.1 Service Continuity

A number of industrial plant systems have been operated unearthed at one or more voltage
levels. This is basically guided by the thought of gaining an additional degree of service
continuity varying in its importance depending on the type of plant. Earthed systems are in most
cases designed so that circuit protective devices will remove the faulty circuit from the system
regardless of the type of fault. However, experience has shown that in a number of systems,
greater service continuity may be obtained with earthed-neutral than with unearthed neutral
systems.

6.1.2 Multiple Faults to Earth

While an earth fault on one phase of an unearthed system generally does not cause a service
interruption, the occurrence of a second earth fault on a different phase before the first fault is
cleared, does result in an outage. The longer an earth fault is allowed to remain on an unearthed
system, greater is the likelihood of a second one occurring in another phase and repairs are
required to restore service. With an unearthed system, an organized maintenance programme is
therefore extremely important so that faults are located and removed soon after detection.

Experience has shown that multiple earth faults are rare, if ever, experienced on earthed neutral
systems.

6.1.3 Arcing Fault Burndowns

In typical cases, an arcing fault becomes established between two or more phase conductors in
an unearthed system or between phase and earth in a solidly earthed-neutral system. This would
result in severe damage or destruction to equipment. However, arcing fault current levels may
be so low that phase overcurrent protective devices do not operate to remove the fault quickly.
Such faults are characteristic of open or covered fuses, particularly in switchgear or metal-
enclosed switching and motor control equipment. It is generally recognized that protection
under such circumstances is possible by fast and sensitive detection of the arcing fault current
and interruption within 10-20 cycles. In solidly earthed-neutral systems, this is possible as an
arcing fault would produce a current in the earth path, thereby providing an easy means of
detection and tripping against phase-to- earth arcing fault breakdowns.

6.1.4 Location of Faults

On an unearthed system, an earth fault does not open the circuit. Some means of detecting the
presence of an earth fault requires to be installed. In earthed system, an accidental earth fault is
both indicated at least partially located by an automatic interruption of the accidentally earthed
circuit or piece of equipment.

6.1.5 Safety

Whether or not a system is earthed, protection of personnel and property from hazards require
thorough earthing of equipment and structures. Proper earthing results in less likelihood of
accidents to personnel. Other hazards of shock and fire may result from inadequate earthing of
equipment in unearthed and earthed systems. However, relatively high fault currents associated
with solidly earthed system may present a hazard to workers from exposure to hot arc products
and flying molten metal. This hazard is, however, reduced because of use of metal-enclosed
equipment.

6.1.6 Abnormal Voltage Hazards

6.1.6.1 The possible over-voltages on the unearthed system may cause more frequent failures
of equipment than the earthed system. A fault on one phase of an unearthed or impedance-
earthed system places a sustained increased voltage on the insulation of unearthed phases in a
3-phase system. This voltage is about 1.73 times the normal voltage on the insulation. This or
other sustained over-voltages on the unearthed system may not immediately cause failure of
insulation but may tend to reduce the life of the insulation. Some of the more common sources
of over-voltages on a power system are the following:

a) Lightning,
b) Switching surges,
c) Static,
d) Contact with a high voltage system,
e) Earth fault,
f) Resonant conditions, and
g) Restriking earth faults.

6.1.6.2 Surge protection devices are recommended for protection from lightning and switching
surges. System earthing is not likely to reduce the total magnitude of over-voltage produced by
lightning or switching surges. It can, however, distribute the voltage between phases and reduce
the possibility of excessive voltage stress on the phase-to-earth insulation of a particular phase.
A system earth connection even of relatively high resistance can effectively prevent static
voltage build-up. Even under conditions of an HV line breaking and falling on an LV system,
an effectively earthed LV system will hold the system neutral close to the earth potential thus
limiting the over-voltage. An unearthed system will be subjected to resonant over-voltages.
Field experience and theoretical studies have shown the world over that arcing, restriking or
vibrating earth faults on unearthed systems can, under certain conditions, produce surge
voltages as high as 6 times the normal voltage. Neutral earthing is effective in reducing transient
build up by reducing the neutral displacement from earth potential and the destructiveness of
any high frequency voltage oscillations following each arc initiation or restrike.

6.1.7 Cost

The cost differential between earthed and unearthed neutral system will vary, depending on the
method of earthing, the degree of protection desired, and whether a new or an existing system
is to be earthed.

6.2 System Earthing (Electrical System Earthing)

6.2.1 General

6.2.1.1 Earthing of electrical system is designed primarily to preserve the security of the system
by ensuring that the potential on each conductor is restricted to such a value as is consistent
with the level of insulation applied. From the point of view of safety, it is equally important that
earthing should ensure efficient and fast operation of protective gear in the case of earth faults.
Most high voltage public supply systems are earthed. Unearthed overhead line systems are also
in use, but limited to 11 kV systems derived from 33 kV mains, where the capacitive earth
current is less than 4 A and circumstances are such that the system will not be appreciably
extended.

6.2.1.2 The limitation of earthing to one point on each system is designed to prevent the passage
of current through the earth under normal conditions, and thus to avoid the risks of electrolysis
and interference with communication circuits. With a suitably designed system, properly
operated and maintained, earthing at several points may be permitted. This method of earthing
becomes economically essential in systems at 200 kV and above.

6.2.1.3 In the case of overhead-line systems protected by overcurrent protection only, there may
be difficulty in arranging that the value of the system earth fault loop impedance is such that a
conductor falling and making good contact with the earth results in operation of the protection.
A low system-earth resistance is required even in the cases where an arc-suppression coil is
installed, as its operation may be influenced by too high earth-electrode resistance.

6.2.1.4 Earthing may not give protection against faults that are not essentially earth faults. For
example, if a phase conductor on an overhead spur line breaks, and the part remote from the
supply falls to the earth, it is unlikely that any protective gear relying on earthing, other than
current balance protection at the substation, will operate since the earth-fault current circuit
includes the impedance of the load that would be high relative to the rest of the circuit.

6.2.2 Classification of Systems Based on Type of Electrical System

6.2.2.1 For the purposes of this Code of practice, it is convenient to consider a system as
comprising a source of energy, a distribution, and an installation.
Consumer / Installation /
Source Distribution
Current using equipment.
Figure 7 Principle of an Electric System
6.2.2.2 The electrical systems (system earthing) are classified as TN System, TT System and
IT System. They are:

a) TN System — has one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed, and
the exposed and extraneous conductive parts of the installation are connected by
means of protective conductors to the earthed point(s) of the source, that is, there is
a metallic path for earth fault currents to flow from the installation to the earthed
point(s) of the source. TN systems are further sub-divided into TN-C, TN-S and TN-
C-S systems.

b) TT System — has one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed and the
exposed and extraneous conductive parts of the installation are connected to a local
earth electrode or electrodes that are electrically independent of the source earth(s).

c) IT System — has the source either unearthed or earthed through a high impedance
and the exposed conductive parts of the installation are connected to electrically
independent earth electrodes.

Electrical Systems are described according to the following:

First letter – Indicates how live parts of the electric system are related to earth:

T = one live part is directly connected to earth.

I = all live parts are isolated from earth, or one live part is connected to earth through a high
impedance.

Second letter – Indicates how exposed-conductive-parts are earthed:

T = exposed-conductive-parts are connected to earth, independent of the earthing of the live

parts of the electric system.

N = exposed-conductive-parts are connected to the earthed point where the live parts are
connected to earth.

Subsequent letter(s) (if any) – Arrangement of live conductors and protective earthing
conductors:

S = live conductors and protective earthing conductors are separated from each other.

C = the function of a live conductor is combined with the function of a protective earthing
conductor to form a single PEN, PEM, or PEL conductor.

Table 6 describes the types of electric systems considered for a.c installations, and Table 7
describes the types of electric systems considered for d.c installations. Table 8 shows the
symbols used to indicate conductor functions.
 Table 6 Types of Electric Systems Considered for A.C Installations

Sl No. Electrical Live parts Arrangement of live Earthing of exposed-

System relationship to conductors and conductive-parts of
Earth. protective earthing the installation.
conductors.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) TN TN-C The neutral point or a The neutral conductor or a Exposed-conductive-
line conductor is line conductor is parts are connected to
connected to Earth. combined with the the PEN/ PEM/ PEL
protective earthing conductor that provides
conductor combined in a conductive path to the
one common PEN, PEM earthed point where the
or PEL conductor. live parts are connected
to earth.
TN-C-S The neutral conductor or a Exposed-conductive-
line conductor is parts are connected to
combined with the the PE/ PEN/ PEM/
protective earthing PEL conductor that
conductor in one common provides a conductive
PEN, PEM or PEL path to the earthed
conductor in parts of the point where the live
system but are kept parts are connected to
separate within the earth
installation.
TN-S Live conductors and Exposed-conductive-
protective earthing- parts are connected to
conductor are kept the PE conductor that
separate throughout the provides a conductive
system. path to the earthed
point where the live
parts are connected to
earth
ii) TT The neutral point or a Live conductors and Exposed-conductive-
line conductor is protective earthing parts are connected to
connected to Earth, conductors are kept earth, independent of
preferably near the separate throughout the the earthing of the live
source. system. parts of the electrical
system.
iii) IT The live conductors Live conductors and Exposed-conductive-
are isolated from protective earthing parts are connected to
earth, or one point conductors are kept earth, independent of
connected to Earth separate throughout the the earthing of the live
through a high system. parts of the electrical
impedance. system.

Table 7 Types of Electric Systems Considered for d.c. Installations

Sl No. Electrical Live parts relationship to Arrangement of live Earthing of

System Earth conductors and exposed-
protective earthing conductive-parts of
conductors the installation
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) TN TN-C The mid-point or a line The mid-point Exposed-conductive-
conductor is connected to conductor or a line parts are connected
Earth, preferably near the conductor is combined to the PEM /PEL
source. with the protective conductor that
earthing conductor provides a
combined in one conductive path to
 common PEM the earthed point
conductor or PEL where the live parts
conductor. are connected to
earth.
TN-C- The mid-point Exposed-conductive-
S conductor or a line parts are connected
conductor is combined to the PE/ PEM/ PEL
with the protective conductor that
earthing conductor in provides a
one common PEM conductive path to
conductor or PEL the earthed point
conductor in parts of where the live parts
the system but are kept are connected to
separate within the earth.
installation.
TN-S Live conductors and Exposed-conductive-
protective earthing parts are connected
conductors are kept to the PE conductor
separate throughout the that provides a
system. conductive path to
the earthed point
where the live parts
are connected to
earth.
ii) TT The mid-point or a line Midpoint conductor Exposed-conductive-
conductor is and protective earthing- parts are connected
connected to Earth, conductors are kept to earth, independent
preferably near the source. separate throughout the of the earthing of the
system. Protective live parts of the
earthing conductors are electrical system.
not connected to the
earthing point at the
source. Protective
earthing conductors are
not supplied from the
source.
iii) IT The live conductors are Live conductors and Exposed-conductive-
isolated from Earth or one protective earthing- parts are connected
point connected to Earth conductors are kept to earth, independent
through a high impedance. separate throughout the of the earthing of the
system. live parts of the
electrical system.

Table 8 Symbols Indicating the Conductor Function

Sl No. Symbols for indication of conductor in accordance with IEC 60617

(1) (2) (3)

i) Neutral conductor (N); mid-point

conductor (M)

ii) Protective conductor (PE)

iii) PEN conductor PEM conductor

 iv) System-referencing conductor (SRC)

v) PEL conductor

6.2.3 Types of electric systems for a.c.

The sources illustrated in Figure 8 to Figure 12 are examples of commonly used three-phase a.c
systems. The sources illustrated show the secondary side of a transformer.

6.2.3.1 TN-systems

6.2.3.1.1 General

One live part shall be directly connected by a system-referencing-conductor to the earthing

arrangement, preferably near the source. Where exposed-conductive-parts of the electrical
installation need to be connected to the earthing arrangement, protective earthing conductors
shall be provided to connect the exposed-conductive-parts to the earthed point of the source,
where the live parts are connected to earth.

The neutral conductors or the earthed line conductors and the protective earthing conductors
shall be arranged as follows:

a) The neutral conductors and protective earthing conductors shall be separated throughout
the system, (see Figure 8 and Figure 10 called as TN-S) or

b) The neutral conductor or the earthed line conductor shall be combined with the function
of protective earthing conductor in one single conductor in parts of the system, (see
Figure 9, called as TN-C-S) or

c) The neutral conductor or the earthed line conductor shall be combined with the function
of protective earthing conductor in one single conductor throughout the system (called
as TN-C).

Additional earthing of the protective earthing conductor may be provided.

6.2.3.1.2 System with a single source

 1

L1
L2
L3
N
5
PE

2 4 3 4

Key

1) Source
2) Earth electrode for earthing of the system at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) Additional earthing which may be provided throughout the system
5) System-referencing-conductor

Figure 8 Example of an a.c. Tn-S System with Separate Neutral Conductor and Protective
Earthing Conductor Throughout the System.

L1
L2
L3
N
5 PEN 6
PE

2 4 3 4

Key
1) Source
2) Earth electrode for earthing of the system at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) Additional earthing which may be provided throughout the system
5) system-referencing-conductor
6) separation of neutral conductor from an upstream PEN conductor

Figure 9 Example of an A.C Tn-C-S System with A Pen Conductor Separated into A Protective
Earthing Conductor and A Neutral Conductor.
 1

L1
L2
L3

5
PE

2 3 4

Key

1) Source
2) Earth electrode for earthing of the system at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) Additional earthing which may be provided throughout the system
5) System-referencing-conductor

Figure 10 Example of an a.c TN -S System with an Earthed Line Conductor and Separate Pe
Conductor.

6.2.3.1.3 System with more than one source (See IS732)

6.2.3.2 TT-systems

6.2.3.2.1 General

One live part shall be directly connected by a system-referencing-conductor to the earthing

arrangement, preferably near the source. Where exposed-conductive-parts of the electrical
installation need to be connected to an earthing arrangement, this earthing arrangement should
be electrically independent of the earthing arrangement of the source, to which the system-
referencing-conductor is connected.

The neutral conductors or the earthed line conductors and the protective earthing conductors
shall be separated throughout the installation.

Additional earthing of the protective earthing conductors may be possible, provided this
earthing is electrically independent from the earthing arrangement to which the system-
referencing conductor is connected.

6.2.3.2.2 System with single source

 1

L1
L2
L3
N
PE PE

6
3 3 3

2 5 4

Key

1) Source
2) Earth electrode for earthing of the system at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) Individual protective earthing of an exposed-conductive-part in the installation
5) Grouped protective earthing of exposed-conductive-parts in the installation
6) System-referencing-conductor

Figure 2 Example of an A.C TT System

6.2.3.2.3 System with more than one source refer IS732

6.2.3.3 IT system

6.2.3.3.1 General

All live parts shall be insulated from the earthing arrangement, or one live part shall be
connected through a high impedance to an earth electrode, preferably near the source.

Where the live parts are connected to earth by an impedance, this impedance shall be
sufficiently high as to ensure that the protective measures specified for the IT system is not
undermined by the presence of the impedance. Where protective earthing of the exposed-
conductive-parts of the electrical installation is required, an earthing arrangement shall be
provided in the installation.

NOTE — The maximum steady-state voltage to be applied is the line-to-line voltage.

 1

L1
L2
L3
PE
PE

2 2 2

6 4 3

Key
1) Source
2) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
3) Individual protective earthing of an exposed-conductive-part
4) Grouped protective earthing of exposed-conductive-parts
5) Earthing impedance at the source, if present
6) Earthing of the impedance at the source

Figure 3 Example of an a.c. It System with Exposed-Conductive-Parts Earthed Individually or in

Groups by Protective Earthing Conductors.

6.2.3.3.2 System with more than one source

In IT systems with more than one source and where high impedance earthing is used,
consideration shall be given to maintain the effectiveness of the high impedance in all
operational modes.

6.2.4 Types of Electric Systems for d.c

The sources illustrated in Figure 13 to Figure 22 are examples of commonly used d.c system
with electrical separation.

6.2.4.1 General

Where a live part in a d.c. system is to be earthed, the decision whether to earth the positive
line, the negative line or the mid-point should be based on operational conditions or other
considerations (Example: corrosion).

Where multiple sources are used, consideration should be given to minimize operating currents
in the protective earthing conductors.

This section considered a d.c. system independent or electrically separated from other system.

6.2.4.2 TN systems

One live conductor shall be directly connected by a system-referencing-conductor to the

earthing arrangement. Where exposed-conductive-parts of the electrical installation need to be
connected to the earthing arrangement, protective conductors shall be provided to connect the
exposed conductive parts to the earthed point where the live parts are connected to earth.

The mid-point conductor or the earthed line conductor and the protective conductor shall be
arranged as follows:

a) The earthed line or the mid-point conductor and the PE conductors shall be separated
throughout the system, (see Figure 13 and Figure 14) or

b) The mid-point conductor or the earthed line conductor are combined with the protective
conductor function in one single conductor throughout the system (Figure 14 and Figure
15).

c) The mid-point conductor or the earthed line conductor are combined with the protective
conductor function in one single conductor in parts of the system, (see Figure 16, Figure
17,).

A live conductor shall not be provided with more than one connection to a conductor having a
protective earthing function at any given time.

Additional earthing of the protective conductors in the installation may be provided.

1
L+
L-
4
PE

2 3

Key

1) Source
2) Earth electrode for the earthing of the System
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) System-referencing-conductor

Figure 13 Example of A d.c. TN-S System without Mid-Point

 1
L+

L-

4
PE

2
3 3

Key
1) Source
2) earth electrode for earthing of the system
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) System-referencing-conductor

Figure 14 Example of A d.c. Tn-S System with Mid-Point

1
L+

4
PEL

2
3
3

Key
1) Source
2) earth electrode for earthing of the system
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) System-referencing-conductor

Figure 15 Example of A D.C TN-C System without Mid-Point

 1
L+

L-

4
PEM

2
3 3

Key
1) Source
2) System earthing at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) System-referencing-conductor

Figure 16 Example of A d.c. TN-C System with Mid-Point

1
L+
L-

4 PEL
PE
5
L-

2
3 3

Key
1) Source
2) System earthing at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) System-referencing-conductor
5) Separation of a line conductor from a PEL conductor

FIGURE 17 EXAMPLE OF A d.c TN-C-S SYSTEM WITHOUT MID-POINT

 1
L+

PEM
PE
6
L-
4
M

3 3

Key
1) Source
2) System earthing at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) System-referencing-conductor
6) Separation of the mid-point-conductor from a PEM conductor

Figure 18 Example of A d.c. TN-C-S System with Mid-Point

6.2.4.3 TT-system

One live part shall be directly connected by a system-referencing-conductor to the earthing

arrangement, preferably near the source. Where exposed-conductive-parts of the electrical
installation need to be connected to an earthing arrangement, this earthing arrangement should
be electrically independent of the earthing arrangement to which the system-referencing-
conductor is connected.

The mid-point conductors or the earthed line conductors and the protective conductors shall be
separated throughout the installation.

Additional earthing of the PE conductor in the installation may be possible, provided this
earthing is electrically independent from the earthing arrangement to which the system-
referencing conductor is connected.
 1
L+
L-
PE
4

2 7

Key
1) Source
2) System earthing at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) System-referencing-conductor
7) Protective earthing of exposed-conductive-parts

Figure 19 Example of A d.c. TT System without Mid-Point

1
L+

L-

PE
4

2 7

3 3

Figure 20 Example of A d.c. Tt System with Mid-Point

Key
1) Source
2) System earthing at the source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
4) System-referencing-conductor
7) Protective earthing of exposed-conductive-parts

6.2.4.4 IT-system

All live parts shall be insulated from the earthing arrangement, or one live part shall be
connected through a high impedance to the earthing arrangement, preferably near the source.
Where the exposed-conductive-parts of the electrical installation need to be connected to an
earthing arrangement, this earthing arrangement shall be provided in the installation.

1
L+
L-
PE

9 7

Key
1) Source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
7) Protective earthing of exposed-conductive-parts
8) Earthing impedance at the source, if present
9) Earthing of the impedance at the source

Figure 21 Example of A d.c. It System without Mid-Point

1
L+

L-

PE
8

9 7

3 3

Figure 22 Example of A d.c. It System with Mid-Point

Key
1) Source
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part
7) Protective earthing of exposed-conductive-parts
8) Earthing impedance at the source, if present
9) Earthing of the impedance at the source
6.3 Misconcepts in Earthing and The Recommendation.

6.3.1 Mis Concepts of Earthing.

The nonstandard methods explained in 6.3.1.1 to 6.3.1.4 are misconceptions and shall not be
followed.

6.3.1.1 Independent and isolated earth electrodes for safety of a system, or functionality of
computer or electronic system, (Figure 23 to Figure 25) shall not be used. There are always
links by the soil or by parasitic elements (capacitances and mutual inductances) in the
installation. In case of lightning or power system fault, dangerous transient voltages (for
personnel safety and for EMC) can occur between this isolated earthing system and other parts
of the installation.

6.3.1.2 The misconception of "earthing" to "earth electrodes" lead to connection of multiple

points of one electrical installation to different earth electrodes, often called as dedicated earth
electrodes. This approach is a safety hazard and not suitable for EMC.

NOTE — Example of such misconceptions are two separate earth electrodes for each transformer / DG Neutral
and two separate earth electrodes for each transformer / DG body, separate earth electrodes for distribution
boards, lifts, UPS, electronics etc used widely in Residential, Industrial and Commercial premises.

Figure 23 Misconception of Separate Earth Electrodes.

6.3.1.3 In an attempt to obtain a "clean" earthing network, for example to be used as a reference
for signals, the earth electrodes have not been bonded. This approach is a safety hazard and not
suitable for EMC, hence this shall not be used.
 Figure 24 Misconception of “Dedicated”, “Independent”, or “Isolated” Earth Electrodes.

6.3.1.4 In an attempt to obtain a so-called "clean" or "instrument" earthing network, for example
to be used as a reference for signals, the earthing network is separated into a signal and a power
earthing network. When properly installed and the topology maintained, this approach may be
found satisfactory, but it is not recommended for general use. It may be suitable for safety at
power frequencies in small installations, but a safety hazard in large installations; it is generally
not suitable for high-frequency EMC concerns, hence shall not be used.

Figure 25 The Mis Concept of A Single Earth Grid

6.3.2 Recommended Method of Earthing for Safety and Functionality.

This two-dimensional conceptual representation, in Figure 25B, is actually a three-dimensional

network, as shown in Figure 70. It is the recommended approach in the general case, for safety
as well as for EMC.
 Figure 26 Recommended Configuration for The Earth Electrodes, Earthing Network and an
Electrically Insulated LPS.

Figure 27 Recommended Configuration for The Earth Electrodes, Earthing Network and
Attached LPS

7 EARTHING AT LOW VOLTAGE CONSUMER PREMISE

7.1 Equipment Earthing

7.1.1 Equipment Using Current

7.1.1.1 Classification of equipment w.r.t fault protection is provided in Table 9 and w.r.t
condition of connection of the equipment to the installation is provided in Table 10. (see IS732
Table 7 condition BC: contact of person with earth potential)

NOTES
1 Equipment and appliances are different in their definition. Appliances are for domestic or similar use. They
are classified into class 0, class 0I, class II, class III. Use of class 0 and class 0I appliances are not allowed
in India.

2 IS732 permits the use of class 0 equipment in BC 1 and BC 2 locations (earth free environment). However,
in general the use of class 0 equipment is discouraged.

Table 9 Classification of Equipment

Sl Class 0 Class 01 Class I Class II Class III

No.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

No means Protective Protective Additional Designed

i) Principal of earthing earthing insulation for supply
characteris protective means means and no at safety
tics of earthing provided, provided means for extra low
equipment but not as as a part protective voltage
a part of of cable earthing
cable
Connection
ii) Precaution Earth free
Connection to the None to safety
s for environme
protective earthing necessary extra low
safety nt
voltage

Table 10 Condition of Connection of The Equipment or Appliance to The Installation

Sl. No. Type of Equipment marking or Symbol Equipment marking

Appliance / instructions or instructions
equipment
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Class 0 Only Basic Protection Class 0 appliances are
NO Fault protection not allowed in India
ii) Class 01 Appliance having at least Class 01 construction
basic insulation is not allowed in India
throughout and for appliances used in
incorporating an residential or similar
earthing terminal but use.
having a supply cord
without earthing
conductor and a plug
without earthing contact.
iii) Class I Marking of the protective Connect this terminal
bonding terminal with to the protective
graphical symbol 5019 equipotential bonding
(IEC 60417), or letters system of the
PE, or colour combination installation
green-yellow.
iv) Class II Marking with the No reliance on
graphical symbol 5172 installation protective
(IEC 60417) (double measures
square)
 v) Class III Marking with the Connect only to
graphical symbol SELV or PELV
5180 (IEC 60417) (roman systems
numeral
III in a diamond)

NOTE — For more information on application of class 0 and class 01 equipment, See IS732:2019, Table 7,
code BC.

7.1.1.2 Accessible metal parts of Class I appliances/equipment that may become live in the
event of an insulation fault shall be permanently and reliably connected to an earthing terminal
within the appliance or to the earthing contact of the appliance inlet. Earthing terminal and
earthing contact shall not be connected to the neutral terminal. The continuity resistance
between the earth terminal and accessible metal parts of such equipment shall meet the
requirements of product standard. (Example: IS/IEC 61439-1: Low voltage switchgear and
controlgear assemblies part 1, General rules, need 0.1 Ω for this application).

7.1.1.3 Class II equipment, in which double insulation (insulation comprising both basic and
supplementary insulation) or reinforced insulation are provided, may not have provision for
connection of exposed metal work of the equipment to a protective conductor and no reliance
upon precautions to be taken in the fixed location of installation.

7.1.2 Examples of Provisions for Protective Earthing in Class I Electrical Equipment.

7.1.2.1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies

All Switchgear and controlgear assemblies shall satisfy these requirements (See IS/IEC 61439-
1).

When a TT earthing system is being used in the electrical network, one of the following
protective measures shall be applied in the assembly:

a) double or reinforced insulation of all conductors (incoming cables, extension terminals,

etc.) up to the supply side of the first RCD(s) in the system (this is not a requirement
when a Class II assembly is used); or
b) residual current device (RCD) protecting the incoming circuit.

NOTE — In case of fault protection by RCD, the fault loop impedance and the residual current of the
protective device shall be selected based on Table 21.

In all cases, effective earth continuity between the exposed-conductive-parts of the class I
assembly and the protective equipotential bonding of the installation shall be ensured. It shall
be verified that the different exposed-conductive-parts of the assembly are effectively
connected to the terminal for the incoming external protective conductor.

a) To ensure protection against the consequences of earth faults within the class I assembly,
all exposed-conductive-parts of the assembly shall be interconnected together to a
protective earthing terminal / busbar, which is connected to the incoming external
protective conductor of the supply to the earthing arrangement. The resistance between
protective earthing terminal to exposed conductive parts shall not exceed 0.1 Ω.

b) To ensure protection against the consequences of earth faults in external circuits

supplied through the class I and class II assembly, the protective conductor ensuring
 continuity shall be designed so that it can withstand the highest thermal and dynamic
stresses arising from earth fault currents in external circuits supplied through the
assembly in its installed location In the case of a class II assembly, the protective
conductor may or may not be incorporated within the assembly: it is permissible for it
to pass the assembly externally.

c) Continuity resistance and measurement: Every switchgear and control gear assemblies
shall be verified for the effectiveness of protective bonding by measuring the resistance
between the exposed-conductive-parts of the assembly to the protective earth terminal
or busbar of the assembly using a resistance-measuring instrument that is capable of
driving a current of at least 10 A (a.c. or d.c.). The current is passed between each
exposed conductive-part and the protective earthing terminal of the assembly. The
resistance shall not exceed 0.1 Ω. It is recommended to limit the duration of the test
where low-current equipment is used to avoid adverse effect of the test.

7.1.2.2 Uninterrupted power supplies

Figure 26 shows examples of UPS assembly and its associated protective equipotential bonding.

NOTE — for more information refer IS 16242 (all parts)

Key:

1. Protective equipotential bonding of subsystem

2. Protective Bonding conductor
3. PE conductor from MET.
4. MET (Protective Earthing Terminal or Earth Bar).
5. Hinge
6. PE conductor to load
 EE: Other electrical equipment (bonded as relevant for that equipment)

Figure 28 Example of UPS Assembly and its Associated Protective Equipotential Bonding.

7.1.2.3 Earthing of machinery

Effectiveness of fault protection in machineries shall be ensured by verifying the conditions for
protection by automatic disconnection of supply. Verification of the continuity of the protective
bonding circuit and efficiency of automatic disconnection are necessary in all cases. (See IS
16504: Part 1).

SI No. Protective bonding circuit:

(1) (2)
i) Interconnection of protective conductor(s) and the PE terminal
ii) Connection of exposed conductive parts
iii) Protective conductor connected to an electrical equipment mounting plate used as a
protective conductor
iv) Connection of conductive structural parts of the electrical equipment
v) Conductive structural parts of the machine
Parts connected to the protective bonding circuit which are not to bs used as protective conductor:
i) Metal ducts of flexible or rigid construction
ii) Metallic cable sheaths or armouring
iii) Metallic pipes containing flammable materials
iv) Extraneous-conductive-parts, if earthed independently from the power supply of the
machine and liable to introduce a potential generally the earth potential, (see 17.2 d)
Example: metallic pipes,
fences,
ladders,
handrails,
v) Flexible or pliable metal conduits
vi) Protective bonding of support wires, cables tray and cable ladders
Connections to the protective bonding circuit for functional reasons:
i) Functional bonding
Legend to references designations:
ii) Auxiliary transformer
iii) Mounting Plate of electrical equipment

Figure 29 Example of Equipotential Bonding for Electrical Equipment of a Machines

7.1.2.4 Earthing of lifts

Protective Earthing of Lift shall be achieved by connecting the protective earth terminal of lift
panel to the MET of the location as shown in Figure 30 satisfying the requirements of system
earthing (see 6.2 and 7.4.2 and 7.4.3). Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of Protective Earthing
conductor shall satisfy 7.3.2. The local equipotential bonding at the lift room reduces touch
voltages.

Fault protection shall be achieved either by OCPD or by RCD (see 7.5.3 and 7.5.4).

Uunwanted tripping of RCD’s due to higher leakage current shall be avoided by achieving fault
protection by OCPD and by reinforced protective conductor.

NOTES

1 IS17900-1, Clause 5.10.9 needs protective earthing of lift as per clauses 4.2.11, 3.1.1 of IS732.

2 IS17900-1, Clause 6.3.2 d) needs verification of the effectiveness of the measures for fault protection by
automatic disconnection of supply according to 6.2.3.6 and 6.2.3.7 of IS732.

3 IS17900-1 need protection by a 30 mA RCD in clause 5.10.1.2.3 as an additional protection against electric
shock.
4 Where the PE conductor current exceeds 10 mA under normal operating conditions, a reinforced protective
conductor shall be used (see 5.4.3.7 of IS732).
1. Incoming supply (preferably 5 core cable. (R,Y,B,N and PE))
2. MET of Lift room (can be called as Protective Earth Terminal or PE terminal)
3. Connection to extraneous conductive parts in lift room.
4. Live parts (R, Y, B, N)
5. OCPD or RCD for fault protection a).
6. Single phase supply (L+N+PE, 3 wire) to car light and shaft light.
7. OCPD for single phase supply (lift car and lift shaft).
8. 30 mA RCCB/RCBO for single phase supply as additional protection against shock for safety
of passengers c). This is mandatory and be a part of lift panel. TYPE A RCCB is
recommended for LED lights.
9. PE terminal in lift panel for protective equipotential bonding c).
10. Additional PE terminal for reinforced protection b) c).
11. PE conductor to other parts of Lift c).
12. Bonding conductor to elevator guide rails. (separate connection preferred for each rail).
a) OCPD such as MCB or MCCB’s can be provided for protection against overcurrent and earth
fault, provided the fault loop impedance is low enough to enable automatic disconnection
during an earth fault. In case of higher fault loop impedance, an RCCB shall be installed for
fault protection. IΔn of RCCB can be selected based on the available fault loop impedance
and expected protective conductor current of VFD’s used in Lift. Type B RCCB shall be
used if the lift contains 3 phase VFD.
b) Required in case of PE conductor current higher than 10 mA. The manufacturer shall decide
the method of reinforced protective measure for this terminal, which is not a part of this
picture.
c) Part of Lift.
 Figure 30 Example of Protective Earthing, Fault Protection and Additional Protection of Lift

7.1.2.5 Earthing and safety in electric vehicle charging stations

Each socket-outlet for electric vehicle shall have an earthing contact connected to the protective
conductor (PE) of the installation. RCDs protecting each connecting point shall comply at least
with the requirements of an RCD type A and shall have a rated residual operating current not
exceeding 30 mA.

Where the EV charging station is equipped with a socket-outlet or vehicle connector complying
with IS 17017/IEC 62196 (all parts), protective measures against d.c. fault current shall be
taken, except where provided by the EV charging station. The appropriate measures, for each
connection point, shall be as follows:

a) the use of an RCD type B;

b) the use of an RCD type A in conjunction with a residual direct current detecting device
(RDC-DD) complying with IEC 62955; or

c) the use of an RCD type F in conjunction with a residual direct current detecting device
(RDC-DD) complying with IEC 62955.

RCDs shall comply with one of the following standards: IS 12640 (Part 1), IS 12640
(Part 2), IS/IEC 609472 or IEC 62423.

NOTES

1 For charging stations in residential premises, where protection against d.c. fault may not be available, type
B is required.

2 RCD is not applicable in case the connecting point is protected by other protective measures against electric
shock such as SELV or electric separation.

7.2 Earthing Arrangement

7.2.1 General

7.2.1.1 Earthing arrangement: Earthing arrangement in a consumer premise consists of

protective earthing, main and supplementary protective equipotential bonding, functional
earthing, functional bonding etc as shown in Figure 31, depending upon the availability of
exposed, extraneous conductive parts, functional requirement of electronics and system
earthing.

7.2.1.2 The earthing arrangements may be used jointly or separately for protective and
functional purposes according to the requirements of the electrical installation. The
requirements for protective purposes shall always take precedence.

7.2.1.3 Where provided, earth electrodes within an installation shall be connected to the main
earthing terminal using an earthing conductor.
Key
M – Exposed Conductive Part.
MET - Main Earthing Terminal.
MFET – Main Functional Earth Terminal (Also called as Telecommunication bonding
bar (TBB)).
C – Extraneous Conductive Part (structural steel, metallic pipes, down conductor of LPS
etc).
TN - earthing in a TN system Example: connection to earthed point of the source
(Example: Transformer / DG).
EE - earth electrode in a TT or IT system.

1 – Protective Earthing Conductor (PE conductor).

2 - Main protective bonding conductor.
3 - Earthing conductor (Conductor connecting buried metal parts to MET are also
considered as earthing conductor).
4 - Supplementary protective bonding conductors (if required).
5 – Telecommunication Bonding Conductor (TBC).

Figure 31 - Illustration Earthing Arrangement Consisting of Protective Equipotential

Bonding, Protective and Functional Conductors.
Key Symbol Name Remark
C Extraneous conductive part
C1 Water pipe, metal from outside
C2 Waste water pipe, metal from outside
C3 Gas pipe with insulating insert, metal from outside
C4 Air-conditioning
C5 Heating system
C6 Water pipe, metal example: in a bathroom
C7 Waste water pipe, metal example: in a bathroom
D Insulating insert
MDB Main distribution board
DB Distribution board supplied from the main distribution board
 MET Main earthing terminal
SEBT Supplementary equipotential bonding terminal
T1 Concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode or soil-embedded foundation earth electrode
T2 Earth electrode for LPS (if necessary)
LPS Lightning protection system (if any)
PE PE terminal(s) in the distribution board
PE/PEN PE/PEN terminal(s) in the main distribution board
M Exposed conductive part
1 Protective earthing conductor (PE)
1a Protective conductor, or PEN conductor, if any, from public distribution
2 Main bonding conductor (connection to the MET)
3 Supplementary bonding conductor
4 Down conductor of a lightning protection system (LPS) if any (separation distance shall be considered)
5 Earthing conductor
6 Bonding of MET to down conductor through a link (if necessary). (See IS/IEC 62305-3, clause 6)

Figure 32 Example of Earthing Arrangement, Foundation Earth Electrode, Protective Earthing

Conductors and Protective Bonding Conductors in A Residential Building.

7.2.1.4 When an installation supplies number of buildings, main equipotential bonding is

essential in each building, so that each has a reference point as an MET to which the conductor
parts referred in 7.2.1.1 are connected.

7.2.1.5 Protective and functional bonding conductors shall be connected individually (see Fig
33A) to the MET in such a way that if one conductor becomes disconnected the connections of
all the other conductors remain secured.

7.2.1.6 For larger buildings, it is recommended to repeat the equipotential bonding as per clause
4.5.7.

7.2.1.7 Simultaneously accessible exposed conductive parts shall be connected to the same
earthing system individually (see Figure 33B), in groups (see Figure 33C) or collectively.

7.2.1.8 If part of a protective bonding is temporarily removed, (example: for the purpose of
addition or maintenance) the bonding for the remaining part of the electrical installation shall
not be disconnected.
 Figure 33A Figure 33B Figure 33C

Figure 33 (A, B and C) Example of Connecting Protective Conductors Individually to MET,

Earthing Individually and Earthing in Group.
NOTE — Individual earthing is also called as dedicated earthing.

7.2.2 Description of Conductors Used in an Earthing Arrangement

7.2.2.1 Main Earthing Terminal (MET) or Main Earthing Busbar: Terminal or busbar of an
installation, enabling the electric connection to a number of conductors used for earthing or
bonding purposes.

7.2.2.2 Protective Earthing Conductors: Conductors to connect exposed conductive parts to

MET in an installation and MET to the means of earthing in a TN system. They are also called
as PE conductor. The PE conductor in final circuits is also called as circuit protective conductors
(CPC).

7.2.2.3 Protective Bonding Conductor: Conductors used to connect extraneous conductive parts
to MET. They are used in main equipotential bonding and supplementary equipotential bonding.

7.2.2.4 Earthing conductor: Conductors used to connect MET to earth electrodes and to other
buried metal parts. Earthing conductors may be used in air and in soil.

7.2.3 Marking of Earthing/Protective Conductor

7.2.3.1 The earthing and protective conductor shall be marked as given in Table 11
(see IS 11353).
Table 11 Marking of Conductors

SI No. Designation of Identification by Colour

conductors Alphanumeric Graphical
notation symbol
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Earthing
E No colour
Conductor
 ii) Protective bonding Green and
conductor yellow
iii) Protective earthing Green and
PE
conductor yellow
iv) Functional earthing Cream (NEC
2023).
FE Note:
Internationally
purple is used.

7.2.3.2 Use of Bi-Colour Combination - Green and Yellow

The bi-colour combination, green and yellow (green/yellow), shall be used for identifying the
protective bonding/protective earthing conductor and for no other purpose. This is the only
colour code recognized for identifying these protective conductors.

Bare conductors or bus bars, used as protective conductors, shall be coloured by equally broad
green and yellow stripes, each 15 mm up to 100 mm wide, close together, either throughout the
length of each conductor or in each compartment or unit or at each accessible position. If
adhesive tape is used, only bi-coloured tape shall be applied.

For insulated conductors, the combination of the colours, green and yellow, shall be such that,
on any 15 mm length of insulated conductor, one of these colours covers at least 30 percent and
not more than 70 percent of the surface of the conductor, the other colour covering the remainder
of that surface.

NOTE — Where the protective conductor can be easily identified from its shape, construction or position, for
example, a concentric conductor, then colour coding throughout its length is not necessary but the ends or
accessible positions should be clearly identified by a symbol or the bi-colour combination, green and yellow.

7.2.3.3 The materials used for making connections have to be compatible so that galvanic
corrosion is minimized (see Table 27). In all cases, the connections have to be mechanically
strong.

7.2.3.4 The incorporation of the protective conductor in the same wiring system as the live
conductors or in their immediate proximity is strongly recommended (see 4.5.5).

7.3 Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of Conductors and Their Usage.

7.3.1 General

7.3.1.1 The cross-sectional area of every protective conductor shall satisfy the conditions for
automatic disconnection of supply and be capable of withstanding mechanical and thermal
stresses caused by the prospective fault current during the disconnection time of the protective
device.

7.3.1.2 The cross-sectional area of a protective conductor shall either be calculated in

accordance with 7.3.2.1 or selected in accordance with Table 12. In either case, the requirements
of 7.3.2.3 shall be taken into account.
7.3.1.3 Terminals / busbars for bonding protective conductors shall be suitable for the
dimensions of conductors.

7.3.1.4 In TT systems, where the earth electrodes of the supply system and of the exposed
conductive parts are electrically independent, the cross-sectional area of protective conductors
need not exceed 25 mm2 copper (or 35 mm2 aluminium or equivalent steel).

7.3.2 Minimum Cross-Sectional Area: Protective Earthing conductor

7.3.2.1 The cross-sectional areas of protective earthing conductors shall be not less than the
value determined by the following formula applicable only for disconnection times not
exceeding 5 s:

√𝐼 2 𝑡
𝑠=
𝑘
where
s is the cross-sectional area in mm2;
I is the r.m.s value expressed in amperes of prospective fault current, for a fault of
negligible impedance, which can flow through the protective device
t is the operating time in seconds of the protective device for automatic disconnection;
k is the factor dependent on the material of the protective conductor, the insulation and
other parts and the initial and final temperatures (for calculation of k, see 7.3.2.7).

7.3.2.2 Where the application of the formula produces a non-standard size, a conductor having
at least the nearest larger standard cross-sectional area shall be used.

NOTES

1 Account should be taken of the current-limiting effect of the circuit impedances and the limitation of I2t of
the protective device.
2 For limitations of temperatures for installations in potentially explosive atmospheres, see IEC 60079-0.
 Table 12 Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of Protective Conductors
(where not calculated in accordance with 7.3.2.1)

Cross- Minimum Cross-sectional Area of the Corresponding

sectional Area Protective Conductor (mm2 Cu)
Sl
of Line If the protective conductor If the protective conductor is
No.
Conductor, S is of the same material as not of the same material as the
(mm2 Cu) the line conductor line conductor

(1) (2) (3) (4)

𝑘1
i) S ≤16 S ×𝑆
𝑘2

𝑘1
ii) 16 < S ≤35 16 × 16
𝑘2

𝑆 𝑘1 𝑆
iii) S >35 ×
2 𝑘2 2

where
k1 is the value of k for the line conductor derived from the formula in 7.3.2.7 or
selected from Table 14, according to the materials of the conductor and insulation;
k2 is the value of k for the protective conductor, selected from Table 15 to Table 19 as
applicable.

7.3.2.3 The cross-sectional area of every protective conductor which does not form part of a
cable or which is not in a common enclosure with the line conductor shall be not less than 2.5
mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al if protection against mechanical damage is provided, or 4 mm2 Cu or 16
mm2 Al if protection against mechanical damage is not provided.

7.3.2.4 A protective conductor not forming part of a cable is considered to be mechanically

protected if it is installed in a conduit, trunking or protected in a similar way.

7.3.2.5 The use of steel for a protective conductor is also allowed based on the selection as per
Table 15 to Table 19.

7.3.2.6 Where a protective conductor is common to two or more circuits, its cross-sectional area
shall be:

a) calculated in accordance with 7.3.2.1 for the most onerous prospective fault current and
operating time encountered in these circuits; or

b) selected in accordance with Table 12 so as to correspond to the cross-sectional area of

the largest line conductor of the circuits.

7.3.2.7 Method for deriving the factor k

(see IEC 60724 and IEC 60949)

The factor k is determined from the following formula:

𝑄𝑐 (𝛽 + 20) 𝛽 + 𝜃𝑓
𝑘=√ 𝑙𝑛 ( )
𝜌20 𝛽 + 𝜃𝑖

where
Qc is the volumetric heat capacity of conductor material (J/K mm3) at 20 °C;
β is the reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity at 0 °C for the
conductor (°C);
ρ20 is the electrical resistivity of conductor material at 20 °C (Ωmm);
θi initial temperature of conductor (°C);
θf final temperature of conductor (°C).

Table 13 Value of Parameters for Different Materials

𝑄𝑐(𝛽 + 20)
Sl No. βa Qca ρ20a √
𝜌20
Material °C J/°Cmm3 Ωmm 𝐴 √𝑆⁄𝑚 𝑚2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Copper 234.5 3.45 × 10–3 17.241 × 10–6 226
ii) Aluminium 228 2.5 × 10–3 28.264 × 10–6 148
iii) Steel 202 3.8 × 10–3 138 × 10–6 78
a Values taken from IEC 60949.
 Table 14 Value of K For Conductors

Type of Conductor Insulation

EPR Rubber Mineral
SI Property/ PVC
PVC XLPE 60 °C PVC Bare
No. Condition Thermoplastic
Thermoplastic Thermosett Thermosetti sheathe unsheathe
90°C
ing ng d d
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Conductor cross-
sectional ≤300 > 300 ≤ 300 > 300
area mm2
ii) Initial
70 90 90 60 70 105
temperature °C
iii) Final temperature
160 140 160 140 250 200 160 250
°C
iv) Conductor
material:
v) Copper 115 103 100 86 143 141 115 135-115(1)
vi) Aluminium 76 68 66 57 94 93 - -
vii) Tin-soldered
joints in copper 115 - - - - - - - - -
conductors
(1)
This value shall be used for bare cables exposed to touch
NOTES
1 Other values of k are under consideration for:
i) small conductors (particularly for cross-sectional areas less than 10 mm²);
ii) other types of joints in conductors;
iii) bare conductors.
2 The nominal current of the short-circuit protective device may be greater than the current-carrying
capacity of the cable.
3 The above factors are based on IEC 60724.

Table 15 Values of K for Insulated Protective Conductors Not Incorporated in Cables and Not
Bunched with Other Cables

Temperature Material of conductor

Conductor
SI No. °C b Copper Aluminium Steel
insulation
Initial Final Values for k c
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1)
i) 70 °C
thermoplastic 30 160/140 a 143/133 a 95/88 a 52/49 a
(PVC)
ii) 90 °C
thermoplastic 30 160/140a 143/133 a 95/88 a 52/49 a
(PVC)
iii) 90 °C
thermosetting
30 250 176 116 64
(Example: XLPE
and EPR)
iv) 60 °C
thermosetting 30 200 159 105 58
(EPR rubber)
 v) 85 °C
thermosetting 30 220 166 110 60
(EPR rubber)
vi) 185 °C
thermosetting 30 350 201 133 73
(silicone rubber)
a. The lower value applies to thermoplastic (Example: PVC) insulated conductors of
cross-sectional area greater than 300 mm2.
b. Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.
c. For the method of calculating k, see 7.3.2.7.

Table 16 Values of K For Bare Protective Conductors in Contact with Cable Covering But Not
Bunched With Other Cables

Temperature Material of conductor

SI No. Cable covering °C a Copper Aluminium Steel
Initial Final Values for k b
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) Thermoplastic 30 200 159 105 58
ii)(PVC)
30 150 138 91 50
polyethylene
iii) CSP c 30 220 166 110 60
a. Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.
b. For the method of calculating k, see 7.3.2.7.
c. CSP = Chloro-Sulphonated Polyethylene

Table 17 Values of K For Protective Conductors as a Core Incorporated in a Cable or Bunched

with Other Cables or Insulated Conductors

Temperature Material of conductor

Conductor
SI N0. °C b Copper Aluminium Steel
insulation c
Initial Final Values for k
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) 70 °C thermoplastic
70 160/140 a 115/103 a 76/68 a 42/37 a
(PVC)
ii) 90 °C thermoplastic
90 160/140 a 100/86 a 66/57 a 36/31 a
(PVC)
iii) 90 °C thermosetting
(Example: XLPE and 90 250 143 94 52
EPR)
iv) 60 °C thermosetting
60 200 141 93 51
(rubber)
v) 85 °C thermosetting
85 220 134 89 48
(rubber)
vi) 185 °C thermosetting
180 350 132 87 47
(silicone rubber)
a. The lower value applies to thermoplastic (Example: PVC) insulated conductors of
cross-sectional area greater than 300 mm2.
b. Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.
c. For the method of calculating k, see 7.3.2.7.
 Table 18 Values of K for Protective Conductors as a Metallic Layer of A Cable, E.G. Armour,
Metallic Sheath, Concentric Conductor, Etc.

Temperature Material of conductor

SI Conductor
°C a Copper Aluminium Steel
No. insulation c
Initial Final Values for k
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) 70 °C thermoplastic
60 200 141 93 51
(PVC)
ii) 90 °C thermoplastic
80 200 128 85 46
(PVC)
iii) 90 °C thermosetting
(Example: XLPE and 80 200 128 85 46
EPR)
iv) 85 °C thermosetting
75 220 140 93 51
(rubber)
v) Mineral thermoplastic
70 200 135 – –
(PVC) covered b
a. Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.
b. This value shall also be used for bare conductors exposed to touch or in contact with
combustible material.
c. For the method of calculating k, see 7.3.2.7.

Table 19 Values of K for Bare Conductors Where There is No Risk of Damage to Any
Neighbouring Material by The Temperature Indicated

Material of conductor
Copper Aluminium Steel
Initial
SI No. Conditions tempera Maximum Maximum Maximu
ture °C final k final k m final k
temperature value temperatu value temperat value
°C re °C ure °C
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
i) Visible and in
30 500 228 300 125 500 82
restricted area
ii) Normal
30 200 159 200 105 200 58
conditions
iii) Fire risk 30 150 138 150 91 150 50

7.3.3 Minimum Cross-Sectional Area: Earthing Conductor

7.3.3.1 Earthing conductors shall comply with 7.3.1.1 to 7.3.1.4. Their cross-sectional area shall
be not less than 6 mm2 for copper or 50 mm2 for steel. Where a bare earthing conductor is buried
in the soil, its dimensions and characteristics shall also be in accordance with Table 26.

7.3.3.2 Where no noticeable fault current is expected to flow through the earth electrode the
earthing conductor may be dimensioned according to 7.3.4.1.
7.3.3.3 Where a lightning protection system is connected to the earth electrode, the cross-
sectional area of the earthing conductor should be at least 16 mm² for copper (Cu) or 50 mm²
for iron (Fe).

7.3.3.4 Aluminium shall not be used as earthing conductor.

7.3.3.5 The connection of an earthing conductor to an earth electrode shall be soundly made
and electrically satisfactory. The connection shall be by exothermic welding, pressure
connectors, clamps or other suitable mechanical connectors. Mechanical connectors shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Where a clamp is used, it shall not
damage the electrode or the earthing conductor. The connections shall be capable of
withstanding the expected fault current with a maximum temperature of 200 deg C in normal
conditions. Higher temperatures are allowed only in visible and restricted areas (see Table 19).

7.3.3.6 Connection devices or fittings that depend solely on solder shall not be used
independently, as they do not reliably provide adequate mechanical strength.

NOTE — Where vertical electrodes are installed, means may be provided to allow the inspection of the
connection and the replacement of the vertical rod.

7.3.3.7 While the connector referred to might be in a link box underground and therefore not
readily accessible, provision is made in an accessible portion for disconnecting the MET of an
installation from the means of earthing to facilitate measurement of the resistance of the earthing
arrangements.

7.3.3.8 For MV/HV/EHV applications (Example: above 1000 V a.c / 1500 V d.c.) due to
mechanical strength and stability against corrosion minimum cross-sections are:

a) copper: 16 mm2
b) aluminium: 35 mm2
c) steel: 50 mm2

7.3.4 Minimum Cross-Sectional Area: Protective Bonding Conductors

7.3.4.1 Protective bonding conductors for connection to the MET

a) Protective bonding conductors for connection to the MET shall have a cross-sectional
area not less than half the cross-sectional area of the largest protective earthing
conductor within the installation and not less than:
1) 6 mm2 copper; or
2) 16 mm2 aluminium; or
3) 50 mm2 steel.

b) The cross-sectional area of protective bonding conductors for connection to the MET
need not exceed 25 mm2 Copper or an equivalent cross-sectional area for other
materials.

7.3.4.2 Protective bonding conductors for supplementary bonding

a) A protective bonding conductor connecting two exposed-conductive-parts shall have a
conductance not less than that of the smaller protective conductor connected to the exposed
conductive-parts.

b) A protective bonding conductor connecting exposed-conductive-parts to extraneous

conductive-parts shall have a conductance not less than half that of the cross-sectional area of
the corresponding protective conductor.
c) The minimum cross-sectional area of protective bonding conductors for supplementary
bonding, and of bonding conductors between two extraneous-conductive parts, which does not
form part of a cable or which is not in a common enclosure with the line conductor shall be not
less than 2.5 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al if protection against mechanical damage is provided, or 4
mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al if protection against mechanical damage is not provided.

7.3.4.3 For MV/HV/EHV applications (example: above 1000 V a.c. / 1500 V d.c.) Protective
bonding conductors shall satisfy 7.3.3.8.

7.3.5 Main Earthing Terminals or Main Earth Bus Bar (MET)

7.3.5.1 A consumer’s electrical installation below 1000 V a.c. shall have a main earthing
terminal (MET). In TN system, the MET is connected to the earthed point of the source. In the
case of TT and IT system, the MET shall be earthed to an independent earth electrode.
Functional earthing conductors should be connected to MET (see IS732)

7.3.5.2 The function of MET is to provide a reference and equipotential point for the installation,
it consists of a terminal or bar provided for the connection of protective conductors and
conductors for functional earthing.

7.3.5.3 Although the MET is connected to Earth, it is seldom at zero potential because of the
potential difference caused by leakage and other current flowing to earth.

7.3.5.4 An independent earth electrode should also be connected to the MET if the main supply
has a combined neutral and protective conductor.

7.3.5.5 Each conductor connected to the MET shall be able to be disconnected individually (see
Figure 33A). This connection shall be reliable and such that it can only be disconnected by
means of a tool.

7.3.5.6 MET shall have a conductance not less than the conductance of Protective Earthing
Conductor (see 7.3.2).
NOTE — In case of confusion in double earthing, two nos of MET may be used, both interconnected at every
5 meters.

7.3.6 Types of Protective Earthing Conductors

7.3.6.1 Protective earthing conductors may comprise:

a) Conductors in multicore cables.

b) Insulated or bare conductors in a common enclosure with live conductors.
c) Fixed conductor, bare or insulated.
 d) Metallic cable sheath, cable screen, cable armour, wire braid, concentric conductor,
metallic conduit, subject to the conditions stated in 7.3.6.2 a) and b).

7.3.6.2 Where the installation contains equipment having metal enclosures such as low voltage
switchgear and controlgear assemblies (see IS/IEC 61439-1 and IS/IEC 61439-2) or busbar
trunking systems (see IS/IEC 61439-6), their metal enclosures or frames may be used as
protective conductors if they simultaneously satisfy the following three requirements:

a) their electrical continuity shall be assured by construction or by suitable connection so

as to ensure protection against mechanical, chemical or electrochemical deterioration,
b) they comply with the requirements of minimum cross-sectional area of protective
earthing conductor as per 7.3.2,
c) they shall permit the connection of other protective conductors at every predetermined
tap-off point.

7.3.6.3 When the metallic sheath of a cable is used as a Protective Earthing conductor, every
joint in that sheath should be made that its current-carrying capacity is not less than that of the
sheath and where non-metallic joint boxes are used, means such as metal strip having the same
effective current-carrying capacity as the largest cable entering the box should be provided to
maintain continuity. However, this is not permitted in cables ≤ 16 mm2. For cables up to 16
mm2, protective earthing conductor as a core in multicore cables should be used (Example: 3
core cable for 1 Line + N application and 5 core cable for 3 Line + N application)

NOTE — For industrial application using protective conductor as a part of cable suitably sized according
to clause 7.3.2 or table 12 read with table 17 is recommended.

7.3.6.4 When using the metal sheath or armour, attention should also be paid to the ability of
the cable glands and connections and the armouring to withstand the fault current without
damaging the cable. Special precautions may be considered necessary with the metal parts of
the assembly, particularly gland plates where abrasion resistant function for example, powder
coating, are used.

7.3.6.5 Metallic enclosures for cable, such as conduit, ducting and trunking, may be used as
Protective Earthing conductors but where flexible conduit is used, separate protective earthing
conductors should be included inside the conduit to maintain the integrity of the earth path.
Where conduit and trunking are used a high standard of workmanship in installation is essential.
Joints should be so made such that their current-carrying capacity is not less than that of the
conduit itself. Joints should also have the same properties, as regards insulation, mechanical
strength, as those of the wiring system or conduit of which they are part. Slackness in joints can
result in deterioration and even complete loss of continuity; plain slip or pin-grip sockets should
not be used. In case of unscrewed conduit, the use of lug-grip fitting is recommended, but for
outdoor installation where the conduits are subjected to corrosion, screwed type conduits shall
always be used. Painting is to be done on all conduit systems after the assembly. The complete
construction shall withstand fault current without damaging the cable and surrounding.

7.3.6.6 Electrolytic corrosion is liable to occur under damp condition at contacts between
dissimilar metals. Copper and its alloys having high copper content are particularly liable to
cause corrosion under these conditions when in contact with aluminium alloys. Bi-metallic
strips/contacts shall be used when dissimilar metal form part of an electrical circuit, the joints
should be clean and assembled free of moisture, and then immediately treated with suitable
coating or cover to protect from moisture.
7.3.6.7 Extraneous conductive parts may be used as a protective conductor if they satisfy the
following four requirements, provided the leakage current in the installation are within the limits

a) their electrical continuity shall be assured either by construction or by suitable

connections in such a way as to be protective against mechanical, chemical or
electrochemical deterioration.
b) their conductance shall be at least equal to that of minimum cross-sectional area of
protective earthing conductor as per 7.3.2.
c) unless compensatory measures are provided precautions shall be taken against their
removal. and
d) they have been considered for such a use and, if necessary, suitably adapted.

The use of metallic water pipes is permitted, as a protective conductor provided the
consent of a person or body responsible for the water system is obtained. Gas pipes shall
not be used as protective conductors. However equipotential bonding of these pipes are
mandatory unless they are sufficiently insulated

7.3.6.8 Extraneous conductive parts shall not be used as PEN, PEL or PEM conductors.

7.3.7 Electrical continuity of protective conductors

7.3.7.1 Protective conductors shall be suitably protected against mechanical damage, chemical
or electrochemical deterioration, electrodynamic forces and thermodynamic forces.

7.3.7.2 Every connection (Example: screwed connections, clamp connectors) between

protective conductors or between a protective conductor and other equipment shall provide
durable electrical continuity and adequate mechanical strength and protection. Screws for
connecting protective conductors shall not serve any other purpose.

7.3.7.3 Joints shall not be made by soldering.

NOTE — All electrical connections should have satisfactory thermal capacity and mechanical strength to
withstand any combination of current/time which may occur in the conductor or in the cable/enclosure with
the largest cross-sectional area.

7.3.7.4 Joints in protective conductors shall be accessible except for

a) compound-filled joints,
b) connections within enclosures which can be opened only by destruction,
c) joints in metal conduits, ducting and busbar trunking systems,
d) joints forming part of equipment, complying with the relevant standards, for example
low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies according to 7.3.6.2,
e) joints made by welding or brazing,
f) joints made by compression tool.

7.3.7.5 No switching device shall be inserted in the protective conductor, but joints which can
be disconnected for test purposes by use of a tool may be provided.

7.3.7.6 Where electrical monitoring of earthing is used, dedicated devices (example: operating
sensors, coils, current transformers) shall not be connected in series in protective conductors.
7.3.7.7 Exposed-conductive-parts of electrical equipment shall not be used to form part of the
protective conductor for other equipment except as allowed by 7.3.6.2.

7.3.7.8 Periodical tests to verify the electrical continuity should be undertaken. (See NEC 2023
Part 1, section 17 and Annex E)

7.4 Earth Fault Protection in Installations

7.4.1 Basic Philosophy of Earth Fault Protection

7.4.1.1 The rules given in this clause are applicable to installation below 1000 V a.c. and 1500
V d.c.

7.4.1.2 Fault protection (protection against shock in case of a fault / indirect contact) is provided
by protective equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply. This protective
measure necessitates coordination of the types of electrical system earthing and the
characteristics of the protective devices. Clause 7.4 discusses the basic criteria for achieving
this protection.

7.4.1.3 Protection against electric shock both in normal service (Basic protection, also called as
protection against direct contact) and in case of fault (fault protection also called as protection
against indirect contact) can be achieved by several measures. Details of achieving protection
through the choice of an appropriate protective measure is the subject of IS 732. One of such
measures is protection by automatic disconnection of supply (see 7.5.1).

7.4.1.4 Automatic disconnection is intended to prevent a touch voltage persisting for such time
that a danger could arise. This method necessitates co-ordination of (a) the type of system
earthing, and (b) characteristics of protective devices.

7.4.1.5 Protective measure by automatic disconnection of supply relies on the association of

two conditions given below:

a) The existence of a conducting path (fault loop) to provide for circulation of fault current;
and
b) The disconnection of this current by an appropriate device in a given time.

The determination of this time depends on various parameters, such as probability of fault,
probability of a person touching the equipment during the fault and the touch voltage to which
a person might thereby be subjected.

7.4.1.6 The study of the electrical impedance of the human body as a function of touch voltage
and magnitude of current flow in the body as a function of its duration likely to produce a given
effect are two components which help in establishing a relationship between prospective touch
voltage and its duration which will not result in harmful physiological effects for any person.
Limits of touch voltage are based on studies on the effects of current on human body (see IS/IEC
60479).

7.4.1.7 Permissible touch voltage UTp as shown in Figure 5 can be calculated based on 5.2.1
and 5.2.2 and used alternatively.

7.4.1.8 The maximum disconnection time stated in Table 1 shall be applied to final circuits with
a rated current not exceeding,
 a) 63 A with one or more socket-outlets, and
b) 32 A supplying only fixed connected current-using equipment.

7.4.1.9 In TN systems, a disconnection time not exceeding 5 s is permitted for distribution

circuits, and for circuits not covered by 7.4.1.8.

7.4.1.10 In TT systems, a disconnection time not exceeding 1 s is permitted for distribution

circuits and for circuits not covered by 7.4.1.8.

7.4.1.11 Where it is not feasible for an overcurrent protective device to interrupt the supply or
the use of an RCD for this purpose is not appropriate, following measures shall be followed.

7.4.1.11.1 Where automatic disconnection is not feasible in circumstances:

where,

a) electronic equipment with limited short-circuit current is installed, or

b) the required disconnection times cannot be achieved by a protective device,

the following provisions are applicable.

7.4.1.11.2 For installations with power electronic converters with nominal voltage Uo greater
than 50 V a.c. or 120 V d.c. and where automatic disconnection is not feasible, the output
voltage of the source shall be reduced to 50 V a.c. or 120 V d.c. or less in the event of a fault
between a live conductor and the protective conductor or earth in a time as given in 7.4.1.8,
7.4.1.9 and 7.4.1.10, as appropriate (see IEC 62477-1).

The power electronic converter shall be one for which the manufacturer gives adequate methods
for the initial and periodic verification of the installation.

7.4.1.11.3 Except where 7.4.1.11.1 applies, if automatic disconnection cannot be achieved in

the time required by 7.4.1.8, 7.4.1.9 and 7.4.1.10 an appropriate, supplementary protective
equipotential bonding shall be provided in accordance 7.4.5 and the voltage between
simultaneously accessible conductive parts shall not exceed 50 V a.c. or 120 V d.c.

7.4.1.11.4 However, disconnection may be required for reasons other than protection against
electric shock.

7.4.1.12 If automatic disconnection cannot be achieved with in the recommended time

supplementary protective equipotential bonding shall be provided in accordance with 7.4.5.

7.4.2 TN Systems

7.4.2.1 All exposed conductive parts shall be connected to the earthed point of the source by
protective conductors. The protective conductors shall be earthed near each power transformer
or generator of the installation.

The characteristics of the protective devices and the cross-sectional area of conductors shall
be so chosen that if a fault of negligible impedance occurs anywhere between a phase
conductor and a protective conductor or exposed conductive part, automatic disconnection of
the supply will occur within the minimum possible safe time.
7.4.2.2 In TN systems the integrity of the earthing of the installation depends on the reliable and
effective connection of the PEN or PE conductors to earthed point of source. Where the earthing
is provided from a public or other supply system, compliance with the necessary conditions
external to the installation is the responsibility of the supply network operator.

NOTE — PEN is not allowed downstream the origin of installation.

Examples of conditions include the PEN is connected to earth at a number of points at the
distribution and is installed in such a way as to minimize the risk arising from a break in the
PEN conductor.
RB/RE ≤ 50/(U0 – 50)

Where,

RB is the earth electrode resistance, in ohms, of all earth electrodes in parallel.

RE is the minimum contact resistance with earth, in ohms, of extraneous-conductive-
parts not connected to a protective conductor, through which a fault between line and
earth may occur.
U0 is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. voltage to earth, in volts.

7.4.2.3 The neutral point or the midpoint of the power supply system shall be earthed. If a
neutral point or midpoint is not available or not accessible, a line conductor shall be earthed.

Exposed-conductive-parts of the installation shall be connected by a protective conductor to the

main earthing terminal of the installation which shall be connected to the earthed point of the
power supply system.

If other effective earth connections exist, it is recommended that the protective conductors also
be connected to such points wherever possible. Earthing at additional points, distributed as
evenly as possible, may be necessary to ensure that the potentials of protective conductors
remain, in case of a fault, as near as possible to that of earth.

It is recommended that protective conductors (PE and PEN) should be earthed where they enter
any buildings or premises taking account of any diverted neutral currents of multiple earthed
PEN conductors.

7.4.2.4 In fixed installations, a single conductor serving both as a protective conductor and as
a neutral conductor is allowed only upstream the origin of installation.

7.4.2.5 The characteristics of the protective devices (see 7.4.2.6) and the circuit impedances
shall fulfil the following requirement:

ZS × Ia ≤ Uo

Where,

ZS is the impedance in ohms (Ω) of the fault loop comprising

a) the source.
b) the line conductor up to the point of the fault.
c) the protective conductor between the point of the fault and the source.
Ia is the current in amperes (A) causing the automatic operation of the disconnecting device
within the time specified in 7.4.1.8, or 7.4.1.9. When a residual current protective device (RCD)
is used this current is the residual operating current providing disconnection in the time
specified in 7.4.1.8, or 7.4.1.9.
Uo is the nominal a.c. or d.c. line to earth voltage in volts (V).

NOTE — In TN systems the residual fault currents are significantly higher than 5 × IΔn. Therefore, the
disconnection times in accordance with Table 1 are fulfilled where residual current protective devices (RCDs)
are installed. Circuit-breakers providing residual current protection (CBR) and MRCDs can be used, provided
the time delay is adjusted to afford compliance with Table 1.

7.4.2.6 In TN systems, the following protective devices may be used for fault protection,

a) overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs).

b) residual current devices (RCDs).

NOTES

1 The incorporation of the protective conductor in the same wiring system as the live conductors or in their
immediate proximity is strongly recommended (see 4.5.5).
2 Where an RCD is used for fault protection the circuit should also be protected by an overcurrent protective
device.

A residual current protective device (RCD) shall not be used in TN-C systems.

Where an RCD is used in a TN-C-S system, a PEN conductor shall not be used on the load side.
The connection of the protective conductor to the PEN conductor shall be made on the source
side of the RCD.

7.4.2.7 In order that the devices will give thermal protection to the protective conductor and
considering the tolerance requirement in IS 732, the condition of automatic disconnection is
met if the fault loop impedance satisfies,

2 𝑈0
𝑧𝑆 (𝑚) ≤ ×
3 𝐼𝑎

Where,

Zs(m) = the measured impedance of the fault current loop starting and ending at the
point of fault (measured in Ω);
Uo = the line conductor to earthed neutral voltage (V); and
Ia = the current causing the automatic operation of the protective device within the
stipulated disconnection time.

Where the measured value of the fault loop impedance exceeds 2 Uo / 3 Ia, a supplementary
bonding may be necessary.

NOTE — See Annex E for sample calculations.

7.4.2.8 Recommended Maximum Earth Fault Loop Impedance Values for MCB’s - Zs(m) (see
Table 20)

NOTE — Maximum earth fault loop impedance values for MCBs conforming to IS/IEC 60898-1 are given in
Table 20. For other OCPDs, refer to manufacturer’s data.
 Table 20 Maximum Allowed Earth Fault Loop Impedance Zs (in Ohms) for MCB’s

SI MCB
No. In in 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Amps
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
i) Type of
Maximum allowed fault loop impedance for different type of MCB's (in Ω)
MCB
ii) Type B 5.11 3.07 1.92 1.53 1.23 0.96 0.77 0.61 0.49 0.38 0.31 0.25
iii) Type C 2.56 1.53 0.96 0.77 0.61 0.48 0.38 0.31 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.12
iv) Type D 1.28 0.77 0.48 0.38 0.31 0.24 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.06

If this condition cannot be fulfilled, supplementary bonding in accordance with 7.4.5 may be
necessary.

7.4.3 TT Systems

7.4.3.1 All exposed conductive parts collectively protected by the same protective device shall
be interconnected by protective conductors with an earth electrode common to all those parts.
Where several protective devices are used in series, this requirement applies separately to all
the exposed conductive parts protected by each device.

The neutral point or the mid-point of the power supply system shall be earthed. If a neutral point
or mid-point is not available or not accessible, a line conductor shall be earthed.

Generally, in TT systems, RCDs should be used for fault protection. Alternatively, overcurrent
protective devices may be used for fault protection provided a suitably low value of Zs is
permanently and reliably assured.

7.4.3.2 For compliance the following shall be fulfilled:

7.4.3.2.1Where a residual current protective device (RCD) is used for fault protection, the
following conditions shall be fulfilled

a) the disconnection time as required by 7.4.1.8 or 7.4.1.10, and

b) RA × I Δn ≤ 50 V

Where,
RA is the sum of the resistance in ohms (Ω) of the earth electrode and the protective
conductor for the exposed conductive parts,
IΔn is the rated residual operating current of the RCD.

NOTES

1 Fault protection is provided in this case also if the fault impedance is not negligible.
2 Where discrimination between RCDs is necessary, see IS 732:5.3.6.3.
3 Where RA is not known, it may be replaced by ZS.
4 The disconnection times in accordance with Table 1 relate to prospective residual fault currents
significantly higher than the rated residual operating current of the RCD (typically 5 IΔn).
7.4.3.2.2 Where an overcurrent protective device is used the following condition shall be
fulfilled:

Zs × Ia ≤ Uo

where

Zs is the impedance in ohms (Ω) of the fault loop comprising,

a) the source,
b) the line conductor up to the point of the fault,
c) the protective conductor of the exposed-conductive-parts,
d) the earthing conductor,
e) the earth electrode of the installation and
f) the earth electrode of the source,

Ia is the current in A causing the automatic operation of the disconnecting device within
the time specified in 7.4.1.8 or 7.4.1.10.
Uo is the nominal a.c. or d.c. line to earth voltage.

7.4.4 IT Systems

7.4.4.1 In IT systems live parts shall be insulated from earth or connected to earth through a
sufficiently high impedance. This connection may be made either at the neutral point or
midpoint of the system or at an artificial neutral point. The latter may be connected directly to
earth if the resulting impedance to earth is sufficiently high at the system frequency. Where no
neutral point or mid-point exists, a line conductor may be connected to earth through a high
impedance.

The fault current is then low in the event of a single fault to an exposed-conductive-part or to
earth and automatic disconnection in accordance with 7.4.1.8 is not imperative provided the
condition in 7.4.4.2 is fulfilled. Provisions shall be taken, however, to avoid risk of harmful
pathophysiological effects on a person in contact with simultaneously accessible exposed
conductive parts in the event of two faults existing simultaneously.

NOTE — To reduce overvoltage or to damp voltage oscillation, it may be necessary to provide earthing
through impedances or artificial neutral points, and the characteristics of these should be appropriate to the
requirements of the installation.

The impedance of the power system earth shall be such that on the occurrence of a single fault
to exposed conductive parts or to earth, the fault current is of low value. Disconnection of the
supply is not essential on the occurrence of the first fault. Protective measures must, however,
prevent danger on the occurrence of two simultaneous faults involving different live conductors.

7.4.4.2 Exposed-conductive-parts shall be earthed individually (see fig 33B), in groups (see
Figure 33C), or collectively.

The following condition shall be fulfilled:

In a.c. systems the following condition shall be fulfilled to limit the touch voltage to:
RA × Id ≤ 50 V
where

RA is the sum of the resistance in ohms (Ω) of the earth electrode and protective conductor
for the exposed-conductive-parts.
Id is the fault current in A of the first fault of negligible impedance between a line
conductor and an exposed-conductive-part. The value of Id takes account of leakage
currents and the total earthing impedance of the electrical installation.

7.4.4.3 In IT systems the following monitoring devices and protective devices may be used:

a) insulation monitoring devices (IMDs).

b) residual current monitoring devices (RCMs).
c) insulation fault location systems (IFLS).
d) overcurrent protective devices.
e) residual current protective devices (RCDs).

NOTES

1 Where a residual current protective device (RCD) is used, tripping of the RCD in the event of a first fault
cannot be excluded due to capacitive leakage currents.

2 In case of faults in two different items of class I current-using equipment supplied by different line
conductors, the operation of a residual current protective device (RCD) is only likely to be achieved if every
single item of current using equipment is protected by an individual residual protective device (RCD). The
use of overcurrent protective devices to provide fault protection is also suitable.

7.4.4.4 Where an IT system is designed not to disconnect in the event of first fault, the
occurrence of the first fault shall be indicated by either:

a) an insulation monitoring device (IMD), which may be combined with an insulation

fault location system (IFLS), or
b) a residual current monitor (RCM), provided the residual current is sufficiently high to
be detected.

NOTE — RCMs are not able to detect symmetrical insulation faults.

This device shall initiate an audible and/or visual signal which shall continue as long as the fault
persists. The signal can be initiated via a relay contact output, an electronic switching output or
a communication protocol.

A visual and/or an audible alarm system shall be arranged at a suitable place, so that it is
perceived by responsible persons.

If there are both audible and visible signals, it is permissible for the audible signal to be
cancelled.

It is recommended that a first fault be eliminated with the shortest practicable delay.

In addition, an insulation fault location system (IFLS) according to IEC 61557-9 may be
provided to indicate the location of a first fault from a live part to exposed-conductive-parts or
earth or another reference point.
7.4.4.5 After the occurrence of a first fault, conditions for automatic disconnection of supply in
the event of a second fault occurring on a different live conductor shall be as follows:

a) Where exposed-conductive-parts are interconnected by a protective conductor

collectively earthed to the same earthing system, the conditions similar to a TN system
apply and the following conditions shall be fulfilled where the neutral conductor is not
distributed in a.c. systems and in d.c. systems where the mid-point conductor is not
distributed:

2IaZS ≤ U

or where the neutral conductor or mid-point conductor respectively is distributed:

2IaZ’S ≤ Uo

where

Uo is the nominal a.c. or d.c. voltage, in V, between line conductor and neutral
conductor or mid-point conductor, as appropriate,
U is the nominal a.c. or d.c. voltage in V between line conductors,
Zs is the impedance in ohms (Ω) of the fault loop comprising the line conductor and the
protective conductor of the circuit,
Z′s is the impedance in ohms (Ω) of the fault loop comprising the neutral conductor and
the protective conductor of the circuit,
Ia is the current in A causing operation of the protective device within the time required
in 7.4.1.8 for TN systems or 7.4.1.9.

NOTES

1 The time stated in Table 1 of 7.4.1.8 for the TN system is applicable to IT systems with a distributed or non-
distributed neutral conductor or mid-point conductor.

2 The factor 2 in both formulas takes into account that in the event of the simultaneous occurrence of two
faults, the faults may exist in different circuits.

3 For fault loop impedance, the most severe case should be taken into account, Example: a fault on the line
conductor at the source and simultaneously another fault on the neutral conductor of a current-using
equipment of the circuit considered.

b) Where the exposed-conductive-parts are earthed in groups (see Figure 33C) or

individually (see Figure 33B), the following condition applies:
RA × Ia ≤ 50 V

where

RA is the sum of the resistances of the earth electrode and the protective conductor to the
exposed-conductive-parts,
Ia is the current causing automatic disconnection of the disconnection device in a time
complying to that for TT systems in Table 1 of 7.4.1.8 or in a time complying to 7.4.1.10.
 NOTE — If compliance to the requirements of b) is provided by a residual current protective device (RCD)
compliance with the disconnection times required for TT systems in Table 1 may require residual currents
significantly higher than the rated residual operating current IΔn of the RCD applied (typically 5 IΔn)

7.4.5 Supplementary Equipotential Bonding

If the conditions specified in 7.4.2 to 7.4.4 cannot be fulfilled for automatic disconnection of
supply, it is necessary to provide supplementary equipotential bonding. This applies to entire
installation or a part thereof, an item of apparatus or a location. The protective conductors for
supplementary bonding shall also confirm to 7.3.4.2.

NOTES

1 Supplementary protective equipotential bonding is considered as an addition to fault protection.

2 The use of supplementary protective bonding does not exclude the need to disconnect the supply for other
reasons, for example protection against fire, thermal stresses in equipment, etc.

3 Additional requirements may be necessary for special locations, (Example: Group 1 and group 2 Medical
locations), or for other reasons.

7.4.5.1 Supplementary protective equipotential bonding shall include all simultaneously

accessible exposed-conductive-parts of fixed equipment and extraneous-conductive-parts
including where practicable the main metallic reinforcement of constructional reinforced
concrete. The equipotential bonding system shall be connected to the protective conductors of
all equipment including those of socket-outlets.

7.4.5.2 The resistance R between simultaneously accessible exposed-conductive-parts and

extraneous-conductive-parts shall fulfil the following condition:

50𝑉
𝑅≤ 𝑖𝑛 𝑎𝑐 𝑠𝑦𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑚
𝐼𝑎

120𝑉
𝑅≤ 𝑖𝑛 𝑑𝑐 𝑠𝑦𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑚
𝐼𝑎

where
Ia is the operating current in A of the protective device

a) for residual current protective devices (RCDs), IΔn

b) for overcurrent protective devices, the 5 s operating current.

7.4.6 Installation and Location of Increased Shock Risk

For installation and location of increased shock risk, additional measures may be considered if
necessary, these include:

a) RCD with rated residual current of 30 mA, and

b) Protective extra-low voltage (PELV) and separated extra-low voltage (SELV)
equipment.

7.4.7 Basic Purpose of Earth Fault Protection

The occurrence of an earth fault in an installation creates two possible hazards. Firstly, voltage
appear between exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts, and if these parts
are simultaneously accessible, this voltage constitute a shock hazard, this condition being
known as indirect contact.

Secondly, the fault current that flows in the phase and protective conductors of the circuit
feeding the faulty equipment (the earth fault may, of course, occur in the fixed wiring of the
circuit itself) may be of such a magnitude as to cause an excessive temperature rise in those
conductors, thereby creating a fire hazard.

The protective measure known as ‘protective equipotential bonding and automatic

disconnection of the supply’ is intended to give a high degree of protection against both hazards.
The choice of protective device used to give disconnection is influenced by the type of system
of which the installation is part, because either:

a) the earth fault loop impedance has to be low enough to allow adequate earth fault current
flow to cause an overcurrent protective device (for example, a fuse or circuit breaker) in
the faulty circuit to operate in a sufficiently short time; or
b) where it is not possible to achieve a low enough earth fault loop impedance,
disconnection may be initiated by fitting a residual current device (RCD). The rated
residual current IΔn shall fulfil 7.4.3. Alternatively rated residual current IΔn and the
corresponding Fault loop impedance shall be as per Table 21.

NOTE — RCD’s for additional protection See 7.5.5.

7.4.8 Earthing of Installations

Most installations are part of either a TN system or a TT system and in both type of installation
the exposed conductive parts of all electrical equipment of an installation should be connected
by means of protective earthing conductor to the main earthing terminal (MET).

Class II equipment, whether metal enclosed or insulation enclosed, embodied in its construction
not only basic insulation but also supplementary or reinforced insulation, exposed metal work
of such equipment should not be considered to become live under fault condition and are not
considered to be an exposed-conductive part.

Various earthing systems are considered in 6.2

7.4.8.1 Fault protection (Protection against indirect contact / electric shock)

Protection against indirect contact is achieved by the adoption of one of the following protective
measures:

a) Safety extra low voltage.

b) The use of Class II equipment or by equivalent insulation.
c) A non-conducting location.
d) Earth free local equipotential bonding.
e) Electrical separation.
f) Earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of the supply.

NOTES
 1 The primary concern of this Code is (d) and (f) while other methods of protection against indirect contact
are covered in IS732.

2 Item (a) requires that the nominal voltage of the circuit concerned does not exceed extra low voltage that the
source has a high degree of isolation from higher voltage circuits (for example, a Class II safety isolation
transformer) and that live parts also have a similar degree of isolation or separation from those circuits. The
most important requirement, however, is that live parts and exposed conductive parts of a safety extra
low voltage circuit should not be connected to earth, protective conductors or exposed conductive parts of
another circuit. Where these general requirements are not met but the nominal voltage still does not exceed
extra low voltage, the circuit is described as a functional extra low voltage circuit and one part of it may be
connected to earth.

3 Item (b) is generally applicable and covers the selection and use of equipment complying with either
insulation encased Class II equipment (all-insulated’) or metal cased Class II equipment. In some cases,
such as factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear, the equivalent term used is ‘total insulation’.
Item (b) can also be achieved by the application of suitable supplementary or reinforced insulation to
equipment on site. Earthing of the equipment is not required. In fact, by definition there will be no facility
for earthing provided in Class II equipment.

4 Items (c), (d) and (e) are of limited interest as they can be applied only in special situations and used under
effective supervision. They all include a high degree of isolation from earth.

5 In this Clause, detailed consideration is limited to protective equipotential bonding and automatic
disconnection of the supply.

7.4.8.2 Protective Equipotential Bonding and Automatic Disconnection of the Supply

The two aims of this protective measure are to:

a) ensure that when an earth fault occurs, the voltages appearing between exposed
conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts in the location served by the
installation concerned are minimized; and
b) ensure rapid disconnection of the circuit in which that earth fault occurs.

In order to meet (a), a zone is created by first connecting all extraneous conductive parts by
means of protective bonding conductors to the main earthing terminal of the installation.

The zone is completed by the connection of all exposed conductive parts of the circuits in the
installation and of current-using equipment fed from those circuits to the main earthing terminal
using protective earthing conductors.

Whilst such a zone is called an equipotential zone, the fault voltages will still exist between the
exposed conductive parts of perfectly sound equipment and between such parts and extraneous
conductive parts, but the application of bonding minimizes these voltages in each case.

An installation may consist of a number of zones; for instance, when an installation supplies a
number of buildings, equipotential bonding is necessary in each building so that each constitutes
a zone having a reference point to which the exposed conductive parts of the circuits and
current-using equipment in that building are connected.

The second aim of this protective measure is met by limiting the upper value of the earth fault
loop impedance of each circuit to a value determined by the type and current rating of the
protective device concerned such that, on the occurrence of an earth fault (assumed to be of
negligible impedance), disconnection will occur before the prospective touch voltage reaches a
harmful value.
If: Fault current
ZPE: Impedance of the protective earthing conductor

Figure 34 Main and Supplementary Equipotential Bonding

7.4.8.3 Protective equipotential bonding

NOTE — Central Electricity Authority (Measures relating to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2023,
Regulation No 43 (v) every building shall have protective equipotential bonding by interconnecting the
exposed and extraneous conductive parts as per the relevant standards. IS 3043, IS732 and NEC 2023 are the
relevant standards.

The protective measure of automatic disconnection in the event of a fault to earth requires:

a) Automatic disconnection in the event of a fault to earth,

b) Protective earthing to facilitate above, and
c) Protective equipotential bonding to reduce touch voltage.

Bonding, by means of main equipotential bonding conductors, of extraneous-conductive parts

to the main earthing terminal of the installations is a mandatory safety requirement in CEA
safety regulations 2023 (see 7.2.1 and Figure 31).

Where such conductive parts originate outside the building, they shall be bonded as close as
practicable to their point of entry within the building.

Supplementary equipotential bonding shall ensure that the fault voltage downstream the main
equipotential bonding is kept below the tolerable fault voltage.

NOTE — Example of tolerable voltages are 50 V in general locations and lesser voltage in special locations
(Example: 25 V in medical locations).
 Figure 35 Bonding of Incoming Metallic Services Including Armouring of Cables Entering the
Building

7.4.8.4 Extraneous Conductive Parts:

The extraneous conductive parts that are required to be bonded to the MET of the installation
include:

a) gas pipes,
b) other service pipes and ducting,
c) risers and pipes of fire protection equipment,
d) structural extraneous conductive parts, if accessible in normal condition,
e) metallic reinforcements of constructional reinforced concrete, if reasonably
practicable. and
f) conductors of lightning protection system.

NOTE — Connections pipes, ducting and exposed metallic parts of building structure should be considered
most carefully. In some types of earthing systems, especially TN-C or TN-C-S systems effectively connect
extraneous conducting metalwork to the supply system neutral and could cause continuously circulating
currents and standing voltages that might result in electrochemical corrosion or random spark hazards in
potentially flammable atmospheres.

7.4.8.5 Exposed Conductive Parts

Exposed conductive parts that are required to be connected by means of protective earthing
conductors to the MET of the installation are as follows:

a) All metalwork associated with wiring system (other than current-carrying parts)
including cable sheaths and armour, conduit, ducting, trunking, boxes and catenary
wires.
b) The exposed metalwork of all Class I fixed and portable current-using equipment.
c) The exposed metalwork of transformers used in the installation other than those that
are an integral part of equipment. The secondary windings of transformers should be
earthed depending upon the system earthing.
Simultaneously accessible exposed conductive parts shall be connected to the same earthing
system individually (see Figure 33 B), in groups (see Figure 33C) or collectively.

All fixed wiring accessories and circuits concerned such as wires in conduits, sockets etc should
incorporate a protective earthing conductor that is connected to the MET of the installation. At
the time of the erection of the installation the connected equipment may be of Class II
construction or its equivalent, but there is a possibility that in the life of the installation the
equipment may be replaced by Class I equipment.

Exposed conductive parts that (because of their small dimensions or disposition) cannot be
gripped or contacted by a major surface of the human body (that is, a human body surface not
exceeding 50 mm × 50 mm) need not be earthed if the connection of those parts to a protective
conductor cannot readily be made and reliably maintained. Typical examples of such parts are
screws and nameplate, cable clips and lamp caps. Fixing screws for non-metallic accessories
need not be earthed provided there is no appreciable risk of the screws coming into contact with
live parts.

Other exposed conductive parts not required to be earthed are:

a) Overhead line insulator brackets and metal parts connected to them if such parts are
not within arm’s reach; and
b) Short lengths of metal conduit or other metal enclosures used to give mechanical
protection for equipment of Class II or equivalent construction.

7.5 Selection of Devices for Automatic Disconnection of Supply

7.5.1 Protective Measure: Automatic Disconnection of Supply

Automatic disconnection of supply is a protective measure in which,

a) basic protection is provided by basic insulation of live parts or by barriers or

enclosures; and
b) fault protection is provided by protective earthing, protective equipotential bonding
and automatic disconnection in case of a fault.

A brief summary of requirement for automatic disconnection of supply is given in clauses 7.4.

In designing the protective system of any installation, due consideration be given to ensure that
periodic inspection, testing and maintenance can be readily and safely undertaken.

7.5.2 Device for Automatic Disconnection

In general, every circuit is provided with a means of overcurrent protection. Where earth fault
loop impedance is low enough to cause these devices to operate within the specified times (that
is, sufficient current can flow during an earth fault), such devices may be relied upon for
automatic disconnection of supply. If the earth fault loop impedance does not permit the
overcurrent protective devices to give automatic disconnection of the supply under earth fault
conditions, the first option is to reduce that impedance. It may be permissible for this to be
achieved by the use of protective multiple earthing or by additional earth electrodes such as a
horizontal earth continuity conductor. There are practical limitations to both approaches.
An alternate approach is to use residual current devices with appropriate settings (see Table 21)
to clear the faults within the permissible time. This method is equally applicable where earth
loop impedances cannot be improved.

7.5.3 Use of Overcurrent Protective Devices for Fault Protection by Automatic Disconnection
of Supply

7.5.3.1 Where overcurrent protective devices are used to facilitate automatic disconnection of
supply in case of earth fault, conditions mentioned in clause 7.4 shall be fulfilled. Details of the
maximum permissible earth loop impedance for the thermal protection of cables by overcurrent
protective devices can also be computed (see 7.4 / Table 20).

7.5.3.2 The incorporation of the protective conductor in the same wiring system as the live
conductors or in their immediate proximity is strongly recommended (see 4.5.5).

7.5.3.3 Where multiple sources (such as Transformer and DG) are used, automatic
disconnection of earth fault by overcurrent protective devices shall be ensured for all sources.

7.5.4 Use of Residual Current Devices for Fault Protection by Automatic Disconnection of
Supply.

In installations where the earth fault loop impedance is not sufficiently low to facilitate
automatic disconnection in case of a fault by use of an overcurrent protective device, residual
current devices shall be used. Table 21 provides maximum value of rated residual operating
current of RCD’s as a function of earth loop impedance.

Table 21 Maximum Value of Rated Residual Operating Current of RCD as A Function of Earth
Loop Impedance

SI No. Rated residual operating Measured Maximum

current of RCD Earth Loop Impedance
(1) (2) (3)
i) 10 A 5Ω
ii) 5A 10 Ω
iii) 3A 20 Ω
iv) 1A 50 Ω
v) 500 mA 100 Ω
vi) 300 mA 100 Ω
vii) 100 mA 200 Ω
viii) 30 mA 200 Ω

7.5.5 Additional Protection by RCD:

In a.c., TN or TT system, additional protection by means of an RCD with IΔn ≤ 30 mA shall be

provided for:

a) Socket-outlets with a rated current not exceeding 32 A that are liable to be used by
ordinary persons and are intended for general use; and
b) Mobile equipment for use outdoors with a rated current not exceeding 32 A.
c) Luminaires in domestic and similar premises.
 d) Equipment and installation which are frequently used / touched by people (example:
street furniture, Metal distribution boards in streets and public places).

NOTE — The CEA regulations 2023 (regulation 44, para 2) require a Residual Current Device having a rated
residual operating current not exceeding 30 mA for every domestic installation. This requirement can be met
by providing an RCD with IΔn ≤ 30 mA as an additional protection in final circuits.

7.5.6 Protection Against Fire Due to Insulation Faults.

Electrical installations in locations with the external influence BE2 (see IS 732), supplied by
TN and TT systems, final circuits and current-using equipment shall be protected against earth
faults by the use of RCDs with a rated residual operating current I∆n ≤300 mA. Where resistive
faults may cause a fire, Example: for overhead heating with heating film elements, the rated
residual operating current shall be I∆n ≤30 mA.

7.5.7 Selection of Residual Current Devices in Relation to The Nature of Residual Current.

IEC 60755 recognises four types of RCDs, intended to be used on AC supply systems. They are
Type AC, Type A, Type F and Type B.

NOTE — RCD's include RCCB's, RCBO's, CBR's and MRCD.

RCDs shall be selected on the basis of connected electrical equipment and their characteristics:

a) Residual Current Devices of Type AC shall only be used to serve fixed equipment,
where it is known that the load current contains no d.c component.

NOTE — Type AC RCD shall not be used for applications where LED lights and SMPS power suppliers
(Example: Computers, modern electronics etc) are used.

b) Residual Current Devices of Type A shall be used where load may produce residual
current with d.c. components.

NOTE — An example application for RCDs of type A is socket-outlet circuit for the use of portable electronic
equipment. Type A RCD is a minimum requirement if used in locations where LED lights and SMPS power
supplies are used.

c) Residual Current Devices of Type F shall be used where loads may produce residual
current containing d.c. components and chopping frequency currents

NOTE — An example is a single phase class I equipment containing a motor controlled by a variable speed
drive air conditioner.

d) Residual Current Devices of Type B shall be used where loads contain multi-phase
frequency converters or where loads may produce smooth d.c. residual current.

NOTE — An example of loads containing multi-phase frequency converters is a three-phase, class I equipment
containing a motor controlled by a variable speed drive. Examples of loads which may produce smooth d.c.
residual current are solar PV and electric vehicle supply equipment. Type B RCD shall also be used in the a.c.
side of grid connected solar PV system, where there is no simple separation.

7.5.8 Selection of Residual Current Devices in Relation to Time Delay

RCDs with a time delay shall not be used for additional protection.
RCDs intended to be operated by ordinary persons which have a time-delay are known as type
S. The tripping of such devices is delayed, and they are able to withstand a residual current
during a specified time, without tripping. Type S residual current device can withstand 2 times
IΔn for 60 ms without tripping.

RCD of IΔn ≤30 mA shall be used for shock protection.

RCDs with an adjustable time delay are only to be installed where accessible to instructed
persons (BA4) or skilled persons (BA5).

RCD of IΔn ≤300 mA shall be used for protection against fire in building due to leakage current.

NOTE — See IS 732 for the classification of external influences, such as BA4 and BA5.

7.6 Earthing Requirements for Installations Having Higher Protective Condcutor

Current

7.6.1 General

7.6.1.1 This clause covers the special requirements for the connection of equipment to the
electrical power installation of buildings, where the protective earthing conductor current
exceeds the limit specified in IS 732 / IS9409 (for a.c and d.c). These requirements are intended
to ensure the safety of personal in the presence of such leakage current.

High Frequency interference suppression filters fitted to power electronics and data processing
equipment may produce high earth leakage current. In such cases, failure of continuity in the
protective earth connection may cause a dangerous touch voltage.

The requirements of this clause apply where equipment having high leakage current is
connected to any type of power system. Additional requirements are given for TT and IT
systems in 7.6.6 and 7.6.7.

NOTES

1 On TN-C Systems, where the neutral and protective conductors are contained in a single conductor (PEN
conductor) up to the equipment terminals, leakage current may be treated as load current.

2 Equipment normally having high earth leakage current may not be compatible with installations
incorporating residual current protective devices, as well as the standing residual current due to leakage
current. The possibility of nuisance tripping due to capacitor charging currents at switch-on shall be
considered.

7.6.1.2 Equipment considered.

The equipment shall be:

a) Stationary, and
b) Either permanently connected to the building wiring installation or connected via
industrial plugs and sockets.

NOTE — Industrial plugs and sockets are examples of suitable plugs and sockets. Plugs and sockets for
general use are not suitable.
7.6.1.3 It is particularly important for equipment with high leakage current that earth continuity
should be checked at the time it is installed and after any modification to the installation. It is
also recommended that earth continuity be checked thereafter at regular intervals.

7.6.1.4 Additionally, where leakage current measured in accordance with IS 13252 exceeds
10 mA (for a.c. system), equipment shall be connected in accordance with one of the
requirements detailed in 7.6.2 to 7.6.4.

NOTE — Leakage current measurements prescribed by IS 13252 include likely undetected fault conditions
within the equipment.

7.6.2 High Integrity Earth Connections

NOTE — The aim of the requirements detailed below is to provide high integrity earth connections by using
robust or duplicate conductors in association with permanent connections or robust connectors.

Protective earthing conductors shall comply with the following:

a) where the current-using equipment has only one protective earthing terminal, the
protective earthing conductor shall have a cross-sectional area of at least 10 mm2 Cu or
16 mm2 Al, through its total run.
b) Where the current-using equipment has a separate terminal for a second protective
earthing conductor a second protective earthing conductor of at least the same cross
sectional area as required for fault protection shall be run from a point where the
protective earthing conductor has a cross-sectional area not less than 10 mm2 Cu or 16
mm2 Al.
c) Each protective earthing conductor specified in (a) and (b) shall meet the requirements
of 7.3.2.

7.6.3 Earth Integrity Monitoring

A protective device shall be provided which will disconnect the equipment, in the event of a
discontinuity occurring in the earth conductor, within the voltage/time limits prescribed by
relevant standards.

NOTE — The aim of the requirements detailed above is to monitor the continuity of the protective earth
connection and provided means of automatic supply disconnection in case of failure.

7.6.4 Use of Electrical Separation

Equipment shall be connected to the supply via a double wound transformer of other units in
which the input and output circuits are electrically separated (see 7.6.9).

The secondary circuit should preferably be connected as a TN-S System but an IT System may
be used where required for the specific application.

NOTE — The aim of the requirements above is to localize the path of the leakage current, and minimize the
possibility of a break in continuity in this path.

7.6.5 Additional Requirements for RCD's:

The leakage in normal operation of all equipment protected by one and the same protective
device is less than 30 percent of the rated disconnection current of the RCD or half of the
minimum required current to operate the RCD.

If the above requirements cannot be met, the requirements of 7.6.4 (electrical separation) shall
apply.

7.6.6 Additional Requirements for TT System

The requirements below ensure that the leakage in normal operation of all equipment protected
by one and the same protective device is less than half of that required to operate earth fault
protective devices for the installation circuit.

a) The total leakage current I1 (in amperes), the resistance of the earth electrode RA (in
ohms) and the nominal operating residual current of the protective device IΔn (in
amperes) shall be related as follows:

𝐼𝛥𝑛 𝑈𝐿
𝐼1 ≤
2 2𝑅𝐴

b) If the requirements of (a) cannot be met, the requirements of 7.6.4 shall apply.

7.6.7 Additional Requirements for IT-Systems

7.6.7.1 It is preferred that equipment with high leakage current is not connected directly to IT
systems because of the difficulty of satisfying touch voltage requirements on a first fault.

Where possible, the equipment is supplied by a TN-S system derived from the mains supply by
means of electrical separation.

Where it is possible, the equipment may be connected directly to the IT system. This may be
facilitated by connecting all protective earth connections for equipment using the IT system
directly to the local earth electrode.

7.6.7.2 Before making direct connection to an IT system, installers shall ensure that equipment
is suitable for connection to IT systems according to the declaration of the manufacturer.

7.6.8 Safety Requirement for Low Noise Earthing Connections

NOTE — It may be found that the large leakage currents on the protective earthing system of building
installations cause an unacceptable incidence of malfunction on data processing equipment connected to it.

7.6.8.1 Whatever measures are taken to provide a low noise earthing connection, it is required
that exposed conductive parts of data processing shall be connected to the MET. The use of
separate earth electrodes for simultaneously accessible exposed conductive parts is not
permitted.

This requirement shall also apply to metallic enclosures of Class II and Class III equipment,
and to FELV circuits when these are earthed for functional reasons.

Conductors, which serve functional purposes only, need not comply with 7.3. (See ISO/IEC
30129)
7.6.8.2 Other special methods

In extreme cases, if the safety requirements of 7.6.8.1 are fulfilled, but electrical noise on the
MET of the installation cannot be reduced to an acceptable level, the installation has to be
treated as a special case.

The earthing arrangement has to provide the same level of protection as is generally provided
by these requirements and particular attention should be given to ensure that the arrangement:

a) provides adequate protection against overcurrent.

b) prevents excessive touch voltages on the equipment and ensures equipotential between
the equipment and adjacent metal work or other electrical equipment, under normal
and fault conditions. and
c) meets the requirements relating to excessive earth leakage current, if appropriate, and
does not invalidate them.

7.6.9 Example of The Use of Transformers for Electrical Separation.

7.6.9.1 Transformer Incorporated in or Attached to Unit.

The transformer shall be connected in accordance with Figure 36 in order to confine the earth
leakage current in conductors within the unit.

NOTE — No further special installation measures are necessary.

Figure 36 Methods of Connecting Double-Wound Transformers Situated Within or Attached to

Single Units

a) Single phase system depicted for ease. System may be 3-phase.

b) Protection and control arrangements are not shown.
c) C is the filter capacitance.
d) L1 and L2 or N are connections to the incoming supply and PE is the connection from
accessible parts of the equipment to the MET of installation for both protective
conductors of Class I equipment and functional earthing conductors for Class II/Class
III equipment.

7.6.9.2 Method of connecting transformers physically separate from units

The neutral point for the secondary circuit shall be connected to earth at the transformer and the
earth connections between the equipment and the transformer shall comply with the
requirements of 7.6.2 or 7.6.3.
Connections shall be as shown in Figure 37.

Figure 37 Method of Connecting Physically Separated Transformers

a) Single-phase system depicted for ease. System may be 3-phase.

b) Primary and secondary circuits must have means of control and protection. These are
not shown.
c) C is the filter capacitance.
d) L1 and L2 or N are connections to the incoming supply and PE is the connection from
accessible parts of the equipment to the MET of the installation for both protective
conductors of Class I equipment and functional earthing conductors of Class II/Class
III equipment.

7.7 Information Technology: Telecommunications Bonding Networks for Buildings and

Other Structures

7.7.1 General

In addition to protective earthing which may be required in accordance with this Code,
information and communication technology (ICT) and, more generally, telecommunications
equipment and systems may require functional earths for any or all of the following purposes:

a) minimise the risk to the correct function of that equipment and interconnecting cabling
from electrical hazards,
b) provide the telecommunications installation with a reliable signal reference – which may
improve immunity from electromagnetic interference (EMI).

If equipment requires both a protective earth and a functional earth connection, it is preferred
that the two earths should be separated within the equipment so that power system fault currents
cannot flow in the functional earthing conductors. The manufacturer shall provide separate
protective and functional earthing terminals in the equipment, suitably marked as defined in
3.69 (Symbols and Numbering). The functional earthing system and conductors can then be
designed solely in accordance with the requirements of the telecommunication system.
Alternatively, the protective and functional earth may be connected together within the
equipment but in this case the functional earth system and conductors should be suitable for the
current they may carry under power system fault conditions.
 NOTE — For more information refer ISO/IEC 30129 / IEC 61000-5-2.

7.7.2 Earthing Arrangements for Functional Purposes

7.7.2.1 General

Earthing arrangements for functional purposes shall be provided to ensure correct operation of
equipment or to permit reliable and proper functioning of installations.

7.7.2.2 Functional-equipotential-bonding for ICT

A functional equipotential bonding system may comprise

a) functional earthing conductor(s),

b) functional bonding conductor(s),
c) a main functional earthing terminal (MFET).

Where the functional equipotential bonding system is not locally connected to the protective
equipotential bonding system, the functional bonding conductors shall be,

a) insulated, and
b) installed separately from the protective conductor, and
c) connected to the MET only once.

The functional bonding conductors are insulated because those conductors could under certain
circumstances achieve a dangerous potential.

If there are multiple functional bonding conductors present in the electrical installation, a
separate main functional earthing terminal (MFET) shall be installed for ease of connection for
these conductors. The main functional earthing terminal shall be connected to the MET only
once.

The cross sectional area of every functional bonding conductor or functional earthing conductor
shall be capable of withstanding all mechanical and thermal stresses caused by the expected
operational current. This current shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions or by measurement taking into account the ICT equipment or system.

7.7.3 Minimum Cross-Sectional Area

In the absence of requirements, for example stated by the equipment manufacturer, the
following minimum cross-sectional area shall be applied for functional earthing conductors and
functional bonding conductors:

a) 2.5 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al, if protection against mechanical damage is provided,

b) 4 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al, if protection against mechanical damage is not provided.

NOTE — Larger cross-sectional areas should be required for EMC reasons. (See ISO/IEC 30129).

7.7.4 Identification of Functional Earthing and Bonding

A functional earthing conductor shall be identified by:

 a) the alphanumeric notation FE, or
b) by the colour cream at least applied at the terminations and points of connection, or
c) by the symbol (graphical symbol 5018).

Note: The recommended colour of functional conductors is cream. Internationally they are identified by the colour
PINK.

A functional bonding conductor shall be identified by:

a) the alphanumeric notation FB, or

b) by the symbol (graphical symbol 5020).

NOTE — The alphanumeric notation and the colour marking are in accordance with IEC 60445.

The bi-colour combination GREEN-AND-YELLOW shall not be used to identify functional

bonding conductors.

7.7.5 Electrical Continuity of Functional Bonding Conductors

The requirements of 7.3.7. except for 7.3.7.7, also apply for functional bonding.

If part of an item of equipment can be removed, the functional bonding conductor for the
remaining part of the electrical installation shall not be disconnected.

NOTE — Certain application need a d.c. contact resistance of ≤ 0.1 mΩ. Bonding connectors, the fasteners
and processes used to connect them shall be designed to provide and maintain low resistance joints (see
ISO/IEC 30219).

7.7.6 Main Functional Earthing Terminal (MFET)

The following conductors shall be connected to the main functional earthing terminal (MFET),
if any:

a) functional earthing conductors;

b) functional bonding conductors.

The main functional earthing terminal (MFET) and the main earthing terminal (MET) may be
combined.

NOTE — Certain application need a d.c. contact resistance of ≤ 0.1 mΩ. Bonding connectors, the fasteners
and processes used to connect them shall be designed to provide and maintain low resistance joints (see
ISO/IEC 30129).

7.7.7 Equipotential Bonding Ring Conductors

The main earthing terminal (MET and/or MFET) may be provided as a ring (closed loop)
conductor to enable systems of information technology and communications equipment (ICT)
to be incorporated into the equipotential bonding system using the shortest connection.

The equipotential bonding ring conductor shall be easily accessible wherever connections may
be required.
The cross-sectional area of equipotential bonding ring conductors shall comply either with
Clause 7.3.4 when used also for protective bonding, or:

a) be at least 50 mm2 hot-dip galvanized steel strip, or

b) be at least 16 mm2 copper, or
c) be a cross-sectional area in another material, which provides at least a conductivity
equivalent to 16 mm2 copper.

NOTES

1 See 4.5.4.5 of IS732 for more information.

2 See IEC 30129 for detailed information on Information technology – Telecommunications bonding networks
for buildings and other structures.

7.8 Earth Free Equipotential Bonding

Precautions shall be taken to ensure that persons entering the equipotential location cannot be
exposed to a dangerous potential difference, in particular, where a conductive floor insulated
from earth is connected to the earth-free equipotential bonding system.

8 RESISTANCE TO EARTH (GROUND) AND EARTH ELECTRODES

8.0 General

An earth electrode system is generally composed of several horizontal, vertical or inclined

electrodes, buried or driven into the soil by force.

The use of chemicals to reduce soil resistivity is not recommended (see 8.1.7).

Horizontal earth electrodes are preferably buried at a depth of 0.5 m to 1 m below ground level.
This gives sufficient mechanical protection.

In the case of vertical driven rods, the top of each rod will usually be situated below ground
level. Vertical or inclined driven rods are particularly advantageous when the soil resistivity
decreases with depth.

Metal frameworks, which forms a part of construction, may be used as an earthing conductor
to earth parts which are directly fixed to this framework. Consequently, the whole framework
shall have a sufficiently conductive cross-section and the joints shall be conductively and
mechanically reliable. Precautions shall be taken to avoid part of the framework becoming
disconnected from the earthing system when temporary dismantling takes place. Large
frameworks shall be connected to the earthing system in a sufficient number of points.

8.1 Resistance to Earth (Ground)

8.1.1 Nature of Earthing Resistance

The earthing resistance of an electrode is made up of:

a) resistance of the (metal) electrode,

b) contact resistance between the electrode and the soil, and
 c) resistivity of the soil from the electrode surface outward in the geometry set up for the
flow of current outward from the electrode to infinite earth.

The first two factors are very small fractions of an ohm and can be neglected for all
practical purposes. The measurement of soil resistivity is discussed in 13.1.

8.1.2 Application of Earth Electrodes and Its Resistance to Earth (Ground)

a) For low voltage electrical installation an earth electrode may be required, however no
minimum value of earth electrode resistance is necessary.
b) For high voltage application earth electrodes as a combination of horizontal electrodes,
vertical electrodes and electrodes embedded in concrete shall reduce touch and step
potentials.
c) Where lightning protection of structures is required, two types of earth electrodes (Type
A and Type B) are specified in IS/IEC 62305 – 3. For type A earth electrode if the
minimum length of horizontal and/or vertical earth electrodes as mentioned in 5.4.2.2
of IS/IEC 62305 – 3 can be disregarded, if the earthing resistance of the earth
termination system is less than 10 Ω.

NOTE — on c): Earth termination system means all earth electrodes and down conductors interconnected.

8.1.3 Soil Resistivity

The resistance to earth of a given electrode depends upon the electrical resistivity of the soil in
which it is installed. This factor is, therefore, important in deciding which of many protective
systems to adopt. The type of soil largely determines its resistivity. Table 22 and Table 23 gives
information on resistivity values for certain types of soil.

Table 22 Resistivity of Soil (Ground).

Resistivity
SI No. Nature of ground
Ωm
(1) (2) (3)
i) Marshy ground From some units to 30
Alluvium 20 to 100
Humus 10 to 150
Damp peat 5 to 100
ii) Malleable clay 50
Marl and compact clay 100 to 200
Jurassic marl 30 to 40
iii) Clayey sand 50 to 500
Siliceous sand 200 to 3000
Bare stony soil 1500 to 3000
Stony soil covered with lawn 300 to500
iv) Soft limestone 100 to 300
Compact limestone 1000 to 5000
 Cracked limestone 500 to 1000
Schist 50 to 300
Mica-schist 800
v) Granite and sandstone according to weathering 1500 to 10000
Granite and very altered sandstone 100 to 600

Table 23 Variation of Resistivity for Different Types of Soil.

Average value of
SI No. Nature of soil resistivity
m
(1) (2) (3)
i) Slimy arable soil, damp compact embankment 50
Poor arable ground, gravel, rough embankment 500
Bare stony ground, dry sand, impermeable rocks 3 000

8.1.4 Effect of Moisture Content on Earth Resistivity

Moisture content is one of the controlling factors in earth resistivity. Figure 38 shows the
variation of resistivity of red clay soil with percentage of moisture. The moisture content is
expressed in percent by weight of the dry soil. Dry earth weighs about 1440 kg/m³and thus 10
percent moisture content is equivalent to 144 kg of water per cubic metre of dry soil. It will be
seen from Figure 38 that above about 20 percent moisture, the resistivity is very little affected,
while below 20 percent the resistivity increases very abruptly with the decrease in moisture
content. A difference of a few percent moisture will therefore, make a very marked difference
in the effectiveness of earth connection if the moisture content falls below 20 percent. The
normal moisture content of soils ranges from 10 percent in dry seasons to 35 percent in wet
seasons, and an approximate average may be perhaps 16 to 18 percent.
 Figure 38 Variation of Soil Resistivity with Moisture Content

It should be recognized, however, that moisture alone is not the predominant factor in the low
resistivity of soils; for example, earth electrodes driven directly in the beds of rivers or
mountain streams may present very high resistance to earth. If the water is relatively pure, it
will be high resistivity and unless the soil contains sufficient natural elements to form a
conducting electrolyte, the abundance of water will not provide the soil with adequate
conductivity. The value of high moisture content in soils is advantageous in increasing the
solubility of existing natural elements in the soil, and in providing for the solubility of
ingredients which may be artificially introduced to improve the soil conductivity.

8.1.5 Corrosion Allowance and Conditions of Corrosion

8.1.5.1 Corrosion allowance

On an average, steel corrodes about six times as fast as copper when placed in soil. The extent
of corrosion depends upon the properties of soil. The generally accepted correlation between
the electrical resistivity of soil and its corrosivity is as indicated in Table 24.

Table 24 Soil Resistivity and Corrosion

SI No. Range of Soil Resistivity (.m) Class of Soil

(1) (2) (3)
i) Less than 25 Severely corrosive
ii) 25-50 Moderately corrosive
iii) 50-100 Mildly corrosive
iv) Above 100 Very mildly corrosive

The following methods can be adopted to safeguard conductor against excessive corrosion:
 a) Use material those are resistant to corrosion. Example: copper, stainless steel, copper
coated steel.
b) Concrete embedded foundation earth electrode.
c) Use of cathodic protection.
d) Use steel conductor including galvanised steel conductor with large cross-section having
allowance for corrosion.

Based on the results of the field studies on rates of corrosion, the following allowances in cross-
sectional area of the earthing conductor and earth electrode are recommended to take the effect
of corrosion into account (see Table 25).

Table 25 Allowances in Cross-Sectional Area of Bare or Galvanised Steel Earthing Conductor

and Earth Electrode to Take the Effect of Corrosion into Account.

(Clause 8.1.5.1)

SI No. Type of Laying of the Earth Conductor Allowances to be Considered

in Sizing
(1) (2) (3)
i) Conductors laid in soils having resistivity 0
greater than 100 ohm-meters (No allowance)
ii) Conductors laid in soils having resistivity from 15 percent
25 to 100 ohm-meters
iii) Conductors laid in soils having resistivity 30 percent
lower than 25 ohm-meters or where treatment
of soil around electrode is carried out

For the purpose of determining the allowance to be made for corrosion, the minimum resistivity
of the soil of the location of earth electrodes to be considered. The resistivity will be the
minimum in wet weather.

NOTE — Minimum size of commonly used earth electrodes, embedded in soil or concrete used to prevent
corrosion and provide mechanical strength are provided in Table 26.

8.1.5.2 Conditions of corrosion: General

Joints between metals of different nature shall not be in contact with the soil. Generally other
metals and alloys should not be used.

Minimum thickness and diameters of the earth electrodes in Table 26 considered usual risks of
chemical and mechanical deterioration. However, these dimensions may not be sufficient in
situations where significant risks of corrosion are present. Such risks may be encountered in
soils where stray currents circulate, for instance return d.c. currents of electric traction or in the
proximity of installations for cathodic protection. In such a case special precaution have to be
taken.

Earth electrodes shall be kept away from garbage dumps where percolation of for example dung,
liquid manure, chemical product, coke, etc. may corrode them and be erected, as far as possible,
well away from busy locations.

8.1.5.3 Conditions of corrosion: Electrochemical corrosion due to galvanic currents:

Steel in concrete has approximately the same galvanic potential in the electrochemical series as
copper in soil. Therefore, when steel in concrete is connected to steel in soil, a driving galvanic
voltage (of approximately 1 V) causes a corrosion current to flow and dissolve steel in soil.

Earth electrodes in soil should use copper, copper bonded steel or stainless steel where these
are connected to steel in concrete.

Any electrode embedded in concrete must not be connected directly from foundation concrete
into the soil except for electrodes made from stainless steel, copper or copper bonded steel. Hot
dip galvanized covering or protection by painting or other similar materials later on is not
sufficient for such purposes. Additional earthing arrangements around and near such buildings
should be made from other than bare/galvanized steel so as to provide a sufficient life-time for
this part of the earthing arrangement.

Earthing conductors and earth electrodes embedded in soil, in locations where soil resistivity is
severely or moderately corrosive shall use Copper, Stainless steel or Copper bonded steel.

The behaviour of a galvanized layer on steel in concrete is very complicated, particularly in

concrete with chlorides, where zinc will corrode quickly on contact with the reinforcement and
can under certain conditions cause damage to the concrete. Galvanized steel should therefore
not be used in coastal areas and where there can be salt in the ground water. As the use of
galvanized steel in concrete requires evaluation of many external factors, this material should
be used only after careful analysis. With this in mind, the use of the other mentioned materials
in Table 26 is preferred over the use of bare/galvanized steel.

8.1.6 Effect of Temperature on Earth Resistance

The temperature coefficient of resistivity for soil is negative but is negligible for temperatures
above freezing point. At about 20°C, the resistivity change is about 9 percent per °C. Below
0°C the water in the soil begins to freeze and introduces a tremendous increase in the
temperature coefficient, so that as the temperature becomes lower the resistivity rises
enormously. It is, therefore, recommended that in areas where the temperature is expected to be
quite low, the earth electrodes should be installed well below the frost line. Where winter
seasons are severe, this may be about 2 m below the surface, whereas in mild climates the frost
may penetrate only a few centimetres or perhaps the ground may not freeze at all. Earth
electrodes which are not driven below the first depth may have a very great variation in
resistance throughout the seasons of the year. Even when driven below the frost line, there is
some variation, because the upper soil, when frozen, presents a decided increase in soil
resistivity and has the effect of shortening the active length of electrode in contact with soil of
normal resistivity.

8.1.7 Artificial Treatment of Soil

Multiple rods, even in large number, may sometime fail to produce an adequately low resistance
to earth. This condition arises in installations involving soils of resistivity above 3000 Ωm.
Treatment of soil by using earth enhancing compounds to improve earth electrode resistance
should be applied in locations where the soil resistivity is higher than 3000 Ωm.

In soil with resistivity lesser than 200 Ωm compounds used for artificial treatment of soil are
not effective, hence shall not be used. In soil with low resistivity, increased corrosion of the
earth electrode and other buried steel materials in and around the area also should be considered
where these compounds are used. In general, use of such compounds are discouraged.

Earth enhancing compound shall comply to IS18925 (part 7).

8.2 Earth Electrodes

8.2.1 Type of Earth Electrodes

Earth electrodes dissipate current to ground. They can carry earth fault currents protective
conductor currents and lightning current to earth without danger from thermal, thermo-
mechanical and electromechanical stresses and from electric shock arising from these currents.
The following are examples of earth electrodes which may be used:

a) Concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode,

b) Soil-embedded foundation earth electrode,
c) Metallic electrode embedded directly in soil vertically or horizontally (Example: Rods,
wires, tapes, pipes or plates),
d) Metal sheath and other metal coverings of cables according to local conditions or
requirements,
e) Other suitable underground metalwork (Example: Pipes) according to local conditions
or requirements,
f) Embedded conductor bonded to metal reinforcement of concrete (except pre-stressed
concrete).

8.2.2 Minimum Size of Earth Electrodes and Condition of Use.

Minimum size of commonly used earth electrodes shall be as per Table 26. Earthing
conductors and earth electrodes materials and conditions of use should be as per table 27.

Table 26 Minimum Size of Commonly Used Earth Electrodes, Embedded in Soil or Concrete
Used to Prevent Corrosion and Provide Mechanical Strength

(Clause 8.2.2 also refer IS732, Table 13)

SI No. Material and Shape Diameter Cross Thickness Weight Thickness
surface Sectional of of coating
area coating
m
mm mm2 mm g/m2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Steel embedded in Round wire 10
concrete (bare, hot Solid tape or 75 3
galvanized or strip
stainless)
ii) Steel hot-dip Stripb or shaped 90 3 500 63
galvanized c strip/plate –
solid plate –
Lattice plate
Round rod 16 350 45
installed
vertically
SI No. Material and Shape Diameter Cross Thickness Weight Thickness
surface Sectional of of coating
area coating
m
mm mm2 mm g/m2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Round wire 10 350 45
installed
horizontally
Pipe 25 2 350 45
Stranded 70
(embedded in
concrete)
Cross profile (290) 3
installed
vertically
iii) Steel with electro- Round rod 14 250e
deposited copper installed
coating vertically
Round wire (8) 50 70
installed
horizontally
Stripb installed 90 3 70
horizontally
iv) Stainless Steel a Stripb or shaped 90 3
strip/plate
Round rod 16
installed
vertically
Round wire 10
installed
horizontally
Pipe 25 2
v) copper Strip 50 2
Round wire (25)d 50
installed
horizontally
Round rod (12) 15
installed
vertically
Stranded wire 1.7 for (25)d 50
individual
strands of
wire
Pipee 20 2
Solid plate (1.5) 2
Lattice plate 2
 Table 27: Earthing Conductors and Earth Electrodes Materials and Conditions of Usea

Use Corrosion
Can be
SI No. Material In open Increased destro yed
In earth In concrete Resistance
air by b y galvanic
coupling with
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Solid Solid Sulphur
Solid Good in many compounds
Copper Stranded Stranded -
Stranded environments Organic
As coating As coating materials
ii) Hot Acceptable in
Solid Solid High
galvanized air, in concrete
Solid chlorides Copper
Stranded b Stranded b and in benign
steel c d e soil
content

iii) Steel with

electro- Good in many Sulphur
deposited Solid Solid Solid
environments compounds
copperf
iv) Solid Solid Solid High
Stainless Good in many
chlorides –
steel Stranded Stranded Stranded environments
content
v) Good in
atmospheres
Aluminium Solid Not containing low Alkaline
g Not allowed Copper
Stranded allowed concentrations solutions
of sulphur and
chloride
a This table gives general guidance only.
b Stranded conductors are more vulnerable to corrosion than solid conductors. Stranded conductors are also
vulnerable where they enter or exit concrete positions. This is the reason why stranded galvanized steel
is not recommended in earth.
c Galvanized steel can be corroded in clay soil or moist soil.
d Galvanized steel in concrete should not extend into the soil due to possible corrosion of the steel just
outside the concrete.
e Galvanized steel in contact with reinforcement steel in concrete should not be used in areas where
there can be salt in the ground water.
f Underground connections in soil which require removal of conductor coatings is not recommended
without adequate post corrosion protection.
g To avoid corrosion, bare aluminium and aluminium alloy should not be used in direct contact with soil,
gravel, limestone or lime mortar.

8.2.3 Assessment of Earth Electrode Resistance

To enable a first approximation of the earth electrode resistance, a calculation may be made,
using the average values resistivity for different types of soil indicated in Table 23.
It is obvious that calculations made from these values only give an approximate result of an
earth electrode resistance. After having used the formula given in 8.2.3.3, the measurement of
this resistance may allow an estimation of the average resistivity value of the ground. Such
knowledge may be useful for further works done in similar conditions.

8.2.3.1 Buried plates

To maintain good contact of the two surfaces with the soil, full plates should preferably be
arranged vertically. Plate electrodes shall be buried such that its top edge is at a depth not less
than 1 m from the surface of the ground.

The approximate resistance to earth of a plate can be calculated from:

𝜌
𝑅 = 0.8
𝐿
Where,
ρ: resistivity of the soil (assumed uniform) (in Ω.m), and L: perimeter of the plate. (in m).

8.2.3.2 Vertically buried electrodes (pipes or rods)

The resistance (R) of a vertically buried earth electrode may be approximated from the formula.
𝜌
𝑅=
𝐿
Where,
ρ is the resistivity of the soil (in Ωm) and L is the length of the rod or pipe (in m).

It is possible to reduce the value of the earth electrode resistance by driving several vertical rods
connected in parallel, separated from each other by one rod length, in the case of two rods, and
by more if there are more than two rods.

Attention is drawn to the fact that, where extra long rods can be driven, as the ground is rarely
homogeneous such rods may reach ground layers with low or negligible resistivity.

8.2.3.3 Horizontally buried conductor (strip or conductor electrodes)

The earth electrode resistance (R) realized with a horizontally buried conductor may be
approximated from the formula:
𝜌
𝑅=2
𝐿
where ρ is the resistivity of the soil (in Ωm) and L is the length of the horizontally buried
conductor in soil (in m).

It should be noted that the laying of conductor with a sinuous path in the soil does not noticeably
improve the resistance of the earth electrode.

In practice, these conductors are laid down in two different ways:

 a) foundation earth electrode of the building: these earth electrodes are made of a
foundation loop around the whole perimeter of the building. The length to be considered
is the building perimeter,
b) horizontal in buried trenches: conductors are buried at a depth of about 1 m in trenches
dug for this purpose.

Trenches should not be backfilled with stones, cinders or similar materials, but with earth liable
to retain moisture.

8.2.3.4 Metallic pillar as earth electrodes

Metallic pillars interconnected by a metallic structure and buried at a certain depth in the
ground, may be used as earth electrode.

The resistance (R) of a buried metallic pillar may be approximately calculated with the formula:

𝜌 3𝐿
𝑅 = 0.366 𝑙𝑜𝑔10
𝐿 𝑑
Where,
L is the buried length of the pillar (in m);
d is the diameter of the cylinder circumscribed to the pillar (in m);
ρ is the resistivity of the soil (in Ωm).

A set of interconnected pillars located around a building has a resistance of the same order as
that of a foundation earth electrode.

The eventual embedding of concrete does not prevent the use of pillars as earth electrodes and
does not appreciably modify the earth electrode resistance.

At power stations and large substations, it is often possible to secure an effective earth-electrode
by making use of the reinforcement in concrete piles. The earth strap should be bonded to a
minimum of four piles and all the piles between the bonds should be bonded together. Each set
of four piles should be connected to the main earthing-strap of the substation.

8.2.4 Soil-embedded earth electrodes

Earth electrode resistance depends on its dimensions, its shape and on the soil resistivity in
which it is embedded. This resistivity often varies from one place to another and in accordance
with depth.

Resistivity of a soil is expressed in Ωm: numerically, it is the resistance in Ω of a cylinder of

ground with a cross-sectional area of 1 m2 a length of 1 m.

The aspect of surface and vegetation may give some indication of the more or less favourable
characteristics of a soil for the implementation of an earth electrode. Where available results of
measurements on earth electrodes installed in similar soil provides a better indication.

Soil resistivity depends on its humidity and on its temperature, both of which vary throughout
the year. Humidity itself is influenced by the soil granulation and its porosity. In practice, the
soil resistivity increases when humidity decreases.
Ground layers where water streams may go across, as found close to rivers, are rarely
appropriate for the implementation of earth electrodes. In reality, these layers are composed of
stony ground, are very permeable and become easily waterlogged by water itself purified by
natural filtration and presenting high resistivity. Deep rods should be driven in order to reach
deeper soils that may have better conductivity.

Frost considerably increases soil resistivity, which may reach several thousands of Ωm in the
frozen layer. The thickness of this frozen layer may be 1 m or more in some areas.

Dryness also increases the soil resistivity. Drought effect can be found in some areas up to a
depth of 2 m. Resistivity values in such circumstances can be of the same order as those
occurring during times of frost.

8.2.5 Concrete Embedded Foundation Earth Electrodes

8.2.5.1 General

The foundation earth electrode is a conductive component embedded in the building foundation,
which is in contact with the earth and, via the main earthing busbar, connected to the electrical
installation of the building. Thus, the electrode is part of the electrical installation.

The foundation earth electrode serves to provide continuity with the earth in order to

a) permit protective measures to be taken with regard to the electrical installation,

b) conduct any earth fault or protective conductor currents to the earth without this causing
undue thermal, thermomechanical or electromechanical stresses or give rise to electric
shock, originating from such currents,
c) permit any functional requirements to be satisfied.

As defined above, foundation earth electrodes are electrodes embedded in concrete. If, for
structural reasons, a concrete foundation is to have an enhanced earthing contact resistance, the
electrode is to be installed in the surrounding ground and then termed “ring earth electrode”.

Concrete used for the foundations of buildings has a certain conductivity and generally a large
contact area with the soil. Therefore, bare metal electrodes completely embedded in concrete
can be used for earthing purposes, unless the concrete is isolated from the soil by use of a special
thermal insulation or other measures. Due to chemical and physical effects, metals embedded
in concrete to a depth of more than 5 cm are highly protected against corrosion, normally for
the whole life-time of the building.

Wherever possible, the conductive effects of the reinforcement of the building should also be
used.

The production of a concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode during the erection of the
building may be an economical solution to obtain a good earth electrode of long standing
because,

a) It does not necessitate additional excavation works,

b) It is erected at a depth which is normally free from negative influences resulting from
seasonal weather conditions,
c) It provides a good contact with the soil,
 d) It extends over practically all of the building’s foundation surface and results in the
minimum earth electrode impedance which can be obtained with this surface,
e) It provides an optimal earthing arrangement for lightning protection system purposes,
and
f) From the beginning of the erection of the building, it can be used as an earth electrode
for the electrical installation of the construction site.

Besides its earthing effect, the concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode provides a good
basis for the main protective bonding.

The following requirements and advice for the erection of a concrete-embedded foundation
earth electrode apply.

8.2.5.2 Other considerations regarding the use of concrete-embedded foundation earth

electrodes.

If the building foundation is to be completely protected with insulating measures against water
Example: using plastic sheets of more than 0.5 mm thickness (or against loss of energy by
thermal insulation), earthing using the foundation concrete is not viable. In such cases, the
positive effect of metal reinforcement for protective bonding may be used, and for earthing
purposes another earthing arrangement should be used, For Example: an additional concrete-
embedded foundation earth electrode below the isolated foundation, or an earthing arrangement
around the building or a soil-embedded foundation earth electrode.

8.2.5.3 Construction of concrete-embedded foundation earth electrodes

8.2.5.3.1 For concrete foundations without metal reinforcement, the concrete-embedded

foundation earth electrodes must be coordinated with the type and dimensions of the foundation.
One or more closed ring(s) or rectangles with dimensions up to 20 m and mutually connected
are preferred.

8.2.5.3.2 To avoid embedding of the electrodes in concrete at less than 5 cm depth, suitable
means for the distance of the electrode wiring above the ground should be used. If strips are
used as electrodes, they should be fixed set up on edge to avoid holes without concrete under
the strip. If reinforcement is present, the bonding should be fixed to it at intervals of not more
than 2 m. The connections should be made in accordance with 7.3.3.5. The use of keyed joints
should be avoided.

8.2.5.3.3 The concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode should have at least one terminal
lug for connection to the electrical system of the building, either leaving the concrete inside the
building to a suitable connection point (Example: to the MET) or ending at a special connection
clamp embedded in concrete of a wall at its surface. At the point of connection, the terminal lug
must be accessible for maintenance and measuring purposes.

For lightning protection and for buildings with special requirements concerning information
technology, more than one terminal lug of the foundation earth electrode, Example: for lightning
protection system down-conductors, may be needed.

For connections needed outside the foundation concrete going through the soil, corrosion
problems for steel wires need to be taken into account. For such connections, it is recommended
that they should enter the concrete within the building, or outside at a suitable level above
ground level.

8.2.5.3.4 For the minimum cross-sectional area of electrodes including terminal lugs, the values
mentioned in Table 26 apply. Connections must be soundly made and electrically satisfactory
(see 7.3.3.5).

8.2.5.3.5 Metal reinforcement of the foundations of the building may be used as an electrode
provided it is soundly connected according to 7.3.3.5. For welded connections the permission.

of the responsible person for the structural design and analysis of the construction of the
building is required. Connections made by a wrapped iron wire only are not suitable for
protection purposes but may be sufficient for EMC purposes for information technology.
Prestressed reinforcement must not be used as an electrode.

If welded grids made from wires of smaller diameter are used for the reinforcement, it is
possible to use them as electrodes provided, they are soundly connected at more than one
different point to the terminal lug or other parts of the electrode to provide at least the same
cross-sectional area as required in Table 26. The minimum diameter of the single wires of such
grids should be 5 mm with at least four connections between the terminal lug and the grid at
several points of each grid.

8.2.5.3.6 The wiring of the electrodes should not go over joints between different parts of larger
foundations. At such places, suitable malleable connectors should be installed outside the
concrete to provide the necessary electrical connections.

8.2.5.3.7 Concrete-embedded foundation earth electrodes of single foundations (Example: for

the construction of large halls) should be connected to other parts of the concrete-embedded
foundation earth electrode by using suitable earthing conductors. For embedding such
connections in the soil see clause 8.2.3.4.4.

8.2.5.4 Possible corrosion problems for other earthed installations outside concrete-embedded
foundation earth electrodes

Attention is drawn to the fact that ordinary steel (bare or hot-dip galvanized) embedded in
concrete results in an electrochemical potential equal to that of copper embedded in the soil.
Consequently, there is a danger of electrochemical corrosion occurring to other earthing
arrangements made from steel embedded in the soil near the foundation and being in connection
with a concrete-embedded foundation earth electrode. This effect can also be found with
reinforced foundations of large buildings.

Any steel electrode must not be installed directly from foundation concrete into the soil except
for electrodes made from stainless steel or otherwise well protected by suitable prefabricated
protection against humidity. Hot-dip galvanized covering or protection by painting or other
similar materials later on is not sufficient for such purposes. Additional earthing arrangements
around and near such buildings should be made from other than hot-dip galvanized steel so as
to provide a sufficient life-time for this part of the earthing arrangement.

8.2.5.5 Completion of concrete-embedded foundation earth electrodes

8.2.5.5.1 After preparing the electrodes and/or the connected reinforcement, but before the
concrete is poured, a survey and documented record of the arrangement should be made by a
skilled person. The documentation should contain a description, plans and photos and should
form a part of the whole documentation for the electrical installation (see IS732-6).

8.2.5.5.2 Concrete used for the foundation should be made from at least 240 kg cement per m 3
concrete. The concrete must have a suitable semi-liquid consistency to fill all holes below the
electrodes.

8.2.5.6 Consultation between electrical, architectural, structural and civil engineers are essential
in order to achieve the best result.

8.2.6 Selection of Materials for Earth-Electrodes

Although electrode material does not affect initial earth resistance, care should be taken to select
a material that is resistant to corrosion in the type of soil in which it will be used. The possibility
on damage to cables and other underground services and structural metalwork in the vicinity of
earth-electrode due to electrolytic action between dissimilar materials should not be overlooked
when the material for earth-electrodes is selected. Materials compatible with other metal
structures in the vicinity should be selected or other remedial action taken.

Uncoated buried copper is electro-positive to uncoated buried steel and when interconnected by
a current-carrying conductor, these metals form an electrochemical cell that can cause
accelerated corrosion. Aluminium or copper clad aluminium conductors should not be used for
final connection to earth electrode. Where a copper conductor is to be joined to Aluminium the
proper procedure for joining conductors of Aluminium to copper should be followed. The
connection of the earthing conductor to the earth electrode or other means of earthing should be
soundly made by the use of compound filled, encapsulated or substantial clamps of non-ferrous
metal. Where the earthing conductor is to be connected to the metal sheath and armoured of a
cable, the sheath and armour should be bonded together and the principal connection between
the cable and the earthing conductor should be to the metal sheath and should be plumbed.
Alternatively, if a clamp is used for this connection it should be so designed and installed as to
provide reliable connection without damage to the cable. Earthing and bonding clamp should
conform to relevant IS standards.

It may be essential to use materials of types other than those mentioned earlier in special
circumstances, when cathodically protected structures such as pipelines are encountered.

8.2.7 Installation of Earth Electrodes and Conductors

Typical example of installing vertically earth electrode, plate earth electrode, and combined
foundation earth electrode and potential grading ring earth electrode is shown in Figure 39 to
Figure 44.
Key
1 short upper-most driving rod.
2 earth lead-in conductor.
3 soil.
4 short driving rods.
5 driving steel dart.

NOTES

1 A continuous wire conductor is driven into the soil by means of short driving rods. The electrical continuity
of the earth electrode conductor is of great advantage; using this technique, no joints are introduced into the
earth electrode conductor. Short driving rod segments are also easy to handle.

2 The short upper-most driving rod can be removed.

3 The uppermost part of the earth lead-in conductor can have an insulating jacket.

FIGURE 39 EXAMPLE OF A VERTICAL DRIVEN ROD WITH EARTH LEAD IN

CONDUCTOR.

Key
1 extensible earth rod
2 rod coupling
3 soil
4 conductor to rod clamp
 5 earth lead-in conductor

Figure 40 Example of An Earthing Arrangement with A Vertical Driven Rod Type Electrode

Key
A. Vertical earth electrode (ref Table 26 and Table 27 for material and minimum sizes)

B. Backfill soil. (Earth Enhancement compound confirming to IS/IEC 62561-7 is

recommended only in locations where the soil resistivity is higher than 3000Ωm).
C. Joint/Connector/Exothermic Welding
D. Busbar with provisions for connection
E. Earthing conductor
F. Inspection Chamber with Lid / cover (Example: 300 mm * 300 mm) tested according to
IEC 62561 – 5
L. Length of the vertical electrode (Example: 2000 mm to 4000 mm)

All dimensions are in mm. The dimensions are shown as typical example.

Figure 41 Typical Arrangement of Vertical Earth Electrode Installed in Augured Hole.

Key
A. Plate Electrode (ref Table 26 for more information)
B. Backfill soil. (Earth Enhancement compound confirming to IS/IEC 62561-7 is
recommended only in locations where the soil resistivity is higher than 3000Ωm)
C. Joint/Connector/Exothermic Welding/Brazing
D. Earthing Conductor to electrode
E. Earthing Conductor from MET
F. Joint/Connector/Exothermic Welding
G. Busbar with provisions for connection.
H. Inspection Chamber with Lid / cover (Example: 300 mm * 300 mm) tested according to
IEC 62561-5

All dimensions are in mm. The dimensions are shown (L and W) as typical example. The L or
W can be between 600 mm to 1200 mm.

Figure 42 Typical Arrangement of Plate Earthing

Key
1 Floor surface 7 LPS down conductor
2 Highest ground water level 8 Foundation earth electrode
3 Waterproof foundation slab 9 Ring earth electrode
4 Insulator example: waterproof membrane 10 Pressure-water-tight wall bushing
(if applicable)
5 PCC layer 11 Equipotential busbar
6 Connection to the reinforcement 12 Provision to connect RCC
13 Steel reinforcement in concrete

Figure 43 Typical Arrangement of Foundation Earth Electrode

 Figure 44 Typical Arrangement of Potential Grading Ring Electrodes Around A Building.

8.2.7 Typical Method for Jointing of Conductors

All joints of protective conductors shall confirm 7.3.3.5 to 7.3.3.7.

Where vertical electrodes are installed, means may be provided to allow the inspection of the
connection and the replacement of the vertical rod.

8.2.8 Current Density at The Surface of An Earth Electrode

NOTE — This clause may be useful for HV system (Example: HVDC MONOPOLR System) for continuous
loading or HV substations for fault currents (see IS 17860). For LV 8.2.8.4 applies.

8.2.8.1 An earth electrode should be designed to have a loading capacity adequate for the system
of which it forms a part, that is, it should be capable of dissipating without failure the energy in
the earth path at the point at which it is installed under any condition of operation on the system.
Failure is fundamentally due to excessive temperature rise at the surface of the electrode and is
thus a function of current density and duration as well as electrical and thermal properties of the
soil.

In general, soils have a negative temperature coefficient of resistance so that sustained current
loading results in an initial decrease in electrode resistance and a consequent rise in the earth
fault current for a given applied voltage. As soil moisture is driven away from the soil-electrode
interface, however, the resistance increases and will ultimately become infinite if the
temperature-rise is sufficient.

8.2.8.2 Three conditions of operation require consideration, that is, long-duration loading as
with normal system operation; short-time overloading as under fault conditions in directly
earthed systems.

8.2.8.3 The little experimental work which has been done on this subject by experts at the
international level has been confined to model tests with spherical electrodes in clay or loam of
low resistivity and has led to the following conclusions:

a) Long-duration loading shall be made as per IS 17860.

b) Time to failure on short-time overload is inversely proportional to the specific loading,
which is given by i2, where i is the current density at the electrode surface. For the
soils investigated, the maximum permissible current density, i is given by:

7.57 × 103
𝑖= 𝐴/𝑚2
√𝜌𝑡

where
t = duration of the earth fault (in s); and
ρ = resistivity of the soil (in Ω.m).

Experience indicates that this formula is appropriate for plate electrodes, hence shall not be used
for other forms of earth electrodes. Further information for other forms of earth electrodes are
under consideration.
The amount of fault current dissipated through earth electrode depends on the availability of
metallic fault return current (Example: armouring of cable, shield wire in transmission lines).
The current will be low in High Voltage systems where there is a metallic fault return path.

8.2.8.4 For Low Voltage application the following apply,

a) In TN-S system the above calculation is not required as majority of the fault current
returns through protective conductor.
b) In TT system, the amount of fault current will be of the order for few amps to few
100 amps, hence this calculation is not required.

9 EARTHING OFGENERATING PLANTS

9.1 LV Portable Generators

9.1.1 Unearthed Generating Sets (Rating Below 10 kW)

Small single-phase generators are run as floating systems, that is without the winding connected
to the frame or to earth (see Figure 45). The generator frame and enclosure should be bonded
to all exposed conductive parts of the load equipment, using a correctly terminated protective
conductor in the connecting cable.

Key
1 Unearthed Generator
2 Plug and Socket
3 Appliance

NOTES

1 Low-voltage, single phase generating sets are generally mobile or transportable machines ranging in size
from 0.2 kW to 10 kW.

2 Winding connection are normally brought out to a socket-outlet in which the third or protective conductor
is connected to the generator enclosure.

Figure 45 Small Low Voltage Single Phase Generator Run as A Floating System

Cables, plugs, socket-outlets and cable couplers should be suitable for their environmental
exposure. Cables should be a flexible type which includes a metallic braid, screen or armour
suitable for use as a protective conductor.

If a cable without a metallic screen is used, it should be flexible with an extruded over sheath,
capable of high abrasion resistance and should contain a separate protective conductor. Cables,
plugs, socket-outlets should be inspected frequently and if defective should be replaced, not
repaired; equipment and cables that are in good condition are vital for the continued safety of
an unearthed system and form the first line of protection against the risk of shock.

All cables should be as short as practicable and supply compactly located loads, since
experience has shown that a compact installation is less likely to suffer insulation damage,
causing earth faults, than an extensive one.

It should be noted that RCDs will not operate on a first fault and only on particular second
faults.

9.1.2 Earthed Generators (Rating Below 10 kW) Supplying a Fixed Installation

Where an earthed generator is to supply a fixed installation (see Figure 46) it is recommended
that automatic disconnection of supply is adopted as follows:

a) One pole of a single phase generator should be connected to the installation MET.
b) The MET should be connected to an earthing arrangement or earth electrode.
c) The installation should conform to standards with all exposed-conductive parts and all
extraneous-conductive-parts connected to the MET.
d) The installation should be protected by RCDs.

The RCD will not provide protection for faults on the generator side of the RCD, and
consequently precautions should be taken.

Key
1 — Unearthed Generator 3 — Isolator
2 — Electrical Installation 4 — Main Earth Terminal

Figure 46 Small LV Generator Supplying A Fixed Installation

9.1.3 Earthed Generators Supplying a Mobile or Transportable Unit

Where an earthed generator is to supply a mobile installation (see Figure 47 and Figure 48), it
is recommended that the protective measure automatic disconnection of supply be adopted as
follows.

a) One pole of a single phase generator should be connected to the installation MET.
b) The installation should conform to standards with all exposed-conductive parts and all
extraneous-conductive-parts connected to the MET.
c) The installation should be protected by RCDs.
 d) If the unit supplies equipment or socket outlets outside the unit these circuits should be
protected by RCDs with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30 mA.

If practicable, an earth electrode should be connected to the MET of the unit. The RCD will not
provide protection for faults on the generator side of the RCD, and consequently precautions
should be taken.

Key
1 — Unearthed Generator 3 — Isolator
2 — Mobile Unit

Figure 47 Small Unearthed Generator Supplying A Mobile or Transportable Unit

Key
2 Main Earthing Terminal (MET)
3 Metallic frame of enclosure of the unit

Figure 48 Example of Earth Connection to The Chassis

Where a supply is taken from a mobile generator, the following recommendations, shall apply:

a) The generator neutral should be connected to the vehicle chassis.

b) The earth terminal at each outlet on the generator vehicle should be connected separately
to the alternator neutral where the latter is bonded to the vehicle chassis. and
c) Where a protective earth terminal or exposed structural metalwork is present, it should
be connected to the earthing conductor on the mobile generator.

9.2 Standby Generating Plants (Including Portable and Mobile Generators).

9.2.1 General
 NOTE — The contents of this clause are related to Synchronous Machines only. Other kind of Generating
stations such as SOLAR PV, Wind etc, are included in Annex A.

The earthing of standby and other private generating plant is necessary to protect against
indirect contact that may result in electric shock. The objective is to create a equipotential
bonding zone in which voltage between exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive
parts are minimized in the event of an earth fault.

In this clause the requirement is met by connecting the generating set frame(s), metallic cable
sheaths and armouring, and all exposed conductive parts to an earthing arrangement, and by
connecting the electric system (Neutral of the Generator) to the same earthing arrangement
(normally at one point only).

Except in some special applications, there is, in every case, need for an independent earth
electrode (no 5020 – Chassis earth) for energy source earthing at the premises (Suppliers’
protective earth terminal at the premises should also be connected to the independent earth
electrode).

There are many variations in system design and for any particular application, the precise
method of energy source earthing is subject to the recommendations of the machine
manufacturers (based on this code), the system parameters and, where mains supplies are also
involved, the agreement of the concerned supply authority.

It may, however, be noted that the guidance included in this clause, applies to shock protection
as well as protection of equipment.

9.2.2 Low Voltage (Up to 1000 V) Generators

9.2.2.1 Single low voltage generator

9.2.2.1.1 Generator operating in isolation (from the mains or other supplies)

In this basic arrangement, the generator neutral point should be connected through a bolted link
(for test purpose) to an earthing arrangement (See Figure 49 without incoming LV discom
supply).

9.2.2.1.2 Standby generator (without paralleling facility)

In addition to the earthing requirements stated for a generator operating in isolation from other
supplies, special attention needs to be given to the change-over arrangement for standby set,
which has to ensure that there can be no inadvertent parallel connection (see Figure 49).

In general, four-pole changeover switching between the mains and standby, supplies should be
used to provide isolation of the generator and electricity board neutral earths. However, in the
case of a low voltage TN-C-S supply with protective multiple earthing (PME), three-or four-
pole switching may be used.
 NOTES

1 Cable sheath as protective earth shown in the figure. See 7.3.6 for actual use;
2 PE to N link of incoming supply shown considering TN-C-S with PME;
3 Changeover switch could be 3-pole with linked neutral considering TN-C-S with PME. Four-pole in
other cases.

Figure 49 Single Low Voltage Standby Generator (Without Paralleling Facility)

9.2.2.1.3 Standby generator (capable of parallel operation with incoming mains supply)

DISCOM’s will not generally permit continuous parallel operation of a synchronous machine
with the low voltage mains supply, unless there are no other consumers on the network.
However, short-term parallel operation for no-break load transfer or testing may be permitted.
Also, if a synchronous machine output is rectified and connected through mains modulated
static inverter continuous parallel operation will usually be permitted. In the latter case, the
generator neutral terminal should be connected to the earthing arrangement with independent
earth electrode and to any Discom earthed or earthed neutral conductor.

9.2.2.2 Multiple low voltage generator

9.2.2.2.1 Generator

When low voltage generating sets are operated in parallel, the electric source earthing method
is influenced by the magnitude of the circulating currents, particularly third harmonic, which
can arise when generators are connected as four-wire machines. If the magnitude of the
circulating current due to the nature of the load or the design of the generators is excessive when
the neutrals are connected, then a neutral earthing transformer or star-point earthing switches
are required.

In the case of an inappropriate design of an installation forming part of a TN system with more
than one source some of the operating current can flow through unintended paths. These
currents can cause

a) Fire.
 b) Corrosion.
c) electromagnetic interference

Hence, three alternative neutral earthing arrangements are possible for parallel operation as
follows:

a) All generator neutrals connected — With this arrangement, the neutral busbar in the
main low voltage switchgear (Main Distribution board) is connected through a bolted
link to an earthing arrangement.

b) Neutral earthing transformer — By providing a neutral earthing transformer solidly

connected to the busbars, the system neutral can remain earthed at all times whilst any
number of generators can be connected to the busbars as three-wire machines.

c) Generator star point switching — When this arrangement is adopted, it is necessary

before the first generator is started for its star-point/neutral earthing switch to be closed.
When subsequent sets are started, their star-point earthing switches remain open. This
avoids the circulating current problem, but it is essential that electrical and mechanical
interlocks on the starpoint/earth switches ensure the integrity of the energy source
neutral earth connection at all times and under all possible operating conditions.

9.2.2.2.2 Standby generators (without mains paralleling facility)

The alternative neutral earthing arrangements for standby generators are as set out in 9.2.2.2.1
for generators operated in isolation from an electricity board supply. The earthing arrangements
are shown in the following drawings:

a) All generator neutrals connected (see Figure50).

b) Neutral earthing transformer (see Figure 51). and
c) Alternator star-point switching (see Figure 52).

For standby generators with no mains paralleling facility, the changeover arrangement has to
prevent inadvertent connection of the generator outputs and DISCOM supply.

In general, four-pole changeover switching between the DISCOM supply and the standby
supply should be used to provide isolation of the neutral. However, in the case of a low voltage
TN-C-S supply with protective multiple earthing (PME), three-or four-pole switching may be
used.

9.2.2.2.3 Standby generators (capable of parallel operation with the incoming mains supply)
The conditions for which parallel operation of multiple generating set installations with the
mains supply may be permitted by the DISCOM are the same as apply for single generators
(see 9.2.2.1.3).

9.2.2.3 Single and multiple generator earthing (synchronous machines)

The parallel operation of synchronous machines is generally permitted; such machines are
normally provided where the prime mover is driven by wind, water or biochemical plant, but
may be provided with any prime mover. Any neutral point of such machine windings should be
earthed, but the machine framework and any other extraneous metalwork should be connected
to the DISCOMS earth terminal, if provided.
NOTES

1 Cable sheath as protective earth of incoming supply shown in the figure. See 7.3.6 for actual use.
2 PE to N link of incoming supply shown considering TN-C-S with PME
3 Changeover switch could be 3-pole with linked neutral.

Figure 50 Low Voltage Standby Generators with Neutrals Connected

NOTES

1 Cable sheath as protective earth of incoming supply shown in the figure. See 7.3.6 for actual use.
2 PE to N link of incoming supply shown considering TN-C-S with PME
 3 If a bus section switch is installed a neutral earthing transformer will be required on each section of
busbar.

Figure 51 Low Voltage Standby Generators with Neutral Earthing Transformers

NOTES

1 Cable sheath as protective earth of incoming supply shown in the figure. See 7.3.6 for actual use.
2 PE to N link of incoming supply shown considering TN-C-S with PME
3 Mechanical interlock to ensure that energy source neutral it always earthed but at one point only.

Figure 52 Low Voltage Standby Generators with Star Point Switching

9.3 Generators with Voltage Exceeding 1 KV a.c.

9.3.1 Earthing Resistors

Where a resistor is used for earthing the star-point of a high voltage generator, it is normally
designed to limit the earth fault current to the same order of magnitude as the machine’s full
load current.

9.3.2 Single High Voltage Generator Earthing (Synchronous Machines with Star Connected
Alternators)

9.3.2.1 Generator operating in isolation (from mains or other suppliers)

The star-point of the generator should be connected (via a resistor, if necessary) and through a
bolted link for test purposes to an earthing arrangement.

9.3.2.2 Standby generator (without paralleling facility)

In addition to the earthing requirements described for a set operating in isolation from other
supplies, the presence of an incoming DISCOM supply makes necessary the interlocking of the
standby supply circuit breakers to prevent inadvertent connection (see Figure 53).
 Figure 53 Single High Voltage Standby Generating Set Not Suitable for Parallel Operation

9.3.2.3 Standby generator (capable of parallel operation with an incoming supply)

The operation of a private generator (or generators) in parallel with an DISCOM high voltage
system is subject to the technical agreement with the DISCOM.

In most cases where parallel operation with an incoming DISCOM supply is required, a
disconnector is necessary between the generator star-point and the bolted test link (see Figure
54). The disconnector should be interlocked with the incoming supply circuit breaker so that it
is open during periods of parallel operation but closes at all times. In the event of the DISCOM
supply being lost during a period of parallel operation, the earthing contactor should be arranged
to close automatically. The form of generator earthing (direct or resistance) is dependent upon
the system parameters and the machine manufacturer’s recommendations.

Figure 54 Single High Voltage Standby Generating Set Suitable for Parallel Operation with
Incoming Mains Supply

9.3.3 Multiple High Voltage Generator Earthing

9.3.3.1 Generators operating in isolation from other supplies

When it is required to operate two or more generators in parallel and the method of electric
supply system earthing is direct or resistance earthing, then earthing contactors should be
installed between each generator star-point and the earthing arrangement. The contactors need
to be interlocked so that only one can be closed to maintain a single energy source earth.

If a neutral earthing transformer is to be used for electric supply system earthing, it should be
connected as shown in Figure 55 except that in the case of an isolated generating system, the
earthing contactors is not required.
 NOTE — Earthing contactor interlocked so that the contactor cannot be closed during parallel operation with
the incoming mains supply.

Figure 55 Multiple High Voltage Standby Generating Sets with Neutral Earthing Transformer
Suitable for Parallel Operation with Each Other and with The Incoming Mains Supply

9.3.3.2 Standby generators (without mains parallel facility)

When the generating sets are not to be operated in parallel with the mains supply, and have
direct or resistance earthing, the standby generator circuit-breakers and mains circuit-breaker
need to be interlocked.

If a neutral earthing transformer is used the requirements are the same as described for a single
standby generator in 9.3.2.2; as shown in Figure 56, but without the earthing contactor.

9.3.3.3 Standby generators (capable of parallel operation with an incoming main supply)

When the generating sets have direct or resistance earthing and are used as standby to the
mains, earthing contactors are needed if parallel running is a requirement. These should be
interlocked with the incoming mains supply circuit-breaker so that they are open during
parallel operation of the set with the mains, but one is closed at all other times (see Figure 54).
Figure 56 Multiple High Voltage Standby Generating Sets Suitable for Parallel Operation with
Each Other and with The Incoming Mains Supply
10 EARTHING IN POWER STATIONS AND SUBSTATIONS

10.1 General

In general earthing installations will be required at power stations and substations for:

a) The neutral points of each separate electricity system which has to be earthed at the
power station or substation;
b) Apparatus framework or cladding or other non-current carrying metalwork associated
with each system, for example, transformer tanks, instrument transformer tank, surge
arresters, power cable sheaths; and
c) Extraneous metalwork not associated with the power systems, for example boundary
fences, mast, sheaths of control or communication cables.

In all cases, the safety measures mentioned in IS/IEC 61936-1 for a.c. system and IS/IEC 61936-
2 for d.c. system shall be achieved.

For safety, the objective of earthing is to ensure that, in normal or abnormal conditions, any
voltage appearing on equipment to which there is access should be below a dangerous level. It
is not practicable to ensure that metal parts are earthed and remain near true earth potential
during the passage of earth fault currents, particularly on high voltage systems with directly
earthed neutrals. The objective should, therefore, be to provide effective bonding of low
impedance and adequate current-carrying capacity between parts with which anyone may be in
simultaneous contact, and to arrange, as far as possible, that large fault currents do not flow
between such points.

10.2 FUNDAMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

10.2.1 Safety Criteria

The hazard to human beings is that a current will flow through the region of the heart which is
sufficient to cause ventricular fibrillation. The current limit, for power-frequency purposes is
derived from the appropriate curve in IS/IEC 60479-1. This body current limit is translated into
voltage limits for comparison with the calculated step and touch voltages taking into account
the following factors:

a) proportion of current flowing through the region of the heart;

b) body impedance along the current path;
c) resistance between the body contact points and, for example, metal structure to hand
including glove, feet to remote ground including shoes or gravel;
d) fault duration.

It shall also be recognized that fault occurrence, fault current magnitude, fault duration and
presence of human beings are probabilistic in nature.

The earthing design parameters (relevant fundamental requirements, Example: fault current,
fault duration) shall be agreed between the supplier and user.

For electrical power installation design, the curve shown in Figure 5 is calculated according to
the method defined in 5.2.
NOTES

The curve is based on data extracted from IS/IEC 60479-1 as below:

1 body impedance from Table 1 of IS/IEC 60479-1, (not exceeded by 50 percent of the population);

2 permissible body current corresponding to the c2 curve in Figure 20 and Table 11 of IS/IEC 60479-1
(probability of ventricular fibrillation is less than 5 percent);

3 heart-current factor according to Table 12 of IS/IEC 60479-1.

The curve in Figure 5, which gives the permissible touch voltage, and the conditions in 5.2.4
shall be used.

As a general rule, meeting the touch voltage requirements satisfies the step voltage
requirements, because the tolerable step voltage limits are much higher than touch voltage limits
due to the different current path through the body.

For electrical power installations where high-voltage electrical equipment is not located in
closed electrical operating areas, Example in an industrial environment, a global earthing
system should be applied to prevent intolerable touch voltages.

10.2.2 Functional requirements

The earthing system, its components and bonding conductors shall be capable of distributing
and discharging the fault current without exceeding thermal and mechanical design limits based
on backup protection operating time.

The earthing system shall maintain its integrity for the expected electrical power installation
lifetime with due allowance for corrosion and mechanical constraints.

Earthing system performance shall avoid damage to equipment due to excessive potential rise,
potential differences within the earthing system and due to excessive currents flowing in
auxiliary paths not intended for carrying parts of the fault current.

The earthing system, in combination with appropriate measures (Example: potential control,
local isolation) shall maintain step, touch and transferred potentials within the voltage limits
based on normal operating time of protection relays and breakers.

The earthing system performance shall contribute to ensuring electromagnetic compatibility

(EMC) among electrical and electronic apparatus of the high-voltage system in accordance with
IEC TR 61000-5-2.

10.2.3 High and Low Voltage Earthing Systems

10.2.3.1 General

Where high- and low-voltage earthing systems exist in proximity to each other and do not form
a global earthing system, part of the EPR from the HV system can be applied on the LV system.
Two practices are presently used:

a) interconnection of all HV with LV earthing systems.

b) separation of HV from LV earthing systems.
In either case, the relevant requirements concerning step, touch and transfer potentials specified
below shall be complied with within a substation and at an LV installation supplied from that
substation.

Interconnection is preferred when practicable.

10.2.3.2 LV supply only within an electrical power installation

Where the LV system is totally confined within the area covered by the HV earthing system,
both earthing systems shall be interconnected even if there is no global earthing system.

10.2.3.3 LV supply incoming to or outgoing from an electrical power installation

Full compliance is ensured if the earthing system of the electrical power installation is part of a
global earthing system or connected to a multi-earthed HV neutral conductor in a balanced
system. If there is no global earthing system, the minimum requirements of Table 28 shall be
used to identify those situations where interconnection of earthing systems with low-voltage
supply outside the high-voltage installation is feasible.

If high-voltage and low-voltage earthing systems are separate, the method of separating earth
electrodes shall be chosen such that no danger to persons or electrical equipment can occur in
the low-voltage installation. This means that step, touch and transfer potentials and stress
voltage in the LV installation caused by a high-voltage fault are within the appropriate limits.

10.2.3.4 LV in the proximity of an electrical power installation

Special consideration shall be given to LV systems which are located in the zone of influence
of the earthing system of the electrical power installation.

For industrial and commercial installations, a common earthing system can be used. Due to the
close proximity of equipment, it is not possible to separate earthing systems.

Table 28 EPR Limits and Minimum Requirements for Interconnection of Low-Voltage and
High-Voltage Earthing Systems Based on EPR Limits

EPR requirements

SI Stress voltage b
Type of LV system a
No. Touch voltage Fault
Fault duration
duration
tf ≤ 5 s
tf > 5 s
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) TT Not applicable EPR ≤ 1200 V EPR ≤ 250 V
ii) TN EPR ≤ F × UTp c, d EPR ≤ 1200 V EPR ≤ 250 V
iii) Distributed protective
IT As per TN system
earthing conductor EPR ≤ 1200 V EPR ≤ 250 V
 iv) Protective earthing
conductor not Not applicable
distributed EPR ≤ 1200 V EPR ≤ 250 V
a
For telecommunication equipment, the ITU recommendations should be used.
b Limit may be increased if appropriate LV equipment is installed or EPR may be
replaced by local potential differences based on measurements or calculations.
c
The typical value for F is 2, indicating the touch voltage is 50 percent of EPR.
Higher values of F (up to 5) may be applied where there are additional connections
of the PEN conductor to earth which therefore may reduce the touch voltage as a
percentage of EPR. For certain soil structures, caution is necessary in soils with high
contrast of top layer resistivity and underlying lower resistivity. In this case F is
closer to 1 as the touch voltage can exceed 50 percent of the EPR. If the PEN or
neutral conductor of the low-voltage system is connected to earth only at the HV
earthing system, the value of F shall be 1.
d
UTp is derived from Figure 5.

10.2.4 Global Earthing System

NOTE — See 5.2 and Figure 5 for limits of tolerable touch voltage.

Global earthing system is the equivalent earthing system created by the interconnection of local
earthing systems that ensures, by the proximity of the earthing systems, that there are no
dangerous touch voltages.

Such systems permit the division of the earth fault current in a way that results in a reduction
of the earth potential rise at the local earthing system. Such a system could be said to form a
quasi-equipotential surface.

The existence of a global earthing system may be determined by sample measurements or

calculation for typical systems.

Typical cases where a global earthing system exists could be:

a) substation is surrounded by buildings with foundation earth electrodes and the earthing
systems are interconnected example: by cable sheath, low voltage protective earthing
conductors or PEN conductors.
b) substation is feeding city centre or densely built-up areas.
c) substation is feeding area with many distributed earth electrodes interconnected by
protective earthing conductors or PEN conductors of low voltage system.
d) substation with given number of nearby substations.
e) substation with given number and length of outgoing earth electrodes.
f) substation connected via cables with earth electrode effect.
g) substation is feeding extended industrial area.
h) substations are part of system with multi earthed high voltage neutral conductor.

An earthing system design flow chart is included in Figure 63.

10.2.5 Earth Fault Current Under Different Conditions of Neutral Earthing.

 𝐼𝐹 = 3𝐼0 + 𝐼𝑁 1 For equal earth wire tower
𝑍𝐸 =
𝐼𝐸 = 𝑟𝐸 × (𝐼𝐹 − 𝐼𝑁 ) 1 1 footing impedances of the
𝑅𝐸𝑆 + 𝑛 𝑍∞ overhead lines
𝑈𝐸 = 𝐼𝐸 × 𝑍𝐸
Key
3 I0 Three times zero sequence current of the line
IN Current via neutral earthing of the transformer
IF Earth fault current
IE Current to earth (cannot be measured directly)
IRS Current via the resistance to earth of the mesh earth electrode
rE Reduction factor of the overhead line
RES, RESx Resistance to earth of the mesh earth electrode
RET Resistance to earth of the tower
Z∞ Chain impedance (several number of towers with resistance to earth, RET)
represents a value of the overhead line assumed to be infinite
ZE Impedance to earth
UE Earth potential rise
n Number of overhead lines leaving the substation (here: n = 2)
Figure 57 Example for Currents, Voltages and Resistances for an Earth Fault in a Transformer
Substation with Low Impedance Neutral Earthing

𝐼𝐹 = 𝐼𝐶
Key
IF Earth fault current
IC Capacitive earth fault current (complex value, including ohmic component)
Note IC may include ohmic component.
Figure 58 Earth Fault Current in A System with Isolated Neutral

|𝐼𝐹 | = |𝐼𝑅𝐸𝑆 | = √|𝐼𝑐 + 𝐼𝐿 |2 + |𝐼𝐻 |2

Key
IF Earth fault current
IC Capacitive earth fault current (complex value, including ohmic component)
IL Sum of the currents of the parallel arc-suppression coils (complex value,
including ohmic component)
IH Harmonic current (different frequencies)
IRES Earth fault residual current
NOTE — IR is the ohmic part of the complex value of (IC + IL).
Figure 59 Earth Fault Current in a System with Resonant Earthing
 𝐼𝐹 = 𝐼𝑘′′1
Key
IF Earth fault current
I”k1 Initial symmetrical short-circuit current for a line-to-earth short circuit
Note If IC is in the same order as I”k1 this current shall be considered additionally.
Figure 60 Earth Fault Current in A System with Low Impedance Neutral Earthing

𝐼𝐹 = 𝐼𝑅𝐸𝑆 after a short time I’’k1

Key
IF Earth fault current
IRES Earth fault residual current
I”k1 Initial symmetrical short-circuit current for a line-to-earth short circuit
Figure 61 Earth Fault Current in A System with Resonant Earthing and Temporary Low
Impedance Neutral Earthing
 𝐼𝐹 = 𝐼′′𝑘𝐸𝐸
Key
IF Earth fault current
I’’kEE Double earth fault current

Figure 62 Double Earth Fault Current in A System with Isolated Neutral or Resonant Earthing

10.3 Design of Earthing Systems

Design of an earthing system can be accomplished as follows. A flowchart with detailed

explanation of design process is given in Figure 63.

a) data collection, Example: earth fault current, fault duration and layout.
b) initial design of the earthing system based on the functional requirements (see 10.2.2).
c) determine if it is part of a global earthing system.
d) if not, determine soil characteristics Example: of layers with different specific electric
resistivity of soil and create an earth grid layout.
e) determine the current flowing into earth (IE) from the earthing system, based on earth
fault current (IF).
f) determine the overall impedance to earth, based on the layout, soil characteristics, and
parallel earthing systems.
g) determine earth potential rise, UE, (see Figure 1 and 10.5.2).
h) determine the permissible touch voltage value from Figure 5 for the relevant fault
duration.
j) if the earth potential rise is below the permissible touch voltage and the requirements of
Table 28 are met, the design is complete.
k) if not, determine if touch voltages inside and in the vicinity of the earthing system are
below the tolerable limits.

NOTE — The touch voltage UT may be lesser than UE at a distance of 1 meter from the conductive part.

l) Additional safety measures (ASM) may be considered (see table 30) at this stage and
follow Figure 63.
 m) determine if transferred potentials present a hazard outside or inside the electrical power
installation; if yes, proceed with mitigation at exposed location.
n) determine if low-voltage equipment is exposed to excessive stress voltage; if yes,
proceed with mitigation measures which can include separation of HV and LV earthing
systems.

Table 28 shall be taken into account regarding transferred potentials to low voltage systems.

Once the above criteria have been met, the design can be refined, if necessary, by repeating the
above steps. Detailed design is necessary to ensure that all exposed-conductive-parts, are
earthed. Extraneous-conductive-parts shall be earthed, if appropriate.

A structural earth electrode, if any, shall be bonded and form part of the earthing system. If not
bonded, verification is necessary to ensure that all safety requirements are met.

Metallic structures with cathodic protection may be separated from the earthing system.
Precautions, such as labelling, shall be taken to ensure that when such measures are taken,
maintenance work or modifications will not inadvertently nullify them.
 Data Collection
Note 1
(If, IE, tf, layout)

Initial Design
(Functional Requirements)

Global Earthing System YES

Design Complete Note 2

NO

Determination of soil characteristics

(e.g. layers with different specific
electric resistivity of soil)
Note 3, Note 4
Earth Grid Layout

Determination of IF and IE, Z E

Calculate U E

Determination of U Tp Note 5

YES
U E < U Tp Design Complete Note 6

NO
Improvement of design

Apply ASM
AND / OR
Additional resistance Note 7, Note 8
(e.g. hand, foot and surface gravel
resistances)

Determination of: U T
OR Note 9, Note 10, Note 11, Note 12
Determination of : U vT & U vTp

NO Determination of
Note 13
Step Potential

YES

Determination of
NO transferred potential &
Note 14, Note 15
Stress Voltage to LV (if
applicable)

YES

U T < U Tp
NO YES Note 10,
OR Design Complete
U vT < U vTp Note 12

Key
1. Layout of all conductive parts in soil or embedded in concrete including building
foundation, earth grid of substation metallic pipes, and other metallic installations in in
the vicinity of the plant like metallic pipes, rails, etc, (see 10.2.4).
2. See Clause 10.5.2 Validate by measurements of ZE, UE to ensure the existence of global
earthing, say, UE < 80V. Measurement of Step voltage, and transferred potential are not
required.
3. See table 29 for more details on IE.
4. See 10.5.1 for more details on ZE.
5. UTp can be taken from Figure 5 or calculate from 5.2.1 based on the disconnection time.
6. Calculate UT. Validate UT and transferred potential. (See Figure88, Clause 10.5.2, and
Clause 13.4.3).
7. Additional safety measures see 10.6.
8. People with PPE’s considered for calculation (gloves, shoes etc) are only allowed in
such locations.
9. UT is to be validated by measurement (see 13.5, Figure 97), considering UT inside and
in the vicinity of the earthing system.
10. UT and UvT is to be validated by measurement (see 13.5, Figure 97 and Figure 98)
11. The touch voltage UT may be lesser than UE at a distance of 1 meter from the conductive
part.
12. UvTp can be calculated considering the additional resistance of PPE’s (see 5.2.2)
13. See 5.2.4
14. Ref Figure 5 for touch voltage due to transfer potential and Table 28 for limits of Earth
potential rise.
15. Transferred potentials are always to be determined separately.

Figure 63 An Earthing System Design Flow Chart for Voltage Exceeding 1 KV A.C.
10.4 Safety Measures to Observance the Permissible Touch Voltages

10.4.1 Permissible Touch Voltage

Application of the fundamental requirements will give the basic design of the earthing system.
This design shall be checked with respect to touch voltages and could then be considered as a
typical design for similar situations.

Alternatively, any type of designs may be used that ensures the requirements in 5.2.1 are fully
met.

Transferred potentials are always to be determined separately.

This also applies to earthing systems, which are conductively connected to the relevant earthing
system via sheaths or screens of cables, PEN-conductors or in another way.

Table 29 Relevant Currents for the Design of Earthing Systems

Relevant for thermal

loading a e Relevant for earth
SI
Type of high voltage system potential rise and
No. Earth Earthing touch voltages
electrode conductor
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Systems with isolated neutral
ii) I”kEE I”kEE IE= r . ICb
iii) System with resonant earthing
Includes short time earthing for detection
iv) Substations without arc-suppression I”kEE I”kEE
coils f IE = r . IRESb
v) Substations with arc-suppression coils I”kEE I”kEE c 𝐼𝐸
𝑏ℎ
=𝑟 √𝐼𝐿2 + 2
𝐼𝑅𝑒𝑠

vi) Systems with low-impedance neutral earthing

Includes short time earthing for tripping g
vii) Substation without neutral earthing I”k1 I”k1 IE = r . I”k1
viii) Substation with neutral earthing I”k1 I”k1 IE = r . (K"k1 - IN) d
Key,
IC Calculated or measured capacitive earth fault current.
IRES Earth fault residual current.
If the exact value is not available, 10 percentage of IC may be assumed.
IL Sum of the rated currents of the parallel arc-suppression coils in the relevant
substation.
 I”kEE Double earth fault current calculated in accordance with the IS 13234.
For I”kEE 85 percentage of the initial symmetrical short-circuit current may be
used as a maximum value.
I”k1 Initial symmetrical short-circuit current for a line-to-earth short-circuit,
calculated in accordance with the IS 13234.
IE Current to earth.
IN Current via neutral earthing of the transformer.
r Reduction factor (see IS13234-3 clause 7 and 8).
If the lines and cables leaving the substation have different reduction factors, the
relevant current shall be determined.
a
If several current paths are possible a split up may be considered.
b
If there is no automatic disconnection of earth faults, the need to consider
double earth faults depends on operational experience.
c
The earthing conductor of the Petersen coil shall be sized according to the
maximum coil current.
d
It shall be checked if external fault may be decisive.
e
The minimum cross-sections of Annex C are to be considered.
f
In case of not well compensated system the general approach of 10 percent IC
cannot be applied. The reactive/capacitive component of residual current shall
be considered additionally.
g
Short-term earthing of system with resonant earthing starts automatically within
5 s after earth fault detection.
h
In case of a fault in the substation the capacitive earth fault current IC shall be
considered. In case of further coils external to the substation they may be
considered

10.4.2 Power System Faults

The objective is to determine the worst case fault scenario for every relevant aspect of the
functional requirements, as these may differ. The following types of fault shall be examined at
each voltage level present in the electrical power installation:

a) three phases to earth.

b) two phases to earth.
c) single phase to earth.
d) if applicable: phase to phase via earth (cross-country earth fault).

Faults within and outside the electrical power installation site shall be examined to determine
the worst fault location.

10.4.3 Lightning and Transient Overvoltage

Lightning and switching operations are sources of high- and low-frequency currents and
voltages. Surges typically occur when switching long cable sections, operating GIS
disconnectors or carrying out back-to-back capacitor switching. Successful attenuation requires
sufficient electrode density at injection points to the earthing system to deal with high-frequency
currents, together with an earthing system of sufficient extent to deal with low-frequency
currents. The HV earthing system shall form part of the lightning protection system and
additional earthing conductors may be required at connection points between the lightning
protection system and the earthing system.

Relevant electromagnetic compatibility and lightning standards shall be used to address specific
aspects related to the transient performance of the earthing system and its components.

When an industrial or commercial electrical power installation includes more than one building
or location, the earthing system of each shall be interconnected. Since during surges such as
lightning strokes, there will be a large difference in potential between the earthing systems of
each building and location in spite of the interconnection, measures shall be taken to prevent
damage to sensitive electrical equipment connected between different buildings or locations.
Where possible, non-metallic media, such as fibre optic cable, should be used for the exchange
of low-level signals between such locations.

10.4.4 Construction Work on Earthing Systems

Where construction work involves an existing earthing system, protective measures shall be
taken to ensure the safety of persons during fault conditions.

10.4.5 Measurements

Measurements shall be carried out after construction, where necessary, to verify the adequacy
of the design. Measurements may include the earthing system impedance, prospective touch
and step voltages at relevant locations and transferred potential, if appropriate. When measuring
touch and step voltages under test conditions, example: current injection test, two choices are
possible. Either measure the prospective touch and step voltages using a high impedance
voltmeter or measure the effective touch and step voltages appearing across an appropriate
resistance which represents the human body.

10.4.6 Maintainability

10.4.6.1 Inspections

The construction of the earthing system shall be carried out in a way that the condition of the
earthing system can be examined periodically by inspection at least once in two years.
Excavating at selective locations and visual inspection are appropriate means which shall be
considered.

10.4.6.2 Measurements

Design and installation of the earthing system shall allow measurements to be carried out
periodically or following major changes affecting fundamental requirements, or even for
continuity tests.

10.5 Calculations of Earth Electrode Resistance and Current to Earth.

10.5.1 Determination of Earth Electrode Impedance

Estimation of the total impedance to remote earth is one of the first steps in determining the size
and basic layout of an earthing system. The impedance depends primarily on the area to be
occupied by the earthing system, which is usually known in the early design stage. As a first
approximation, a minimum value of the substation earthing system impedance in uniform soil
can be estimated by means of the formula of a circular metal plate at zero depth.

𝜌 𝜋
𝑍𝐸 = 4 √𝐴 …..(1)

Where,
ZE is the substation earth impedance in Ω.
ρ is the soil resistivity in Ωm
A is the area occupied by the earth grid in m2

In the case of a grid-rod combination in uniform soil, a combined length of horizontal

conductors and earth rods will yield a slightly conservative estimate of LT, because earth rods
usually are more effective on a per unit length basis

𝜌 𝜋 𝜌
𝑍𝐸 = 4 √𝐴 + 𝐿 ….. (2)
𝑇

Where,
LT is the total buried length of conductors in m

The impedance of any actual earthing system that consists of a number of conductors is higher
than that of a solid metallic plate. The difference will decrease with the increasing length of
buried conductors and will approach 0 for infinite LT, when the condition of a solid plate is
reached.

For grids without ground rods, the following formula may be used,

where
h is the depth of the grid in m

NOTES

1 The prevailing fault current IF shall be obtained from the supplier. The designer may add a safety margin of
25 percent in the fault current if future growth to be considered.

2 If the supplier is not aware of earth fault current and provide Line to Line Short circuit fault current, the
earth fault current shall be calculated. See 5.1

3 From the calculated / available IF, current through the earth electrode IE shall be calculated.

10.5.2 Determination of The Earth Potential Rise.

The earth potential rise UE is given by:

𝑈𝐸 = 𝑍𝐸 × 𝐼𝐸 (see 13.4, Figure 94)

Where,

ZE is the impedance to earth (for example from the measurement in accordance with
13.4.3) or from the calculation in accordance with 13.4.4),
IE is the current to earth.

A test as per 13.4.3 shall be conducted,

The current to earth during measurement is given by:

𝐼𝐸𝑀 = 𝑟 × 𝐼𝑀

The impedance to earth is given by:

𝑈𝐸𝑀
𝑍𝐸 =
𝐼𝐸𝑀

The earth potential rise in case of fault is given by:

𝐼𝐸
𝑈𝐸 = 𝐼𝐸 × 𝑍𝐸 = 𝑈𝐸𝑀 ×
𝑟 × 𝐼𝑀

Where
UEM is the measured voltage between the earthing system and a probe in the area of the
reference earth (remote earth) in Volts,
IM is the measured test current in Amperes,
r is the reduction factor of the line to the remote earth electrode. The reduction factor
may be determined by calculation (see IS13234-3 clause 7 and 8) or by measurement.
For the reduction factor for overhead lines without earth wires and cables without shield
or armouring is r = 1.

For an earth fault in a three-phase system and for a similar earth wire reduction factor of all
overhead lines leaving the substation, the current to earth can be determined by:

𝐼𝐸 = 𝑟 × ∑3 𝐼0

Where,

r is the earth wire reduction factor,

∑3 𝐼0 is the vector sum of the currents of all phase conductors of this system flowing to
the substation.

For a fault in the substation ∑3 𝐼0 is the difference between the earth fault current and the
transformer neutral current.

If the earth wire reduction factors of the lines A, B, C ... leaving the substations are different,
the current to earth is given by:

𝐼𝐸 = 𝑟𝐴 × 3𝐼0𝐴 + 𝑟𝐵 × 3𝐼0𝐵 + 𝑟𝐶 × 3𝐼0𝐶 + ⋯

Where,
 I0A is the zero-sequence current of a phase conductor (for example phase L1) of the
line A, I0B accordingly of the line B, etc,
rA is the earth wire reduction factor of the line A, rB of the line B, etc.

NOTE — This equivalent circuit includes the chain impedance Z∞ of the tower foot resistances and earth wire
of the outgoing overhead lines. In practise the chain impedance is almost achieved after a few spans. For
overhead lines longer than a few spans the effect of magnetic coupling results in an earth wire current, which
is considered by the reduction factor.

For a cable leaving the substation, instead of the earth wire reduction factor the cable sheath
reduction factor shall be used in the equation above for IE.

For cables with insulated sheath which lead fault current to the substation the cable sheath
reduction factor is the primary effect. In addition, the chain impedance (cable
sheath/neighbouring earth grids) can be considered if the cable is significantly longer than the
sections forming the chain impedance.

10.6 Recommended Additional Safety Measures and Their Condition of Use.

Information in Table 30 should be used as additional safety measures (ASM) in order to ensure
safe touch and step voltages inside and in the vicinity of the earthing system. Computer
simulations may be used to decide the distance and depth of burial of potential grading
horizontal earth electrode.

Table 30 Conditions for The Use of Additional Safety Measures (ASM) To Ensure Permissible
Touch Voltages UTP

ASM 1 Applicable for the outer walls of buildings with indoor installations.
One of the ASM 1.1 to ASM 1.3 may be applied as protection against external
touch voltage.
ASM 1.1 Use of non-conductive material for the outer walls (for example masonry or
wood) and avoidance of earthed metal parts which can be touched from outside.
ASM 1.2 Potential grading by a horizontal earth electrode which is connected to the
earthing system, at a distance of approximately 1 m outside the outer wall and
not deeper than 0.5 m with a recommended depth of 0.2 m to 0.3 m.
ASM 1.3 Insulation of the operating location: The layers of insulating material shall be
of sufficient size, so that it is impossible to touch the earthed conductive parts
with the hand from a location outside the insulating layer. If touching is possible
only in lateral direction, an insulating layer width of 1.25 m is sufficient.
The insulation of the operating location is considered to be sufficient in the
following cases:
− a layer of gravel or crushed stones with a thickness of at least 100 mm,
− a layer of asphalt with adequate base (for example asphalt on gravel basement),
− an insulating mat with a minimum area of 1000 mm x 1000 mm and a thickness
of at least 2.5 mm or a measure ensuring equivalent insulation.
ASM 2 Applicable for external fences at outdoor installations.
One of the ASM 2.1 to ASM 2.3 may be applied as protection against external
touch voltage; at gates in external fences ASM 2.4 shall also be considered.
ASM 2.1 Use of fences of non-conductive material or of plastic-covered material e.g.
wire mesh with appropriate non-conductive links.
ASM 2.2 When using fences of conductive material, potential grading by a horizontal
earth electrode, which is connected to the fence, at a distance of approximately
1 m outside the fence and at a maximum depth of 0.5 m. The connection of the
fence to the earthing system is optional and in accordance to options described
in 10.7.1. (however, see ASM 2.4).
ASM 2.3 Insulation of the operating location in accordance with ASM 1.3 and earthing
of the fence either in accordance with 10.7.1 or by connection with the earthing
system.
ASM 2.4 If gates in external fences are connected directly to the earthing system or via
protective conductors or metal sheaths of cables for staff locator systems etc.,
then at the opening area of the gates a potential grading or insulation of the
operating location in accordance with ASM 1.3 shall be applied. When the gates
in a separately earthed conductive fence are to be connected to the main earthing
system, the gates shall be isolated from the conductive parts of the fence in a
way that establishes an electrical separation of at least 2.5 m. This may be
achieved by using a fence section of non-conductive material or by using
conductive fencing with insulated inserts at the end. Care shall be taken to
ensure the electrical separation is maintained when the gates are fully opened.
ASM 3: Applicable for indoor installations.
Within indoor installations one of the ASM 3.1 to ASM 3.3 may be applied.
ASM 3.1 Equipotential grading by embedding grid-type electrodes in the building
foundations (for example of a minimum cross-section of 50 mm2 and maximum
mesh widths of 10 m or structural steel mats) and connection to the earthing
system at a minimum of two separate locations.
If concrete steel reinforcement is also used for dissipating the fault current, the
capability of the steel reinforcement shall be checked by calculation.
If structural steel mats are used, then the adjacent mats shall be interconnected
at least once and all the mats together shall be connected to the earthing system
at a minimum of two locations.
At existing buildings, a horizontal earth electrode may be used, which shall be
buried in the soil near the outside walls and connected to the earthing system.
ASM 3.2 Construction of the operating locations from metal (for example a metal grid or
metal plate) and connection to any metal parts which shall be earthed and which
can be touched from the operating location.
ASM 3.3 Insulation of the operating locations for the earth potential rise in accordance
with ASM 1.3. For equipotential bonding the metal parts which shall be earthed
and which can be simultaneously touched from the operating location, shall be
interconnected.
ASM 4: Applicable for outdoor installations.
ASM 4.1 At operating locations (only applicable for fault duration tf > 5 s):

Potential grading by a horizontal earth electrode at a depth of approximately 0.2

m and a distance of approximately 1 m from the equipment to be operated. This
 horizontal earth electrode shall be connected to all metal parts which shall be
earthed and which can be touched from the operating location.
or
Construction of the operating locations from metal (for example metal grid or
metal plate) and connection to the metal parts which shall be earthed and which
can be touched from the operating location.
or
Insulation of the location in accordance with ASM 1.3. For equipotential
bonding the metal parts which shall be earthed and which can be simultaneously
touched from the operating location, shall be interconnected.
ASM 4.2 Burying a horizontal earth electrode surrounding the earthing system in the
form of a closed ring. Inside this ring, a meshed earth grid shall be buried, whose
individual meshes have a maximum size of 10 m x 50 m. At individual parts of
the installation, which are situated outside of the ring and which are connected
to the earthing system, a grading earth electrode at a distance of approximately
1 m and a depth of approximately 0.2 m shall be provided (for example lightning
masts, which are connected to the earthing system via protective conductors).
NOTES
1 ASM1 and ASM 2 is applicable for outdoor walls and fences around installation.
2 ASM 3 is applicable inside the indoor installation.
3 ASM 4.1 or 4.2 is applicable inside the outdoor installation.
4 ASM 4.1 is not applicable where the disconnection time is  5 s.
10.7 Detailed Measures for Earthing of Equipment and Installations

10.7.1 Fences Around Substation Installations

Bare metallic fences shall be earthed. A number of earth points shall be used, for example at
each corner. In accordance with local conditions (fence inside or outside the earthing system)
the earth connection should be made either to the high voltage earthing system or to separate
earth electrodes. Figure 64 is illustrating the principle together with the information in 10.6,
item ASM 2.2.

For insulated fences, metallic fasteners shall not be earthed.

All physical breaks in the fencing surrounding a substation installation, for example the gates,
shall be bonded in such a way as to ensure that dangerous potentials do not arise between the
parts of the fence.

For remote metallic fences not connected to the earthing system, natural grounding of the fence
posts with local bonding or establishing a potential grading earth electrode, may be sufficient
as illustrated in Figure 65.

Figure 64 Earthing Principle of Metallic Fence, Interconnected to Earthing Grid of Substation

 Figure 65 Earthing Principle of Remote Metallic Fence, Earthed Independently

10.7.2 Pipes

Metallic pipes within the substation site should be connected to the substation earthing system.

The use of metallic pipes, for example water supplies, from outside the substation perimeter,
should be avoided and non-metallic materials or isolating joints should be used instead.

10.7.3 Traction Rails

The rails of non-electric tracks that cross into the substation site shall be connected to the
substation earthing system.

Suitable insulating rail joints should be included at the boundary of the substation site such that
the electrical separation is maintained to the remaining parts of the traction system. In some
cases, two insulating rail joints could be required to prevent short-circuiting by the traction unit.
Special attention shall be paid at traction operating locations. For the determination of measures,
the owner of the railway system shall be consulted and Transferred potentials to
telecommunication and other systems should be taken into account.

10.7.4 Pole Mounted Transforming and/or Switching Installations

In general, all pole mounted transforming equipment combined with switching equipment, or
not, shall be earthed.

In cases, where at the pole only a transformer is situated, a minimum earthing system (Example:
an earth rod or a ring earth electrode or the footing of a conductive pole) fulfils the earthing
requirements of the transformer.

In general, switching equipment mounted on poles made of steel or other conductive material
or made of reinforced concrete shall be earthed. At the operating position the permissible touch
voltage according to 5.2 shall be met. This can be accomplished by, Example:
 a) the design of the earthing system, or
b) an equipotential bonding by means of an earth mat, or earth ring electrode, or
c) using insulation of operating location, or
d) using insulating equipment (Example. insulating tools, gloves or mat) when the
switching operation is done, or
e) by a combination of the measures described.

Switching equipment mounted on poles made of non-conductive material need not be earthed.
If it is not earthed, mechanically reliable insulators (for example unsplit core insulators) shall
be installed in operating linkages outside the normal arm's reach. These shall be designed for
the nominal voltage of the system. The part of the actuator which can be touched from the
ground shall be earthed to dissipate possible leakage currents. An earth rod of at least 1 m length
or a horizontal earth electrode around the pole at a distance of approximately 1 m is sufficient.
Earth electrodes and earthing conductors shall satisfy the minimum cross sections (see 7.3).

10.7.5 Secondary Circuits of Instrument Transformers

The secondary circuits of all instrument transformers shall be earthed as close as possible to the
instrument transformer's secondary terminals.

The minimum cross-section are does not apply to this type of equipment. A minimum cross-
section of 2.5 mm2 copper is required; if the earthing conductor is mechanically unprotected
then 4.0 mm2 copper is necessary.

If, however, it is necessary to earth at some other points, then there shall be no possibility of the
earth being inadvertently disconnected.
10.8 Typical Earthing Arrangement

A typical earthing arrangement for an outdoor switchyard is shown in Figure 66. A typical
earthing arrangement for connecting the reinforcement of foundations of substation building
and switchyard RCC masts is shown in Figure 67.

Figure 4 Typical Earthing Grid for an Outdoor Substation (66 KV and Above)
 NOTES

1 Top ring should be half the size of main vertical reinforcement rod.
2 Minimum of two extreme columns should be earthed like this in each substation.
3 This is also applicable to RCC masts and equipment supports in OD switchyard.
4 Inserts other than earthing pads may or may not be welded to reinforcement.

Figure 57 Earthing and Foundation Reinforcement (Concrete Encased Earth Electrode)

The perimeter fence may need to be earthed separately from the main station earth electrode
system (see 10.7.1).

The tertiary winding of a power transformer should be connected to the transformer tank by a
connection of sufficient cross-sectional area to carry the primary short-circuit current.

In the case of pole mounted transformers on overhead line systems, temporary overvoltage at
LV installation during faults in the HV system and mitigation recommendation in 5.3 shall be
considered.

In the case of pole mounted transformers on overhead line systems, difficulties may arise in
areas of high soil resistivity. Here, if the pole carries also isolating switchgear with low level
operating handle, up to three separately earthed electrode systems may be required. The neutral
of the low voltage system is usually earthed one pole span away from other earth electrodes.
The high voltage metalwork (transformer tank, switch framework, support metal work), consists
of one earth electrode at or near the pole. In addition, an earth mat should be provided, near the
ground surface, in the position taken up by a person operating the switch handle. This mat
should be connected to the switch handle. The mat should be electrically separated from the
main electrode. This is considered to be achieved by spacing the nearest element of that
electrode at least 1 m from the periphery of the mat. The top of the main electrodes should be
at least 250 mm and preferably 750 mm below the ground. The earthing wire to the main
electrode of outdoor type rubber or PVC-insulated cable up to a point 2 m above ground level
shall be insulated. This cable, between the bottom of the pole and the electrode should be laid
in a 50 mm diameter earthenware duct filled solid with bitumen.

10.9 General Earthing Arrangements at Power Stations of Electricity Supplies

10.9.1 Neutral Earthing of Generator Circuits

At large power stations for electricity supply the generation circuits generally comprise a star-
connected stator circuit with an operating voltage up to about 32 kV, directly connected to a
step-up delta/star transformer, the higher voltage winding generally operating at 132 kV,
275 kV or 400 kV, with the transmission system neutral point directly earthed.

The following three methods have been used for earthing the neutral of the generator windings:

a) Earthing through the primary winding of a matching transformer, with resistor

connected across the secondary winding,
b) earthing through a resistor, and
c) earthing through the primary winding of a voltage transformer.

Method (a) — is current practice, the design being such that the maximum sustained earth fault
current in the generator circuit is restricted to 10 to 15 A, thus limiting the damage at the point
of fault. The neutral and earthing connections, however, are of adequate capacity to withstand
for 3 s the earth fault current that would flow in the event of the matching transformer terminals
flashing over during an earth fault. The resistor used for the arrangement is of the metallic grid-
non inductive type.

Method (b) — can be used to achieve the same degree of fault-current limitation, by design of
a suitable high-current resistor, but is not preferred on the grounds of its less robust construction
than that of the equipment used in method (a). It was earlier practice, however, to individually
earth each generator at power stations by liquid earthing resistors designed to limit the earth-
fault current to about 300 A.

Method (c) — is now historic, but had the advantage that minimal damage resulted at an earth
fault. If desired, the generator could remain in circuit while operational arrangements were made
to permit its withdrawal. However, this imposed a higher voltage stress on the stator windings
and plant on the un-faulted phases, and the machine design usually imposed limitations on this.
The output from the secondary winding of the voltage transformer could be arranged to activate
an alarm or trip the generator circuit as desired. In designing the neutral and earthing
connections to the voltage transformer, the earth-fault current used was that resulting by
flashover of the voltage transformer during an earth-fault.

Some old power stations have generators connected directly to distribution system busbars. In
general, the neutral terminals of such generators have been earthed via liquid neutral earthing
resistors of such a value that the maximum sustained earth fault current is of the order of full
load current of the generator. Installations of neutral point switchboards with switching of
neutral points and earthing resistors have been abandoned in favour of individual unswitched
earthing resistors.

10.9.2 Earthing of Power Station Auxiliary Systems

There are, in common use, three methods of earthing the neutral point in power station auxiliary
systems:

a) Solidly earthed.
b) Earthing through a voltage transformer (or voltage relay) with a surge diverter (but not
a fuse) shunting the primary winding (or the relay). and
c) Resistance earthing.

Methods (a) and (c) involve the automatic disconnection of the individual fault circuit.

With method (b), an alarm can be arranged to be operated from the secondary of the voltage
transformer and the scheme enables all auxiliaries to be kept in service until it is convenient to
make the auxiliary switchboard dead.

Method (a) is normally used in power stations with smaller generating sets and method (c) used
in the larger power stations. Method (b) has certain disadvantages, such as the complication in
arranging for speedy identification of the individual faulty circuit and the possible difficulties
arising from functioning of the surge diverter. However with the availability of Insulation
monitoring system and insulation fault locating system up to 1000 A a.c., could make the
method (b) reliable for auxiliary power system.

NOTE — See 10.2.5 or 5.1 for earth fault current calculations.

10.10 Equipment Earthing at Power Stations

Practice in equipment earthing at power stations is identical to that for large substations not
giving external low voltage supplies (see 10.2.3). A common earth is used for the neutral
earthing of generators and power station auxiliaries, and for all equipment framework, cladding,
power cables sheaths and extraneous metalwork not associated with the power systems, other
than the perimeter fence (see 10.7.1).

10.11 Power Station and Substation Earth Electrodes

10.11.1 General

The required characteristics of earth electrode system are:

a) a stable resistance, under all variations due to climatic conditions, capable of reducing
the touch and step potentials below the tolerable value.
b) current carrying capability for all currents and durations that may arise in normal
operating conditions or during fault or surge discharge conditions, without undue
increase in resistance.
c) suitable location in the vicinity of any lightning discharge devices such that earthing
conductors from such devices are as short and straight as possible to minimize surge
impedance. and
d) earth electrode installations should be durable and of such material and design to avoid
corrosions.

Where the soil of a site is hostile by virtue of alkalinity or acidity it may be necessary to embed
earth electrodes in rammed neutral soil or in concrete to avoid corrosion.
Earth electrode systems can also represent some hazard to adjacent underground services or
structural steelwork through electrolytic action between dissimilar metals (see 7.3.6.6). Where
this danger cannot be avoided by selection of compatible metals, the adoption of cathodic
protection or other remedial action may be necessary.

At power stations and substations, the steel reinforcement in foundations and piles can be used
to provide an effective electrode system, without necessity to provide further buried electrodes.
Where piles are used they should be bonded securely (see 7.3.3.5) and connected to earth
bonding bars at least four points.

Where no substantial adventitious earths exist or where they are inadequate, it is necessary to
install electrodes (see 8.2).

All cladding or steel work at a station should be bonded to the earthing system as should all
structural steel work, but attention is drawn to precautions against undue reliance on the latter
as an electrode.

10.12 Earthing Conductors for Power Stations and Substations

10.12.1 Disposition

It is necessary to provide permanent and substantial connections between all equipment and the
earth electrodes so as to afford a low resistance path for fault currents both to earth and between
items of equipment. In addition, all other metal plant in or about the station should be connected
to the main station earthing system. The most efficient disposition of earthing conductors
required will depend on the layout of equipment and the following may be taken as a guide:

10.12.1.1 Indoor equipment

A Main Earth Bar (MET) should be provided and connected to the framework of each item and
to the nearest earth raisers. There should be a connection to the earth electrodes system at each
end of the earth bar or, if this is in the form of a ring, at several points on the ring. These
connections may, depending on the layout be buried cables of a size adequate for the short-
circuit current. Where the structure of a switchboard is extensive or occupies more than one
floor, a further parallel main earth bar (MET) may be required which should be cross connected
to its companion bar at one point at least in each section of the switchboard. The indoor
equipment should be provided with adequate size pad / stud having proper surface contact with
earth bar / raisers.

The main earth bar should be so placed that cable sheaths can be readily connected to it. When
cables are so connected, the bonds should be made to the cable gland on which the lead sheath
should be bonded, and the armouring clamped. The main earth bar should be accessible for the
connection of any detachable earthing devices provided with the switchgear.

Branch connections from the main earth bar should be provided to all accessory equipment,
such as control and relay panels, constructional steelwork and fire-extinguishing equipment.

Where busbar protection is effected at switchboards by frame leakage, two main earth bars are
required. The frame bar interconnecting the framework of the switch units will be connected to
the true earth bar through a current transformer and bolted links for test purposes. The true earth
bar should be run separately from the frame earth bar in convenient position for the connection
of cable sheaths and earthing devices. Where it is mounted on the switch units, it should be
insulated therefrom by insulation capable of withstanding a test voltage of 4 kV rms a.c. for 1
min.

Where insulated cable glands are used, it is recommended that ‘island’ insulation should be
provided to facilitate testing.

10.12.1.2 Outdoor equipment (Excluding pole mounted transformers)

A main earth bar shall be provided to allow the shortest connections to all major equipment.
Wherever possible, this should be arranged around the substation periphery. The main earth bar
shall be connected where required to earth electrode system. From the main earth bar, branch
connections should be taken to each item of apparatus and where several such items lie together,
a subsidiary ring with short branches is preferable to a number of longer individual branches
from the main bar. The aim should be to provide a mesh system wherever possible.

The operating mechanisms for outdoor air break switch disconnectors and earth switches and
circuit breaker control kiosks, etc, not integral with the circuit breaker should be connected to
the main earth grid by a branch earth connection entirely separate from that employed for
earthing the air-break switch-disconnector or earth switch base, or the circuit-breaker structure.
The further contribution to safety given by an insulated insert in the mechanism drive is less
compared with that obtained from such a branch earth connection and, therefore, insulated
inserts are not recommended in operating mechanisms of apparatus installed in substations.
While sites covered with hard core and stone chippings will constitute a surface layer with a
relatively high specific resistance, in the interests of safety, a metal grid can be provided at the
operating points to give a level standing area and an earth connection made from this grid to the
operating handle.

Where it can be proved by visual inspection and continuity resistance measurement that the
current carrying capacity of a main aluminium or steel member or welded sections forming a
structure are at least equal to that of the required size of earth conductor, the structure may form
part of the connection and there is no need to fix an earth conductor along this section. A
structure made up of bolted sections should not be relied upon to form an efficient earth bond
between equipment and the main earth grid, and loops bonding across structural joints are
required.

Connections to metal cladding, steel structure and metal door frames and windows or any other
metallic panels should be made inside buildings.

Where the earth wire of an incoming line ends at the terminal supports and is not connected to
a point on the substation structures, a subsidiary earth connection should be provided between
the substation earth system and the base of the support. If the latter lies outside the substation
fence, the earth connection should be buried where it passes under the fence and should be kept
well clear of the latter.

Earth connections to surge arresters should be of sample cross-section and as direct as possible;
they should not pass through iron pipes which would increase the impedance to surges of the
connection. The earth connections of the arresters should be interconnected with the main
earthing system since, for the effective protection of the substation equipment, a definite
connection of low impedance between the equipment and surge arresters is essential (See IS
15086: Part 5 clause 5.2.5.5.4 example: the arrester is earthed directly at the transformer tank.
The loop L1 + L2 + L3 + LMO is short). In this way, the inductances are kept to a minimum.

10.12.2 Design

10.12.2.0 General

The term earthing grid applies only to that part of the grid which is buried in soil. For design
calculations of the grid resistance to the soil, only the buried part of the grid is to be taken into
account. The part of the grid embedded in concrete and also reinforcement do lower the
combined grid resistance.

10.12.2.1 Conductors installed above ground

Earthing conductors for power stations and substations will normally be selected from copper
or aluminium or steel sections adequately rated in size to carry the designed earth fault or three
phase fault current for the appropriate designed maximum duration without exceeding a
temperature given in Table 19. Compliance with this requirement will additionally ensure
satisfactory bonding without excessive voltage difference along any conductor.

The required cross-sectional area of the earthing conductor is determined by the choice of
conductor material and the maximum duration of the fault current. The generally accepted
duration for design purposes are 1 s, provided, adequate fast acting earth fault protection shall
be provided to isolates the system within 1 s.

10.12.2.2 Conductors buried as strip electrodes

The earthing grid consists of horizontal conductors which may be connected to vertical
electrodes forming an earthing grid. It is recommended that the duration of earth fault current
should be taken as 1 s.

NOTE — Fast acting protective devices are to be provided for quick disconnection during earth fault.

The other factors which shall be taken as the consideration while designing the earth grid are
given below:

a) Factor of safety for the ability of the earthing conductor to carry the fault current during
the period the fault persists, without any thermal and mechanical damage to the
conductor.
b) The relative importance of the installation for which the earthing system is being
designed.
c) The likely increase in the near future in the fault level in the area where the earth
conductor has been installed.
d) Operating time of the protective devices.
e) Corrosion of the earth conductor.
f) Factor of safety for workmanship in jointing, etc. and
g) Maximum permissible temperature rise for the buried part of the grid (see Table 19 for
temperature limits in earthing conductor).

10.12.2.3 Sizing
The amount of current flowing to earth (IE) through that part of the grid should be considered.
The cross-section of the area of the grid conductor shall not be less than the value stipulated in
7.3.2, where the value of k is to be taken from Table 19.

10.12.3 Construction

10.12.3.1 General

It is essential for the safety of personnel and plant that an earth system should remain effective
throughout the life of the plant. It is difficult in many cases to make a check of continuity after
installation. The system, therefore, has to be robust and protected from mechanical damage and
corrosion, where necessary. Any joints should be capable of retaining low resistance after many
passages of fault current.

10.12.3.2 Laying conductors

Buried bare conductors (see Table 26) forming part of the earthing system should be at about
300 to 600 mm deep which, in addition to giving protection to the conductor and connections,
should ensure that it will normally be below frost line. Aluminium should only be used for
above ground connections.

NOTE — If the indigenous soil is hostile to copper, that is, acidic with a pH value of less than 6 or alkaline
with a pH value of more than 10, soil surrounding the electrode should be different, or the electrode is encased
in concrete.

Where an adequate earthing installation is provided, the supplementary connections from the
main earth grid to equipment may be laid at a depth and by routes most appropriate to site
connections. For convenience in connecting to equipment, they may be laid at a depth of about
250 mm, and as they are, therefore, in ground more subject to seasonal or progressive changes
of resistivity, it may be assumed that they make negligible contribution towards reducing station
earth resistance. On the other hand, they do serve to reduce surface gradient within the station
site. Conversely where these connections are also required to improve the earth value of the
station, the 600 mm depth is required. The above recommendations deal mainly with stations
on normal sites. Where ground conditions restrict the installation depth or where the soil
resistivity is excessive, additional measures may be required beyond the station boundary to
improve the overall earth value.

The earthing installation within the station will, however, bond the station plant and restrict
touch potentials to acceptable limits.

Where bare metal conductor is buried under metal fencing, and the fencing is independently
earthed, the conductor should be insulated by threading through non-metallic pipe extending
for at least 2 m each side of the fence or alternatively insulated conductor may be used.

When laying stranded conductor for earthing purposes, care should be taken to avoid bird caging
of the strands.

10.12.3.3 Fixing conductors

In fixing aluminium or copper conductors to structures, etc, insulated or Stainless steel clips
should be used to avoid drilling and prevent electrolytic action. Galvanized clips should not be
used. Fixing should be spaced not more than 1 m apart.
Earth conductors in trenches containing power and/or multi-core cables should be fixed to the
walls near the top (for example, 100 mm from the top).

Bimetallic connecting accessories shall be used where connections between dissimilar materials
are to be made.

Sharp bends required in aluminium strip should be formed by the use of a bending machine.

Aluminium earthing conductors will give satisfactory performance in contact with concrete,
cement, plaster and brickwork, if they are used at the surface, however aluminium shall not be
buried in concrete or soil. In outdoor installations, the conductor will weather to a grey
appearance and in marine or industrial atmospheres slight surface pitting may occur. This will
not affect performance since the sections are relatively large. The interfaces of all ‘mechanical’
joints should be protected with a suitable electrical joint compound, particularly any bimetallic
joints. All bimetallic joints should then be encapsulated in a grease impregnated tape, mastic
compound or bitumastic paint, etc, to exclude moisture.

In general, aluminium should only be used above ground and not inside concrete and the
connections to earth electrodes made above ground with bimetallic joints. Aluminium can be
used below ground only if efficiently protected or sheathed against contact with soil and
moisture.

10.12.3.4 Jointing conductors

a) General — All crossings of conductors in the main earth grid should be bonded.
Compression type joints may be used for stranded conductors. Non-conductor strip
should be drilled for a bolt having a diameter greater than one-third of the width of the
strip. If this diameter will be exceeded, then a wider flag should be jointed to the strip.
Note: Aluminium shall not be used in buried (soil or concrete) application.

b) Aluminium to aluminium — When possible, joints on strip conductor should be arc

welded using either the tungsten inert-gas arc (TIC) or metal inert gas arc (MIG)
techniques. Oxy-acetylene gas welding or brazing may also be used.

Ranges of compression fittings and tools are available for round conductors. Round
conductors can also be flattened and punched with suitable tools to form a terminal.

Round and rectangular conductors can be joined with bolted clamps.

Rectangular conductors can be joined or terminated by drilling and bolting. When

making a bolted type joint, the surface of the aluminium should be cleaned thoroughly
by wire brushing and greased or an approved jointing compound applied immediately
to both mating surfaces. Bolts should then be tightened and all excess grease or
compound wiped off and discarded.

To ensure adequate contact pressure and avoid overstressing, torque spanners should be
used. The conductor manufacturer’s literature should be consulted for further details for
the joints and procedures.

Cold pressure welding and explosive bonding can be used for jointing rectangular
conductors. The appropriate manufacturer should be consulted for details of these
procedures.
 c) Aluminium to copper — Joints between aluminium and copper should be of the bolted
type and be installed in the vertical plane at a minimum distance of 150 mm above
ground level.

The rating surface of the aluminium should be cleaned thoroughly by wire brushing and
greased or an approved jointing compound applied and the copper tinned. Grease or an
approved jointing compound should be applied to the melting surface of the aluminium.
After bolt tightening by torque spanner, excess grease or compound should be wiped off
and discarded, and the joint protected from the ingress of moisture by the application of
suitable plastics compound or irradiated polyethylene sleeve with mastic lining.
Alternatively, the joint may be protected by a bitumastic paint.

Aluminium conductor connections to equipment should, where possible, be in the

vertical plane. Surface preparation of the aluminium and the making of the joint should
be as previously described. The finished joint should be protected by a bitumastic paint.

d) Copper to copper — The following methods may be used:

1) Brazing using zinc-free brazing material with a melting point of at least 600°C;
2) Bolting;
3) Riveting and sweating; and
4) Exothermic welding.

Earthing conductor connections to equipment should, as far as practicable, be made onto

vertical surfaces only. In the case of painted metal, the paint should be carefully
removed. Earthing conductors should be tinned where connected to galvanized
steelwork. No connection point should be less than 150 mm above ground level. In any
position, subject to corrosion, the finished joint should be protected by bitumastic paint.

e) Loops for portable earths - Loops of plain aluminium or copper should be provided on
the earth conductor at each location where portable earthing leads may be applied. The
loops should not be less than 180 mm long and 75 mm clear of the earth conductor; they
should be at a convenient height and should be formed separately, not by bending the
earth strip itself. Loops should be jointed to the earth conductor using a method given
in 10.12.3.4 (d).

f) Steel — For steel, (bare of galvanized) it is recommended to use only welded joints. The
joints shall be protected with corrosion proof cover.

g) Copper Bonded steel – Exothermic welding or by stainless steel clamps.

10.13 Earthing of High Voltage Cable Sheaths

10.13.1 Three-Core Cables

Modern high voltage power cables are generally provided with a polymeric insulating over
sheaths. The sheath of solid type cables are generally directly earthed at their terminations and
joints, the cable sheaths being bonded at joints. The sheath earth connections of pressure type
cables are generally made via a removable link in a lockable box to permit periodic testing of
the over sheath insulation, the joints being insulated, but the sheaths bonded through. The test
requirement also means that insulating glands should be provided at the cable termination boxes
of transformers, switchgear, etc and at cable sealing ends or joints.

10.13.2 Single-Core Cable Tails

The sheaths of single-core cables have a longitudinal induced voltage, the magnitude of which
is directly proportional to the current flowing in the core. When both ends of a single-core cable
are bonded to earth, a current flows in the sheath and the thermal effects of this sheath current
derates the capacity of the cable core. Where this derating is unacceptable and the value of the
standing induced voltage is acceptable, it is usual to earth the sheaths of the single-core cables
at the trifurcating box or in the case of single-core mains, the end of the trefoil formation, the
cable glands at sealing ends or plant cable boxes being of the insulated type. The acceptable
level of the maximum sheath voltage is generally taken as 65V with full rated current flowing
in the cable, but where the ratio of fault current to full rated current is so high that the voltage
developed across an insulated gland is unacceptable, it is necessary to derate the permissible
voltage to some level lower than 65 V.

10.13.3 Single-Core Cable Mains

The choice of termination and earthing arrangements for single-core cable mains is a matter of
economics. The possible methods of earthing are as follows:

a) Solid Bonding — In this system, the sheath bonding and earthing arrangements are such
that the sheaths are maintained near earth potential throughout their length.

b) Single Point Bonding — This method is for single core tails, and is subjected to practical
limitations of cable lengths permissible.

c) Cross-Bonding — In this method, the cable length is divided into three equal sections
(or into a multiple of three such sections) and at each section junction, an insulating joint
is provided. At these joints, the sheath of each cable section is bonded to the sheath of a
different phase cable of the next section through lockable link boxes. By suitable
connection, the phasor sum of the longitudinal sheath voltage is zero, and at the cable
terminations, the sheaths of all three cables are bonded to earth. It is usual to provide a
three-phase star-connected set of cable protections at each intermediate insulating joint;
these protectors are non-linear resistors presenting low impedance to surge currents. The
cross-bonding method permits the full rating of the cable to be maintained, but incurs
considerable cost in the provision of insulating joints, link boxes, protectors, etc.

10.14 Miscellaneous Matters in Power Stations and Substations

If two or more stations are adjacent on what may be considered to be one site, the earthing
systems and the stations should be interconnected to form a single earthing system. Where the
stations actually adjoin, the extremities of their earthing systems should be connected together
so that the whole area is enclosed by the earthing system. Where the separation is too large to
treat as adjoining stations, an interconnecting earth conductor of substantial cross-section
should be run to ensure that, as far as practicable, fault currents are diverted from cable sheaths
and armour. This is of particular importance where fault current flowing in one station is
provided from the adjoining station, for example, where a switching station adjoins power or
transforming station sites so that an earth fault in the switchgear causes current flow between
the two sites in order to reach the system neutral at the generators or transformers. Such
interconnections between sites can include links suitably disposed to assist in testing.

Except where special insulation is called for, sheaths of all main cables should be connected to
the station earth system. With multi-core cables the connection is generally made at the
termination.

Where high earth-fault currents are to be expected, and an appreciable rise of potential of the
station system with respect to the general mass of the earth may arise, special care is necessary
while connecting metal cables or pipes entering the station, other than main cables or lines, such
as water pipes and telephone or pilot cables. Water pipes should include an insulated section;
polymeric piping is often suitable. In several cases, isolating transformers may be necessary for
telephone connections. Pilot cables should be provided with insulated glands and so disposed
as to minimize the possibility of fault currents being carried by the sheaths.

Where carrier-current equipment is employed, a further earth-electrode, normally a driven rod,

should be provided at or immediately adjacent to each structure supporting the coupling
capacitors. This earth electrode is an additional one for the high frequency equipment and
should be bonded into the main earthing system. The structures supporting the coupling
capacitors should be earthed in the normal way.

10.15 Transferred Potentials to Telecommunication and Other Systems

Cables and insulated metallic pipes going into or out of a substation can be exposed to voltage
differences during an earth fault inside the substation. Depending on the way the cable screen
and/or armouring are earthed (at one or both ends) significant stress voltages or currents in the
screen and/or armouring could occur. The insulation of cables or pipes shall be dimensioned
accordingly.

In case of earthing at one end this may be done inside or outside the substation. Attention is to
be paid to the possible touch voltages at the insulated other end. Following precautions, may be
taken where necessary:

a) interruption of the continuity of metallic parts where they leave the area of the earthing
system;
b) insulation of conductive parts or areas;
c) installation of suitable barriers around conductive parts or areas to prevent their being
touched;
d) installation of an insulated barrier between parts connected to different earthing
systems;
e) suitable potential grading;
f) limiting overvoltages by using suitable devices;
g) metallic structures, Example: metallic fences and guard rails, installed outside but in
the proximity of the power installation.

If a high voltage earthing system becomes part of a global earthing system, where normally no
dangerous potential differences appear, problems may arise if conductive parts of insulated
pipes, cables, etc. connected to a remote earth potential and earthed conductive parts of the high
voltage installation are simultaneously accessible.
It is therefore necessary for this equipment to be placed at a sufficient distance from the areas
influenced by earth electrodes. If this is not possible, suitable measures shall be taken.

A general distance cannot be specified, the degree of danger shall be determined for each
individual case.

10.16 Reduction Factors Related to Earth Wires of Overhead Lines and Metal Sheaths
of Underground Cables.

10.16.1 General

Earth wires of overhead lines and metal sheaths of underground cables participate in carrying
fault currents returning to earth. They take over a part of the earth current of the corresponding
circuit as explained in Figure 57 of this document. By this effect the earthing system of a high
voltage installation affected by an earth fault will be discharged effectively in respect of the
earth fault current. The extent of this relief is described by the reduction factor.

The reduction factor r for an earth wire of a 3-phase overhead line is the ratio of the return
current in the earth to sum of the zero sequence current of the 3-phase circuit.

𝐼𝐸 3𝐼O − 𝐼EW
𝑟= =
3𝐼𝑂 3𝐼𝑂

Where:
IEW current in the earth wire (in balanced stage)
IE earth return current
3 I0 sum of zero sequence currents

The same definition is relevant to the reduction factor r of an underground cable with metal
sheath, screen, armouring or an enveloping steel pipe. Instead of the current in the earth wire
IEW the current in the metal sheath etc. shall be used.

The calculation of the reduction factor for overhead lines with earth wire or underground cables
with metal sheaths can be established using the formulas in IS 13234-3, Clauses 7 and 8.
Calculation examples are given in IS 13234-3, Annexes C and D.

10.16.2 Typical Values of Reduction Factors of Overhead Lines and Cables (50 Hz)

Reduction factor depends on many parameters and conditions, so, it presents a great variability.
The following values of reduction factor reported are purely indicative.

Earth wires of overhead lines (110 kV)

a) Steel 50...70 mm2 r = 0.80 – 0.98

b) ACSR 44/32 mm2 r = 0.77
c) ACSR 300/50 mm2 r = 0.61
d) AACSR*1 59–94*2 with 1 earth wire r = 0.70 – 0.85
e) AACSR with 2 earth wires r = 0.60 – 0.80
f) AACSR 116 - 288 with 1 earth wire r = 0.55 – 0.80
g) AACSR 116 – 288 with 2 earth wires r = 0.50 – 0.70
 h) OPGW*3 157*4 r = 0.60 – 0.70

Paper-insulated cables (10 kV and 20 kV)

j) Cu 95 mm2/1.2 mm lead sheath r = 0.20 – 0.60

k) Al 95 mm2/1.2 mm aluminium sheath r = 0.20 – 0.30

Single-core XLPE cables (10 kV and 20 kV)

m) Cu 95 mm2/16 mm2 copper screen r = 0.50 – 0.60

Single-core oil filled cables (110 kV)

n) Cu 300 mm2/2.2 mm aluminium sheath r = 0.37

Gas-pressure cables in steel pipe (110 kV)

p) Cu 300 mm2/1.7 mm steel r = 0.01 – 0.03

Single-core XLPE cables (110 kV)

q) Cu 300 mm2/35 mm2 copper screen r = 0.32

Single-core XLPE cables (150 kV)

r) Cu 800 mm2/700 mm2 lead screen r = 0.20

Single-core oil filled cables (400 kV)

s) Cu 1200 mm2/1200 mm2 aluminium sheath r = 0.01

NOTES

1 The reduction factor of cables links can be further reduced by installing extra bonding cables of suitable
section (example: 150 mm2 copper) in the same trench and by earthing them at the locations where the
screens are earthed.

2 The reduction factor is also valid for cable sections with cross bonding scheme.

*1 AACSR - Aluminium alloy conductor steel reinforced.

*2 The total cross-section in mm² of aluminium plus steel wire
*3 OPGW – Optical ground wire
*4 The total cross-section in mm² of aluminium plus steel wire

10.16.3 Influence of The Resistances to Earth on Current in Cable Sheath

The current returning as cable sheath current is composed of two components as given in Figure
68.

The substation where a line to earth fault occurs is A. The substation A is fed from a remote
substation through an underground cable A-B with length l. The cable sheath is earthed at both
ends. REA and REB represent the resistances to earth at A and B.
 Figure 6 Parameters Relevant for Cable Sheath Current

The current in the cable sheath is composed of:

a) induced current (1- rE).3I0

b) conductive current Iz

The main influencing parameters on the current in the cable sheath are the value of the
resistances to earth, the length (l) of the underground cable and the location of the return points.

10.17 Special Considerations for Gas-Insulated Substations (GIS)

Due to the limitation in area, it may be difficult in a GIS to obtain adequate earthing solely by
conventional methods. Particular attention should be given to the bonding of the metallic
enclosures of the GIS assembly, as these enclosures carry induced currents of significant
magnitude, which must be confined to specific paths.

As a result of the compact nature of GIS and its short distances, electrical breakdown in the
insulating gas, either across the contacts of a switching device during operation or under fault
conditions can generate very high frequency transients that can couple onto the grounding
system. These transients may cause high magnitude, short duration ground rises and are also
the source of electromagnetic interference (EMI) in the GIS, where special EMI mitigation
techniques are to be implemented.

NOTES

1 VFT is a class of transients generated internally within a GIS characterized by short duration and very high
frequency. VFT is generated by the rapid collapse of voltage during breakdown of the insulating gas, either
across the contacts of a switching device or line-to ground during a fault. These transients can have rise
times in the order of nanoseconds implying a frequency content extending to about 100 MHz. Very Fast
Transients Overvoltage (VFTO) may be generated from VFT.

2 Very fast transient is found on the earthed enclosure of GIS systems. Longer length of protective bonding
leads may produce higher potential differences.

Frequent bonding and earthing of GIS enclosures is the best solution to minimize hazardous
touch and step voltages within the GIS area. Additional measures include the use of conductive
platforms (earth mats) that are connected to GIS structures and to the earth electrode (Example:
Concrete embedded earth electrode).

To limit the undesirable effects caused by circulating currents, the following requirements
should be met:

a) The earthing arrangement should ensure that no significant voltage differences exist
between individual enclosure sections and that neither the supporting structures nor any
part of the earthing systems is adversely influenced by the flow of induced currents.
b) To avoid the circulation of enclosure currents beyond regular return path within the GIS
assembly, power cable sheath earthing should be bonded to the earthing arrangement
via connections that are separated from the GIS enclosures. To facilitate this isolation,
the design of cable terminations should use a spark gap or proper insulation material
designed or recommended by OEM.
c) Enclosure return currents also cannot be permitted to flow through any mounted current
transformers.

Usually, it is the GIS manufacturer who defines clearly what constitutes the main earth bus of
the GIS and specifies what is required of the user for connecting the GIS assembly to the
substation ground. Ample documentation is necessary to assure that none of the proposed
connections from the main earth bus to the earth grid will interfere with the required enclosure
current path or any other operational feature of the GIS design. That may be especially pertinent
if the main earth bus consists of a system of interconnections between the GIS components and
structures, and no separate busbar (continuous common ground bus loop) is furnished.

Usually, the GIS manufacturer is responsible for

a) Providing the subassembly-to-subassembly bonding to establish safe voltage gradients

that meet safety requirements between all intentionally earthed parts of the GIS
assembly and between those parts and the main earth bus of the GIS.
b) Providing accessible connectors of sufficient mechanical strength and dimensions to
carry the anticipated maximum fault current in that portion of the circuit without
overheating.
c) Providing earthing studs or connectors, or both, allowing, at least, for two paths to earth
from the main earth busbar, or from each metallic enclosure and auxiliary piece of GIS
equipment designated for a connection to the substation earth if the main earth busbar
of the GIS assembly does not actually exist.
d) Recommending proper procedures for connections between dissimilar metals.

Sources of fault current and the expected magnitudes and durations that should be considered
in the design. Following subjects are to be considered,

a) Connections for the neutral conductor of equipment or apparatus and for dissipating
surges caused by lightning and switching within the GIS.
b) Devices for dissipating lightning and switching surge currents external to the GIS
assembly.
c) Requirements of protective relaying and satisfying the provisions necessary for
communication facilities.
d) Earthing connections to all GIS supporting frames and structures, metallic sheaths, and
installation of shielding for cable terminations where applicable.
 e) Safe step and touch potentials and metal to metal touch potential under both normal and
abnormal operating conditions external to the GIS assembly.
f) Compliance with the specifications, related to correct earthing practices, as mutually
agreed to by the GIS manufacturer and the user.

Precautions should be taken by OEM to prevent excessive currents from being induced into
adjacent frames, structures, or reinforcing steel, and to avoid establishment of current loops via
other substation equipment, such as transformers or separate switchgear.

If there is the possibility of undesirable current loops via earth connections, or if any sustained
current path might partially close or pass through earthed structures, the substation earthing
scheme and the physical layout should be carefully reviewed.

Where applicable, all isolating elements should be able to withstand the full potential difference
that may occur between the locally earthed system and that external to the GIS. In many cases,
the very fast transients generated by switching or by faults in the GIS may cause very high
transient voltages to appear at these points. Bonding of structure at regular interval with earth
bus must be done as per recommendation of OEM.

In all circumstances, close cooperation with the GIS manufacturer at the early stages of design
is very important.

In the limited space of GIS substations, a substantial part of the substation area is often occupied
by concrete foundations. A simple monolithic concrete steel reinforced slab is advantageous. If
a continuous floor slab is used, its reinforcing steel mesh to the main earth busbar shall be
bonded so that both the GIS enclosures and the structural steel in and above the
foundation will be approximately the same potential level.

GIS foundations, which include reinforcing bars and other metals, can act as auxiliary earth
electrodes and may be so used provided that under no circumstances would the discharge of
current result in a damage of concrete because of local overheating or a gradual erosion of the
concrete-steel bonds. This must be done with consultation with civil engineer in charge at site.

11 EXAMPLES IN TYPICAL BUILINGS/APPLICATIONS

11.1 Industrial and Commercial Installation

11.1.1 General

Many industrial installations take their supply from DISCOM operated at a voltage which might
be above 1000V a.c, fault capacities might also be greater than those encountered in domestic
premises and great care should be exercised in the design of all protective conductors and their
terminations.

So far as the consumers taking supply at 240 V are concerned, it is the responsibility of the
supplier to provide earthed terminal at the premises of the consumer. In the cases of consumers
taking supply at higher voltages, earthing scheme should be so designed as to satisfy the basic
statutory requirements (see 4). A global Earthing System interconnecting HV and LV systems
is recommended.
 NOTE — Any earthing made as explained in clause 6.3.1 and Figure 23 to Figure 25 is a noncompliance to
this code of practice.

11.1.2 Earth Fault Loop Impedance

A low resistance paths for the return of earth fault current is necessary, and the earth fault loop
impedance should be sufficiently low as to allow the operation of every protective device within
the disconnection time given in 7.4.1.8, 7.4.1.9 and 7.4.1.10.

NOTE — Maintaining low Earth fault loop impedance in each circuit is a mandatory requirement in CEA
safety regulations.

11.1.3 Protective Equipotential Bonding

Every building shall have protective equipotential bonding by interconnecting the exposed and
extraneous conductive parts (See 7.2.1, 7.4.8.3, Figure 31, Figure 32, Figure 34 and Figure 35).
The maximum allowed fault voltage shall be limited to > 50 V a.c. in general application and >
25 V a.c. in WET areas.

NOTE — Maintaining protective equipotential bonding is a mandatory requirement in CEA safety regulations
2023.

11.1.4 Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of Protective Conductors and Earthing Conductors

The cross-sectional area of every protective conductor shall satisfy the conditions for automatic
disconnection of supply and be capable of withstanding mechanical and thermal stresses caused
by the prospective fault current during the disconnection time of the protective device. The
minimum cross-sectional area of protective conductors and earthing conductors shall satisfy
7.3.

11.1.5 Single Core Cables

Where single-core cables are used in low voltage installations, it is generally preferable to bond
and earth all metallic sheaths or armour at both ends of each run (solid bonding). Induced
voltages in the sheaths or armours should be reduced to low values and the sheaths or armours
may be used as a protective conductor, in parallel if necessary with an additional conductor.
Currents circulating in the armour or sheath reduce the current-carrying capacity of the cables;
where the reduction is not acceptable, sheaths and armours may be bonded at one end of the run
(single-point bonding) and a separate protective conductor is then necessary.

11.1.6 TN-S system

The earthing system below 1000 V a.c should be designed as a PME system with separate
protective conductor (TN-S) (see Figure 69). The neutral conductor from the source (Example:
transformer / Generator) should be connected to the MET (called as system referencing
conductor or neutral earthing conductor) by duplicate connections if they are outdoor and not
protected against corrosion and mechanical damages. One connection is enough if it can be
made reliable and protected against corrosion and mechanical damaged. A modern method is
to make neutral earthing is within the switchgear assembly. For multiple sources, operating in
parallel, the system referencing conductor should be located within the switchgear assembly. In
the case of solidly earthed system, the earth fault current can be of the order of symmetrical
short-circuit current and hence the thermal design of the protective conductors should depend
upon the maximum symmetrical short circuit current available.
11.1.7 Safety Consideration

From the point of safety consideration, the objective is to reach a low earth fault loop impedance
as explained in 11.1.2. An earth grid connected to protective equipotential bonding helps in
reducing shock voltage and reduce the fault loop impedance, support as an earth electrode,
create a reference plane and help in improving EMC. The extent and size of earth grid will
always depend upon the disposition of plant electrics. The layout should be done in such a
manner as to keep the earth continuity resistance of the grid to a minimum value. In the case of
a protective multiple earthing system where the neutral of the supply transformer and the non-
current carrying metal parts in the system are interconnected by the common earthing
arrangement, which is designed for the prospective fault current, there is no reason to design
the earth grid assuming that total earth fault current is dissipated through the earth grid. Hence,
while designing the earth grid, the thermal capability of the earth electrodes need be verified
only with reference to the portion of the current which may take the earth return path. In the
normal range between 10 and 1000 m, this division of current is found to be in between 80
percent and 20 percent for design purposes. Based upon the above philosophy, the following
guidelines for the design of an earthing system in industrial and commercial consumers
premises are issued.

11.1.8 Connections to MET

All the non-current carrying metal parts of the equipment, switchboards, etc, will be solidly
connected to MET and to the earth grid by duplicate earth connections of adequate size. The
transformer neutral should be solidly connected to this earthing arrangement as explained in
11.1.6.

1. Neutral and Body of the source is bonded together. See 5.3.3 for more information. Neutral
earthing of source (to MET) through a link suitable to disconnect during insulation resistance
test. Neutral shall be earthed only once. Neutral shall be insulated throughout the installation
after the bonding in Sl no 1.
2. Body earthing of source (to MET).
3. Protective bonding to extraneous conductive parts.
4. Protective and functional earthing at the installation are bonded to MET.
5. Grid interconnecting neutral of the source and earthing arrangement at the installation (gid
reduces the fault loop impedance).

Figure 69 TN-S System with Interconnected Protective Conductor and Earth Grid as Protective
Multiple Earthing (PME).

Figure 70 - Example of A Three-Dimensional Earthing Arrangement in A Multifloor Building

Consisting of Bonding Network Interconnected with The Earth Termination System.
Figure 71 Example of Earthing Arrangement and Lightning Protection Zones in A Multifloor
Building with Transformer (Inside or Close to The Structure).
Key:

1. Building with meshed network of the reinforcement

2. HV tower inside the plant
3. Standalone equipment (example: Transformer / DG).
4. Cable tray

Figure 72 Meshed Earth Termination System of an Industrial Premise.

11.1.9 Earth Termination

The earth termination system can be soil embedded or concrete embedded. The soil embedded
earth grid should run at a minimum depth of 500 mm below ground level. If the installation is
below foundation, preferred location is above PCC. When bare conductors are used as earth
grid in soil or in concrete, this can also be assumed to dissipate the fault/lightning current to the
mass of the earth. For calculating the effective value of the earth resistance of this grid, this grid
can be treated as a horizontal electrode and the standard formula can be applied for calculating
the earth resistance of the grid, if required. Additionally,
11.1.9.1 For entries of external services above the surface of the ground, the bonding bars should
be connected to a horizontal ring conductor inside or outside the outer wall bonded to the down
conductors of the LPS and to the metallic reinforcement of the structure, if applicable.

11.1.9.2 The ring conductor should be connected to the steel reinforcement, and other metallic
elements of the structure, at regular intervals, typically every 5 m to 10 m.

11.1.9.3 In buildings principally designed for computer centres, communication buildings and
other structures requiring a low level of LEMP induction effects, the ring conductor should be
connected to the reinforcement, typically every 5 m.

11.1.9.4 For the bonding of external services in reinforced concrete buildings which contain
large communication or computer installations, and for structures where EMC demands are
severe, an earthed ground plane with multiple connections to the metallic reinforcement of the
structure or other metallic elements should be used.

11.1.10 Resistance Requirement of Earth Grid

The continuity resistance of the earth return path through the earth grid should be maintained
as low as possible and shall not be greater than the continuity resistance of protective earthing
conductor in the respective section of electrical installation.

11.1.11 Premises with HV and LV Earthing

11.1.11.1 In the case of HV/EHV substations within the premise, a global earthing system shall
be implemented.

NOTE — The prevailing fault current IF can be obtained from the supplier, verified based on 5.1. The current
to earth electrodes IE can thus be calculated. See 10.2.5 and 10.5.2.

11.1.11.2 Earthing arrangement and earth electrode of HV supply and associated equipment
including LV side of Transformer may be made as in Figure 73 and Figure 74.

11.1.11.3 Large buildings with substantial amount of electronics (Example: Datacentre) shall
adopt additional EMI mitigation measures as a part of earthing (see 11.8 and Annex B).
 Protective Conductor 1. Protective conductor with incoming cable (if
provided) or cable armour.
Foundation earth 2. MET / Protective earthing conductor along
electrode with cable (in duplicate for redundancy if
required)
Earth Electrode 3. Earth electrode as a foundation ring
4. Extended ring for potential grading (if
necessary).
Earthing Conductor
5. HV switchgear
Vertical earth rods (if
6. Transformer
provided)
7. LV Generator
8. LV Main panel
9. LV panel
NOTES

1 System reference connection (Neutral earthing) of LV side of the Transformer or DG can be

placed inside LV main panel.
2 Each source need system referencing connection (Neutral earthing) in case of change over.
3 If systems are working in parallel (synchronized), there shall be only one system referencing
connection.
1.

Figure 73 Common HV/LV Earthing to Supply Multiple Buildings (TN-S)

 Protective Conductor1. Protective conductor with incoming cable
(if provided) or cable armor.
Foundation earth 2. MET / Protective conductors along cable (in
electrode duplicate for redundancy if required)
Earth Electrode 3. Earth electrode as foundation ring
4. Extended ring for potential grading (if
Earthing Conductor required)
Vertical earth rods if5. HV switchgear
provided 6. Transformer
7. LV Generator
Foundation earth 8. LV Main panel
electrode 9. LV panel
10. Main building
NOTE — System reference connection (Neutral earthing) of LV side of the Transformer or DG
can be placed inside LV main panel.
Each source need system referencing connection (Neutral earthing) in case of change over
If systems are working in parallel (synchronized), there shall be only one system referencing
connection

Figure 74 Common HV/LV Earthing with Transformer Inside the Building (TN-S)

11.2 Medical Establishments

11.2.1 General

11.2.1.1 In the context of this Clause ‘installation’, means any combination of interconnected
electrical equipment within a given space or location intended to supply power to electrical
equipment used in medical practice.

11.2.1.2 As such, some parts of the installation may be present in the patient’s environment,
where potential differences that could lead to excessive currents through the patient, must be
avoided. For this purpose, a combination or earthing of equipment and potential equalization in
the installation is essential. Requirements in IS 17512 applies. Provisions of 11.1 of this code
(industrial and commercial installations) applies in all locations, 11.2 applies additionally in
Group 1 and Group 2 medical locations.

11.2.1.3 TN-S system with a separated protective conductor shall be used in medical
establishment, except in group 2 medical location (see 6.2.3.1, Figure 8 and 7.4.2).
 NOTE — Any earthing as explained in clause 6.3.1 and Figure 23 to Figure 25 is a noncompliance to this
code of practice.

11.2.1.4 Earth fault loop impedance

A low resistance paths for the return of earth fault current is necessary, and the earth fault loop
impedance should be sufficiently low as to allow the operation of every protective device,
within the disconnection time given in 7.4.1.8 and 7.4.1.9.

NOTE — Maintaining low Earth fault loop impedance in each circuit is a mandatory requirement in CEA
safety regulations.

11.2.1.5 Protective equipotential bonding

Every building shall have protective equipotential bonding by interconnecting the exposed and
extraneous conductive parts (See 7.2.1, 7.4.8.3, Figure 31, Figure 75 and Figure 76). The
maximum allowed fault voltage shall be limited based on the location.

NOTE — Maintaining protective equipotential bonding is a mandatory requirement in CEA safety regulations.

11.2.1.6 Proper coordination shall be ensured between the architect, building contractor, the
electrical designer and the user on the various aspects of installation design. The necessary
special features of installations shall be ascertained before using the facility with reference to
Table 31 and Table 32.

NOTES

1 Biomedical equipment installers may demand dedicated earth electrodes for sensitive equipment. This
demand is a violation of standards, hence they are not be entertained. Such equipment needs an individual
bonding to the common earth terminal of the location. (Example: equipotential bonding bus bar of the
location). Any earthing made as explained in clause 6.3.1 and Figure 23 to Figure 25 is a noncompliance to
this code of practice.

2 Class 1 Medical Electrical equipment (ME) as per IS 13450-1 can operate with a potential up to 230 V
between Neutral Conductor (N) and Protective Earthing Conductor (PE). Functional earthing of ICT
equipment shall be made based on the requirements of ISO/IEC 30129. All protective and functional
earthing conductors should be connected to one single MET.

11.2.2 Classification of Locations in Medical Establishments.

11.2.2.1 Medical locations are classified into Group 0, Group 1 and group 2.

NOTES

1 Group 0 are medical location where no applied parts are intended to be used.

2 Group 1 are medical location where applied parts are intended to be used externally or invasively to
any part of the body, except where Group 2applies.

3 Group 2 are medical location where applied parts are intended to be used in applications such as
intracardiac procedures, operating theatres and vital treatment where discontinuity (failure) of the
supply can cause danger to life.

11.2.2.2 The following additional provisions shall be required, in group 1 and group 2 medical
locations:
 a) Additional requirements concerning protective conductors and protective devices to
restrict continuous voltage differences.
b) Restriction of voltage differences by supplementary equipotential bonding in group 1
and group 2 locations. During the application of equipment with direct contact to the
patient, at least a potential equalized zone around the patient shall be provided with a
patient centre bonding bar to which the protective and functional earth conductors of
the equipment are connected. All accessible extraneous conductive parts in the zone
shall be connected to this potential equalization bar as shown in Figure 76.
c) The permissible touch voltage in group 1 and group 2 medical locations are 25 V a.c.
or 60 V d.c. This voltage can be maintained by supplementary equipotential bonding
(See Figure 76).
d) Restriction of the potential equalization zone around one patient, meaning practically
around one operation table or around one bed in an intensive care room.
e) If more than one patient is present in an area, connection of the various potential
equalization centers to a central potential equalization bush, which should preferably
be connected to the protective earth system of the power supply for the given area. In
its completed form, the equipotential bonding network may consist partly of fixed and
permanently installed bonding and partly of a number of separate bonding which are
made when the equipment is set up near the patient. The necessary terminals for these
bonding connection should be present on equipment and in the installation.
f) Restriction of the duration of fault voltage by the application of RCD’s.
g) Continuity of power supply to certain equipment in the case of a first fault to earth by
application of medical IT systems for group 2 medical locations.

NOTE — Additional safety measures are required besides earthing described in this Clause. These cover fire
safety, safety supply systems and interference suppression. Reference shall be made to NEC 2023 (SP 30).
 1 = Heating / Air condition 12 = Antistatic Grid R, Y, B = phase conductors
pipes 13 = Bonding for PME (shown in red, yellow green)
2 = Water supply 14 = Main Distribution N = neutral conductors
3 = Gas supply Board (shown in black colour)
4 = Distribution board 15 = Water meter PE = protective conductor
5 = General ward 16 = Gas meter SBB = Supplementary
6 = Hospital bed 17 = Waste water Bonding Bar
7 = Metal pipes (water, 18 = Transformer M = Class II ME equipment.
oxygen, etc) 19 = MET SRC = System Referencing
8 = Group 2 medical location 20 = Down Conductor of Conductor
9 = Insulation monitoring LPS
device 21 = Foundation earth Chassis earth (5020)
10 = Medical isolating 22 = Busbar trunking All protective conductors are
transformer
11 = Socket outlet
SRC = Neutral earthing of Transformer through a disconnectable link – Preferably inside
Main Distribution Board

Figure 75 Example of an Electrical Installation in A Medical Establishment

11.2.3 Safety Provisions

11.2.3.1 Safety measures from the point of view of earthing are divided into a number of
provisions as given in Table 31.

11.2.3.2 Provision P0 shall be applicable to all buildings containing medically used rooms.
Provision P1 shall be applicable for all medically used rooms.

Other requirements of Table 31, need not be complied with, if:

a) a room is not intended for the use of medical electrical equipment, or

b) patients do not come intentionally in contact with medical electrical equipment during
diagnosis or treatment, or
c) only medical electrical equipment is used which is internally powered or of protection
Class II.

The rooms mentioned under (a), (b) and (c) may be, for example, massage rooms, general
wards, doctor’s examining room (office, consulting room), where medical electrical equipment
is not used.

Table 31 Safety Provisions

(Clause 11.2.3)

SI Provisions Principal Requirement Installation Measures

No.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) P0 Duration of touch voltage TN-S, TT or IT system (see
restricted to a safe limit note1)
ii) P1 As P0 but additionally, Touch Additional to P0 Supply
voltages in patient environment system with additional
restricted to a safe limit requirements for protective
earthing, etc
iii) P2 As P1 but additionally, Additional to P1:
Resistance between extraneous Supplementary
conductive parts and the equipotential bonding
protective conductor busbar of
the room not exceeding 0·1 Ω
iv) P3 As P1 or P2 but additionally, As P1 or P2: Measurement
Potential difference between necessary,
exposed conductive parts and the corrective action possibly
protective conductor busbar not necessary
exceeding 10 mV in normal
condition.
v) P4 As P1 or P2. Additional Additional to P1 or P2:
protection against electric shock Residual current
by limitation of disconnecting operated protective device
time
vi) P5 Continuity of the mains supply Additional to P1, P2 or P3:
maintained in case of a first medical IT systems for group
insulation fault to earth and 2 medical locations
currents to earth restricted
NOTE — TT system may be used in small premise with Low Voltage supply from DISCOM, provided
fault protection is achieved by RCD as explained in 7.5.4.
11.2.3.3 Guidance on the application of the provisions are given in Table 31.

Table 32 Examples of Medical Locations and Their Group Classification

Group
Class
SI No. Medical location
Class E
0 1 Class C
2 >0.5s ≤15
≤0.5 s
s
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (8)
i) 1. Massage room x x x
ii) 2. Bedrooms x
iii) 3. Delivery room x xa x
iv) 4. ECG, EEG, EHG room x x
b
v) 5. Endoscopic room x x xb
vi) 6. Examination or treatment x x X
room
vii) 7. Urology room xb x xb
viii) 8. Radiological diagnostic and x x
therapy room
ix) 9. Hydrotherapy room x x
x) 10. Physiotherapy room x x
a
xi) 11. Anaesthetic area x x x
a
xii) 12. Operating theatre x x x
a
xiii) 13. Operating preparation room x x x x
a
xiv) 14. Operating plaster room x x x x
a
xv) 15. Operating recovery room x x x x
a
xvi) 16. Heart catheterization room x x x
xvii) 17. Intensive care room x xa x
a
xviii) 18. Angiographic examination x x x
room
xix) 19. Haemodialysis room x x
xx) 20. Magnetic resonance x x
imaging (MRI) room
xxi) 21. Nuclear medicine x x
a
xxii) 22. Premature baby room x x x
xxiii) 23 Intermediate care unit x x x
(IMCU)
a
Life-support ME equipment and specific luminaries, such as operating
or procedure lights, that need power supply within 0.5 s or less.
b
Not being an operating theatre.
 15 Alarm device for the insulation monitoring device
(example)
16 Operating table (electrically driven)
17 Operating lamp
18 Ampere meter for special safety
19 X-ray equipment
20 Sterilizer
21 Residual-current protective device
22 MET: Main Earthing Terminal of the location
23 Sub-MET: Sub earthing terminal of the location
24 Medical IT system
25 Group 2 medical location
26 Terminals for equipotential bonding
1. Feeder from the main service entrance 27 Operation (button)
2. Distribution of the floor supply system 28 Warning (button)
3. Operating theatre distribution panel
4. Safety supply system 29 Green
5. Medical isolating transformer 30 Red
6. Insulation Monitoring Device 31 Buzzer
7. Special safety supply system E1 32 Stop button for buzzer
8. Special safety supply system E2 33 Test button
9. Central heating PE = Protective Earthing conductor/bar
10. Metal window-frame MET: Main Earth Terminal (example: for bonding of
11. Metal cabinet for instruments exposed conductive parts)
12. Meal washing-basin and water supply Sub-MET = Sub MET (example: for bonding of
13. Ceiling stand with outlets for gas supply extraneous conductive parts
14. Ceiling stand with mains socket outlets (with L1, L2, L3 = phase conductors
terminals for equipotential bonding, enclosure N = neutral conductor
connected to the protective, conductor bar)
All protective and functional earthing system
and conductors there of including connections
are shown in green colour
 Figure 76 Schematic Presentation of Protective Conductors and Equipotential Bonding in
Operating Theatres

11.2.4 Additional Safety Measures.

11.2.4.1 The conventional touch voltage limit shall be 50 V a.c. in general locations. and 25 V
a.c in group 1 and group 2 medical locations.

11.2.4.2 Protective conductors inside a group 1 and group 2 medical locations shall be insulated,
their insulation shall be coloured green-yellow.

11.2.4.3 Exposed conductive parts of equipment being part of the electrical installation used in
the same room shall be connected to a common protective conductor.

11.2.4.4 An MET shall be provided near the main service entrance. Connections shall be made
to the following parts by bonding conductors as shown in Figure 75 to MET and Sub MET:

a) lightning down conductor.

b) earthing systems of the electric power distribution system.
c) the central heating system.
d) the conductive water supply line.
e) the conductive parts of the wastewater line.
f) the conductive parts of the gas supply.
g) the structural metal framework of the building, if applicable.

11.2.4.5 Each location shall have its own MET, which should have adequate mechanical and
electrical properties and resistance against corrosion.

11.2.4.6 The impedance (Z) between the MET and each connected protective conductor contact
in wall sockets or terminals should not exceed 0·2 Ω, if the rated current of the overcurrent
protective device is 16 A or less. In case of a rated current exceeding 16 A, the impedance
should be calculated using the formula:

25
𝑧= 𝛺
𝐼𝑎

in all cases Z shall not exceed 0·2 Ω .

Where,

Ia is the current in amperes (A) causing the automatic operation of the disconnecting
device within the time specified in 7.4.1.8, and 7.4.1.9. When a residual current
protective device (RCD) is used this current is the residual operating current providing
disconnection in the time specified in 7.4.1.8, or 7.4.1.10.

NOTE — The measurement of the protective conductor impedance should be performed with an ac current
not less than 10 A and not exceeding 25 A from a source of current with a no-load voltage not exceeding 6 V,
for a period of at least 5 s.

11.2.4.7 The cross-sectional area of every protective conductor shall satisfy the conditions for
automatic disconnection of supply and be capable of withstanding mechanical and thermal
stresses caused by the prospective fault current during the disconnection time of the protective
device. The minimum cross-sectional area of protective conductors and earthing conductors
shall satisfy 7.3.

11.2.4.8 It may be necessary to run the protective conductor separate from the phase conductors,
in order to avoid measuring problems when recording bioelectric potentials.

11.2.5 Supplementary Equipotential Bonding in group 1 and group 2 medical locations.

11.2.5.1 In order to minimize the touch voltage, all extraneous conductive parts shall be
connected to MET of the location (sub-MET).

11.2.5.2 Connections shall be provided from the Sub-MET to extraneous conductive parts such
as pipes for fresh water, heating, gases, vacuum and other parts. Additionally, in operating
theatres, intensive care rooms, heart catheterization rooms and rooms intended for the recording
of bioelectrical action potentials, all parts should be connected to the Sub-MET via direct and
separate conductors.

11.2.5.3 The following requirements shall be fulfilled:

a) The resistance between extraneous conductive parts and the equipotential bonding bar
shall not exceed 0.1Ω.

NOTE — The measurement of this impedance should be performed with a current not less than 10 A and not
exceeding 25 A from a source of current with a no-load voltage not exceeding 6 V, for a period of at least 5 s.

b) All equipotential bonding conductors shall be insulated, the insulation being colored
green yellow.

NOTE — Insulation of the equipotential bonding conductors is necessary, to avoid loops by contact and to
avoid picking up of stray currents.

c) Equipotential conductors between permanently installed extraneous conductive parts

and the equipotential bonding bar shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than
4 mm2 copper or copper equivalent.

d) The equipotential bonding bar, if any, should have adequate mechanical and electrical
properties, and resistance against corrosion.

e) The conductors connected to the equipotential bonding bar shall be marked and shall
be similarly designated on drawings of the installation system.

f) The MET and Sub-MET in group 1 and group 2 medical locations shall be
interconnected with a conductor having a cross-sectional area of not less than 16 mm2
copper or copper equivalent.

g) Adequate number of Sub-MET other than MET those for protective conductor contact
or pins of socket outlets should be provided in each room for the connection of an
additional protective conductor of equipment or for reasons of functional earthing of
equipment.

11.3 Solar PV

11.3.1 General
TN or TT type electric system earthing, except TN-C is recommended in AC side of the PCE.
For any kind of system earthing, there shall be a system reference earthing when the solar PV
works in islanding mode, if necessary, to identify earth fault.

PV array configuration shall be permitted with or without functional (Active) d.c. earthing. For
d.c. side few configurations are explained in 11.3.2. d.c. earthing is generally carried out in the
PCE and the related control / monitoring is carried out as per the recommendation of the
manufacturer. For more information see IEC 63112. In all systems at d.c. side separate
protective conductor is necessary.

NOTES

1 TN-C system shall not be used,

2 Where there is no simple separation, a.c. side of the PCE shall be protected with a TYPE B RCD of 30
mA.
3 Connecting d.c. side earthing, a.c. side earthing and lightning protection earthing to separate earth
electrodes as shown in 6.3.1 is a noncompliance to this code of practice.

11.3.2 d.c. Side Earthing

Table 33 PV d.c. Configurations

d.c. Ref. Application Circuit Consequence on the Status of

Side Figure the PV Array
no
Un Figure a.c. side connected via a PCE floating
earthed 77 with a transformer inside of the
PCE
Figure AC side connected via a PCE Fixed by the status of the
78 without a transformer neutral or a line conductor of
the supply circuit
Earthed Figure a.c. side connected via a PCE Fixed to earth
79 with a transformer inside of the
PCE
Figure a.c. side connected via a PCE Fixed to earth
80 without a transformer inside of
the PCE but a transformer
outside of the PCE

Figure. 77 - Unearthed PV Array Connected to the a.c. Side Via A PCE With Transformer
 Figure. 78 - Unearthed PV Array Connected to the a.c. Side Via A PCE Without A
Transformer

Figure. 79 - Earthed PV Array Connected to the a.c. Side Via A PCE With Transformer

Figure 80 Earthed PV Array Connected to the a.c. Side Via A PCE Without a Transformer,
The Transformer Being Separate

11.3.3 Earthing Components

11.3.3.1 Earthing cables and strips

All d.c. and a.c. protective conductors, earthing conductors and earth electrodes installations
shall comply with this code.

Following best practices shall be followed.

a) Earthing arrangement shall confirm Figure 81 or Figure 82. For TN-S type system
additional SPD between N and PE may be required.
 b) The d.c. earthing conductor should be rated for 1.56 times the maximum short circuit
current of the PV string/sub-array/array. (25 percent design safety factor and 25
percent irradiance factor).
c) Min. 6 mm2 copper conductor, outdoor rated cable shall be used for PV module frame
interconnections.
d) Earth electrodes shall satisfy Table 26.
e) System referencing conductor shall be introduced as per Annexure A, where operation
in islanding mode is permitted.

NOTE — Connecting d.c. side earthing (example: frame of module), a.c. side earthing, PCE and lightning
protection earthing to separate earth electrodes as shown in 6.3.1 is a noncompliance to this code of practice.

Figure 81 Typical Earthing, Equipotential Bonding and Spd’s in A Solar PV System with TN-C-
S LV Supply from Discom

Figure 82 Typical Earthing, Equipotential Bonding and SPD’s in A Solar PV System with TT
LV Supply From Discom
a) pile driven foundation, single row b) earth screw foundation, two parts

Figure 83 (A and B) - Connection of Module Tables to The Earthing System for Pile Driven
Foundations and Ground Screw Foundations.

Figure 84 Connection of Module Tables to The Earthing System for Strip Foundations
 Figure 85 Earthing Concept and Arrangement of The SPD’s for A Ground Mounted System

11.4 Potentially Hazardous Areas

11.4.1 Earthing and Bonding

11.4.1.1 Earthing should be in accordance with the relevant clauses of this Code. All earthing
arrangement shall be mechanically and electrically made and secured by using adequate
metallic fitting. The earthing arrangement shall be sufficiently strong and thick, and the portions
of conductor which are likely to be corroded or damaged shall be well protected. Earthing
Arrangement shall not reach a hazardous high temperature due to the earth fault current.

11.4.1.2 Portable and transportable apparatus shall have protective earthing conductor as a core
of flexible power supply cable. The PE conductor and the metallic screen, wherever provided
for the flexible cable, should be bonded to the appropriate metalwork of the apparatus and to
earthing pin of the plug. The continuity resistance shall be ensured as recommended in the
product standard.

11.4.1.4 Efficient bonding should be installed where protection against stray currents or
electrostatic charges is necessary (see 7.2 to 7.5).

11.4.1.5 Earthing and bonding of pipelines and pipe racks

Unless adequately connected to earth elsewhere, all utility and process pipelines should be
bonded to a common conductor by means of earth bars or pipe clamps and connected to the
earthing system at a point where the pipelines enter or leave the hazardous area except where
conflicting with the requirements of cathodic protection. In addition, it is recommended that
steel pipe racks in the process units and off-site areas shall be bonded at every 25 m.
11.4.2 Permissible Type of Earthing System

11.4.2.1 Guidance on permissible power systems is given below:

a) If TN system earthing is used, it shall be type TN-S (with separate neutral N and
protective conductor PE) in the hazardous area, that is the neutral and the protective
conductor shall not be connected together, or combined in a single conductor, in the
hazardous area. The transition from TN-C to TN-S, shall happen in the non-hazardous
area.
b) If TT system earthing is used in Zone 1, it shall be protected with a residual current
device even if it is a safety extra-low voltage circuit (below 50 V). TT system earthing
is not permitted in Zone 0. Where the earth resistivity is high, such a system may not
be acceptable.
c) For an IT power system, an insulation monitoring device should be used to indicate
the first earth fault. However, equipment in Zone 0 shall be disconnected
instantaneously in case of the first earth fault, either by the monitoring device or by a
residual current operated device.
d) For power systems at all voltage levels installed in Zone 0, due attention should be
paid to the limitation of earth fault currents in magnitude and duration. Instantaneous
earth fault protection shall be installed.
e) It may also be necessary to provide instantaneous earth fault protection devices for
certain applications in Zone 1.

11.4.2.2 Potential equalization

To avoid dangerous sparking between metallic parts of structures, potential equalization is

always required in all Zones (Zone 0 and Zone 1 and Zone 2 areas). Therefore, all exposed and
extraneous conductive parts shall be connected to the main or supplementary equipotential
bonding system.

The bonding system may include protective conductors, conduits, metal cable sheaths, steel
wire armouring and metallic parts of structures but shall not include neutral conductors. The
conductors for supplementary equipotential bonding shall have a conductance corresponding to
a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 of copper.

For additional information, see relevant clauses of this Code.

However, there are certain pieces of equipment, for example, some intrinsically safe apparatus,
which are not intended to be connected to the equipotential bonding system.

11.4.2.3 Earthing explained in 6.3.1 (see fig 23 to 25) are not allowed.

NOTE — Demanding different earth electrode with certain resistance values (Example: 4 Ohms for electrical
systems and metallic structures, 7 Ohms for storage tanks, 1 Ohm for main earth grid, and bonding connections
between joints in pipelines and associated facilities and 2 Ohms for each electrode to the general mass of the
earth) are violation of the safety measures recommended in this code.

11.4.3 Earthing of Conducting Screens

Where a screen is required, except as in a) through c) below, the screen shall be electrically
connected to earth at one point only, normally at the non-hazardous area end of the circuit loop.
This requirement is to avoid the possibility of the screen carrying a possibly incendive level of
circulating current in the event that there are local differences in earth potential between points
that may be available for connection to earth.

If an earthed intrinsically safe circuit is run in a screened cable, the screen for that circuit shall
be earthed at the same point as the intrinsically safe circuit which it is screening.

If an intrinsically safe circuit or sub-circuit which is isolated from earth is run in a screened
cable, the screen shall be connected to the equipotential bonding system at one point.

Special cases:

a) If there are special reasons (for example when the screen has high resistance, or where
screening against inductive interference is additionally required) for the screen to have
multiple electrical connections throughout its length, the arrangement of Figure 86 may
be used, provided that
1) the insulated earth conductor is of robust construction (normally at least 4 mm2 but 16
mm2 may be more appropriate for clamp type connections);
2) the arrangement of the insulated earth conductor plus the screen are insulated to
withstand a 500 V a.c. rms or 700 V d.c. as applicable insulation test from all other
conductors in the cable and any cable armour;
3) the insulated earth conductor and the screen are only connected to earth at one point
which shall be the same point for both the insulated earth conductor and the screen,
and would normally be at the non-hazardous end of the cable;
4) the insulated earth conductor shall be installed in positions that will prevent them
being exposed to mechanical damage, to corrosion or chemical influences (for
example solvents), to the effects of heat and to the effects of UV radiation Where
exposure of this nature is unavoidable, protective measures, such as installation in
protecting conduit, shall be taken or appropriate cables selected (for example, to
minimize the risk of mechanical damage, armoured, screened, seamless aluminium
sheathed, mineral insulated metal sheathed or semi-rigid sheathed cables could be
used). Where cables are subject to other conditions example: vibration or continuous
flexing, they shall be designed to withstand that condition without damage.
5) the inductance/resistance ratio (L/R) of the cable, installed together with the insulated
earth conductor, additional requirements shall be established (see IEC 60079-14
clause 16.2.2.5).
b) If the installation is effected and maintained in such a manner that there is a high level
of assurance that potential equalization exists between each end of the circuit (i.e.
between the hazardous area and the non-hazardous area), then, if desired, cable screens
may be connected to earth at both ends of the cable and, if required, at any interposing
points.
c) Multiple earthing through small capacitors (for example 1 nF, 1500 V ceramic) is
acceptable provided that the total capacitance does not exceed 10 nF.
 FIGURE 86 EARTHING OF CONDUCTING SCREENS

11.5 Construction Sites

See NEC 2023 part 3 section 5.

11.6 Mines and Quarries

11.6.1 General

Earthing arrangement for mines and quarries are based on the broad principle that exposed
conductive parts of apparatus should be efficiently connected to equipotential bonding system
or otherwise protected by other equally effective means to prevent danger resulting from a rise
in potential on these conductive parts.

In some mines and certain quarries (quarries include open cast coal sites), in addition to shock
risk, there are also dangers associated with the possible presence of flammable gas and
explosive materials. In these cases, supplementary equipotential bonding with local earthing
may be necessary to avoid incendive sparks caused by static electrical discharge.

11.6.2 Power System Earthing

If the supply is from a transformer (or generator) a TN-S system shall be used. Protective
equipotential bonding shall be maintained.

If the supply transformer (or generator) is distant from the consumer’s premises, provision of
TN-C-S system with PME shall be ensured. The earth terminal should be made available by the
DISCOM through a protective conductor in the supply cable or overhead line.
 NOTE — The supply cable sheath and armouring may serve the purpose of this protective conductor provided
that they are bonded to the supply source earth, for example:. neutral or mid-voltage point and meet the
conductivity requirement as per 7.3.2.

If the provision of such an earth terminal is impracticable, a TT system shall be established, and
fault protection is achieved by an RCD.

In all cases, the aim should be to maintain protective equipotential bonding and automatic
disconnection of supply, irrespective of site conditions, for example, soil/rock resistivity.

The mains supply system neutral or mid-voltage points should be earthed at one point only and
in the case of mines, this should be on the origin of installation or near the source. The mains
supply system neutral connection to earth may either be a solid connection or via an impedance
to limit the prospective earth fault current and in the case of impedance earthed systems, suitable
earth fault protection is provided, that is, capable of detecting the restricted flow of fault current.

11.6.3 Apparatus Earthing at Coal and Other Mines

Every metallic covering of any cable should be earthed. See 7.3 for minimum cross sectional
area of conductors for protective equipotential bonding.

Cables incorporating steel tape armour (unless supplementing steel wire), aluminium armour or
copper sheathed (mineral insulated) cables are unsuitable for use below ground. Generally
single or double, steel wire armoured cables are used.

The following are excluded from the requirements to be earthed, when used solely at the surface
of the mine:

a. any lamp holder, that is, efficiently protected by a covering which is insulated or earthed
and made of fire resisting material;
b. any hand held tool that is double insulated;
c. any portable apparatus working at less than 50 V d.c. or 30 V a.c.; and

In the case of electrical circuits used for control, interlocking and indicating instruments, the
regulations allow one pole of the auxiliary transformer secondary winding serving these circuits
to be connected to earth as an alternative to mid-point earthing.

Below ground, where self-contained mobile apparatus is used, for example, battery
locomotives, these should be operated as totally insulated systems (to avoid sparks between
metal parts of the apparatus). Warning systems should be provided to give an indication of
leakage to frame.

At places below ground, where flammable gas may occur in quantity to indicate danger (usually
deemed to be places where 0.25 percent flammable gas could be present in the general body of
air), then limitation of the maximum prospective earth fault current is called for on power
systems working at voltages between 250 V and 1200 V (the range of voltage normally used
for coal winding machinery served by flexible trailing cables). In these cases, the maximum
prospective earth fault current should be limited (normally by impedance earthing) to 16 A at
voltages between 250 V and 650 V and to 2 A at voltages between 650 V and 1200 V. In either
case, the switchgear controlling the circuit should be able to detect and cut-off the supply of
electricity with less than one-third of the maximum prospective earth fault current flowing.
 NOTE — The ratio between maximum prospective earth fault current and protection settings is known as the
‘tripping ratio’. In practice it has been found that in order to take account of voltage depressions occurring
when a short circuit coincides with an earth fault the tripping ratio should be set to at least 5: 1. IT system is
allowed at any place in a mine, including places where flammable gas may occur, provided that a transformer
is used which has a means to cut off the supply and prevent danger should a breakdown occur between the
primary and secondary windings. In these systems the maximum prospective earth fault current does not
usually exceed 2 A and switchgear is set to trip at less than one-fifth of this value.

Signalling and telephone circuits may be connected to earth where safety is enhanced, and the
method of connection is approved by the concerned authority for that type of apparatus.

11.6.4 Apparatus Earthing at Miscellaneous Mines and Quarries

Every cable at a miscellaneous mine or quarry operating at voltages exceeding 250 V d.c. or
125 V ac, other than flexible cables and those not required to be covered by insulating material,
should be protected throughout by a suitable metallic covering that has to be earthed. Metallic
covering does not include any metals other than iron or steel, therefore cables with armouring
or metallic cover made of soft metals such as aluminium and copper (MICC cable) cannot be
used on these premises where the voltages exceed 250 V d.c. or 125 V a.c..

Where flexible cable is used to supply portable apparatus at voltages exceeding 250 V d.c. or
125 V a.c., such cable should be protected by one of the following:

a) A metallic covering (flexible wire armouring) that encloses all the conductors and
having a conductance of not less than that of the largest current carrying conductor.
b) A screen of wires to enclose all the conductors (collectively screened type cable)
having a conductance not less than that of the cross-sectional area of conductor.
c) A screen of wires arranged to individually enclose each conductor (individually
screened type cable), other than the earth conductor. Cables of this construction for
use in quarries have to be approved by HSE. For miscellaneous mines, the screens
should each have a conductance of not less than that of 6 mm2 cross-sectional area
copper conductor.

Where flexible cables are used with portable apparatus at quarries and the size of the conductor
is such as to make the use of one multicore cable impracticable, single core cables of such
construction and bonded in such a manner as HSE may approve, may be used.

In all the above cases efficiency of automatic disconnection shall be verified before putting the
device into service.

11.7 Street Lighting and Other Electrically Supplied Street Furniture

NOTE — Street furniture includes fixed lighting columns, illuminated traffic signs, bollards and other
electrically supplied equipment permanently placed in the street.

See NEC 2023, part 5 section 1

11.8 Data Centres

Safety and reliability requirements of DATA CENTRES shall conform IS/IEC/ISO 22237-1.
The following additional subjects should be considered for the compliance.

11.8.1 Foundation
The layout of the building’s foundation and structure shall incorporate the earthing and bonding
system, where required, as protection against lightning and electromagnetic interference. The
design of the building’s earthing system can vary according to the required Lightning Protection
Level and to the site parameters including the soil resistivity.

11.8.2 Requirement of Telecommunication Bonding

The telecommunications bonding system within the computer room and telecommunications
spaces of the data centre shall be in accordance with the local mesh bonding requirements of
ISO/IEC 30129.

Where lightning protection is required, it shall be in accordance with the IS/IEC 62305 series
applied with reference to ISO/IEC 30129.

A TN-S system with MESH-BN shall be ensured.

11.8.3 Protective Measures

Concerns about co-sites for a DATA CENTRE and a high-voltage substation include proximity,
co-earthing network and shared accommodation. Proximity mainly involves the dangerous
effects on the DATA CENTRE of a resistive-coupling EPR when an earth fault happens in the
high-voltage substation. For a DATA CENTRE that has a common earthing network or a
common building room with the high-voltage substation, concern mainly involves the
dangerous effects on the DATA CENTRE from the resistive coupling of EPR during an earth
fault at high-voltage substation and the dangerous effects on servers of the magnetic field
distribution generated by the high-voltage substation.

11.8.3.1 DATA CENTRE that is in close proximity, but not co-earthed with a high-voltage
substation.

The following protective measures should be considered when a DATA CENTRE is in close
proximity, but not co-earthed with a high-voltage substation.

a) Adequate separation between a high-voltage substation and a DATA CENTRE should

be ensured.
b) Measures should be taken to maximize the distance between the earthing networks of
the DATA CENTRE and the high-voltage substation.
c) The clearing time during an earth fault for the high-voltage substation should be less
than 0.35 s.
d) All safety measures for fault protection (see 7.4.8.1), touch potential (see Figure 5) and
transfer potentials (see Table 28) shall be considered.
e) To decrease the magnitude of current flowing into the earthing network during an earth
fault in a high-voltage substation, the high-voltage power line shall have continuous
earth conductor in the form of shield wire in an overhead line or as a shield (armouring)
of in a cable, where this continuous fault return path is earthed at both ends. The
electrical continuity of the shield or metallic sheath should be ensured.
f) Insulation segments should be inserted at the endpoints of pipes connecting various
metallic pipes into and out of the station.
g) For power cables from a high-voltage substation to a DATA CENTRE outside the
earthing network, it is recommended that non-armoured cables be used to prevent fault
current flowing into the DATA CENTRE earthing network.
 h) Optical fibre cables should be used as the communication and control cables between a
high-voltage substation and a DATA CENTRE. It is recommended that optical fibre
cables without metallic trace wires be used.
j) Optical fibre cables should be used between the decentralized server room
communication systems. It is recommended that optical fibre cables without metallic
trace wires be used.

11.8.3.2 DATA CENTRE is co-earthed with high-voltage substation.

In the case where a DATA CENTRE is co-earthed with high-voltage substation, the following
measures should be taken.

a) The natural earthing electrodes of all buildings on the site should be mutually connected
to form a single global earthing network.
b) The clearing time during an earth fault for the high-voltage substation should be less
than 0.1 s.
c) To decrease the magnitude of current flowing into the earthing network when an earth
fault occurs in a high-voltage substation, the high-voltage power cable should be buried
with its shield or metallic sheath earthed at both ends. The electrical continuity of the
shield or metallic sheath should be ensured.
d) Insulation segments should be inserted at the endpoints of pipes connecting various
metallic pipes in and out of the station.
e) Optical fibre cables should be used as the communication and control cables between a
high-voltage substation and a DATA CENTRE. It is recommended that optical fibre
cables without metallic trace wires be used.
f) Optical fibre cables should be used between the decentralized server room
communication systems. It is recommended that optical fibre cables without metallic
trace wires be used.

12 MAINTENANCE OF EARTHING ARRANGEMENT AND EARTH

ELECTRODES.

12.1 Maintenance of Protective Earthing

12.1.1 General

It is recommended that periodical verification of all earthing arrangement should be carried out.
Verification consists of Inspection and Testing. Records of such verification should be
maintained at least until the next verification.

Testing of earthing arrangement consists of continuity of protective conductors including

connections to MET and connections from MET to earth electrodes if any. The resistance of the
conductors for protective earthing and protective bonding are measured. The continuity
resistance of conductors shall not exceed the values mentioned in Annex D.

12.1.2 For Low Voltage Installations

12.1.2.1 Measurement of resistance of earth electrodes shall be carried out for lightning
protection with Type A earthing according to IS/IEC 62305.
 NOTE — Type A earthing according to IS/IEC 62305-3, in locations where soil resistivity ≤ 500 Ω-m vertical
earth rods of 2.5 meters or horizontal conductors of 5 meters can be used, if not a maximum value of 10 Ω to
be maintained.

12.1.2.2 Earth fault loop impedance of Low Voltage supply lines shall be measured to comply
the regulations (see clauses 4.1 and 4.2).

12.1.2.3 Where RCD's are employed, its operation shall be verified by an RCD tester.
Additionally, a verification on the associated earthing arrangement is also necessary.

12.1.3 For High Voltage Installations

12.1.3.1 Impedance to earth and continuity resistance measurements of all connected exposed
and extraneous parts should be performed in new and existing installations, where earth grids
are installed to limit touch, step potentials and to avoid abnormal operating conditions due to
fault currents (See 13.4). The values considered in design shall always be maintained.

12.2 Maintenance of Earth Electrodes

12.2.1 For value of earth electrode resistance see 8.1.2.

12.2.2 For all installations where Global Earthing System is implemented, a touch/step voltage
measurement should be carried out once in two years.

12.2.3 Substations and Generating Stations (Other than Global Earthing System)

12.2.3.1 Records shall be kept of the initial resistance of substation and generating station earth
electrodes and of subsequent tests carried out.

12.2.3.2 Normally annual measurement of earth electrode resistance of substation shall be

carried out but local circumstances in the light of experience may justify increase or decrease
in this interval but it should not be less than once in two years.

12.2.3.3 Periodical visual inspection of all earth connections, wherever available, shall be
carried out to ensure their rigidity and other signs of deterioration.

12.2.3.4 In rural substations, particularly those connected to overhead high-voltage and low-
voltage lines, greater reliance should be placed on the electrode system, and therefore facilities
for testing the resistance of the electrode to general mass of earth, annually or as required by
clause 4.5.2.2 of IS732 should be provided.

12.2.3.5 Where installations are earthed to a metal sheath of the supply cable, it shall be verified
periodically that the earth-fault loop impedance is in a satisfactory state.

12.2.3.6 Where an installation is earthed to a cable sheath which is not continuous to the
substation neutral (that is, there is an intervening section of overhead line without earth wire),
a supplementary electrode system may be necessary. The adequacy of the electrode system shall
be checked initially by an earth-fault loop impedance test.

12.2.3.7 Keeping the neighbouring soil to the earth electrode in moist situation, may be helpful
in certain substations and generating stations, however other fault protective measures shall be
ensured in locations other than substations and generating stations including substations
belonging to a consumer (example an industrial and commercial buildings).
12.2.3.8 Any abnormality observed during inspection shall be corrected to required level.

13 MEASUREMENT OF SOIL RESISTIVITY AND EARTH ELECTRODE.

13.1 Measurement of Soil Resistivity

13.1.1 Resistivity of The Soil

13.1.1 The resistivity of the earth varies within extremely wide limits, between 1 and 10,000
ohm-metres (Ω-m). The resistivity of the soil at many places has been found to be non-
uniform. Variation of the resistivity of the soil with depth is more predominant as compared to
the variation with horizontal distances. Wide variation of resistivity with depth is due to
stratification of earth layers. In some sites, the resistivity variation may be gradual, where
stratification is not abrupt. To design the most economical and technically sound earthing
system for large stations (Example: EHV stations, generating stations), it is necessary to obtain
accurate data on the soil resistivity and on its variation at the station site. Resistivity
measurements at the site will reveal whether the soil is homogeneous or non-uniform. In case
the soil is found uniform, conventional methods are applicable for the computation of soil
resistivity when the soil is found non-uniform, either a gradual variation or a two-layer model
may be adopted for the computation of soil resistivity.

13.1.1.2 The resistivity of soil varies over a wide range depending on its moisture content. It is,
therefore, advisable to conduct soil resistivity tests during the dry winter or dry summer season
in order to get conservative results.

13.1.2 Test Locations

13.1.2.1 In the evaluation of soil resistivity for substations and generating stations, at least eight
test directions shall be chosen from the centre of the station to cover the whole site. This number
shall be increased for very large station sites of the test results obtained at various locations
show a significant difference, indicating variations in soil formation.

13.1.2.2 In case of transmission lines, the measurements shall be taken along the direction of
the line throughout the length approximately once in every 4 km.

13.1.3 Principle of Tests

13.1.3.1 Wenner’s four electrode method is recommended for these types of field investigations.
In this method, four electrodes are driven into the earth along a straight line at equal intervals.
A current I is passed through the two outer electrodes and the earth as shown in Figure 87 and
the voltage difference V, observed between the two inner electrodes. The current I flowing into
the earth produces an electric field proportional to its density and to the resistivity of the soil.
The voltage V measured between the inner electrodes is, therefore, proportional to the field.
Consequently, the resistivity will be proportional to the ratio of the voltage to current. The
following equation holds for:

4sπR
𝜌= 2s 2s ….(7)
1+ −
2
√s +4ⅇ2 √4s +4ⅇ2
2
where

ρ is the resistivity of soil in ohm-metre (Ω-m),

s is the distance between two successive electrodes in metres,
R is the resistivity meter reading in ohms (Ω), and
E is the depth of burial of electrode in metres.

13.1.3.2 If the depth of burial of the electrodes in the earth is negligible (in case where depth of
burial is less than l/20th of spacing) compared to the spacing between the electrodes. Resistivity
meter normally used for these tests comprise the current source and meter in a single instrument
and directly read the resistance. The most frequently used resistivity meter is the four-terminal
resistivity meter shown in Figure 87. When using such a resistivity meter, the resistivity may
be evaluated from the modified equation as given below:

ρ = 2πsR….(8)

where,

ρ is the resistivity of soil in ohm-metres (Ω-m),

s is the distance between successive electrodes in metres, and
R is the resistivity meter reading in ohms (Ω).

13.1.4 Test Procedure

13.1.4.1 At the selected test site, in the chosen direction, four electrodes are driven into the earth
along a straight line at equal intervals, s. The depth of the electrodes in the earth shall be of the
order of 10 to 15 cm. The resistivity meter is placed on a steady and approximately level base,
the link between terminals P1 and C1 opened and the four electrodes connected to the
instrument terminals as shown in Figure 87. An appropriate range on the instrument is thus
selected to obtain clear readings avoiding the two ends of the scale as far as possible. Resistivity
is calculated by substituting the value of R thus obtained in the Equation (8). In case where
depth of burial is more than l/20th of spacing, Equation (7) should be used instead of Equation
(8).

13.1.4.2 Correction for potential electrode resistance

13.1.4.2.1 In cases where the resistance of the potential electrodes (the two inner electrodes) is
comparatively high, a correction of the test results would be necessary depending on its value.
For this purpose, the instrument is connected to the electrodes as shown in Figure 88. The
readings are taken as before. The correction is then effected as follows.

13.1.4.2.2 Let the readings of the resistivity meter be Rp with the connections as shown in
Figure 88 and the electrode spacing in metres. If the uncorrected value of soil resistivity is ρ’
and the resistance of the voltage circuit of the instrument used to obtain R (as indicated inside
the scale cover of the meter) is Rv, the corrected value of the earth resistivity would be:

𝜌′ × (𝑅𝑣 + 𝑅𝑃 )
𝜌=
𝑅𝑣

13.1.5 Testing of Soil Uniformity

During the course of above tests, it would be desirable to get information about the horizontal
and vertical variations in earth resistivity over the site under consideration for the correct
computation of the resistivity to be used in the design calculations. The vertical variations may
be detected by repeating the tests at a given location in a chosen direction with a number of
different electrode spacings, increasing from 2 to 250 m or up to the boundary of the
site/substation, preferably in the steps 2, 5, 10, 15, 25 and 50 m or more. If the resistivity
variations are within +/- 30 percentage, the soil in the vicinity of the test location may be
considered uniform. Otherwise a curve of resistivity versus electrode spacing shall be plotted
and this curve further analysed to deduce stratification of soil into two or more layers of
appropriate thickness or a soil of gradual resistivity variation. The horizontal variations are
studied by taking measurements in various directions from the centre of the station.

13.1.6 Computation of Earth Resistivity of Uniform Soil

When the earth resistivity readings for different electrode spacings in a direction is within +/-
30 percent, the soil is considered to be uniform. When the spacing is increased gradually from
low values, at a stage, it may be found that the resistivity reading is more or less constant
irrespective of the increase in the electrode spacing. The resistivity for this spacing is noted and
taken as the resistivity for that direction. In a similar manner, resistivities for at least eight
equally spaced directions from the centre of the site are measured. These resistivities are plotted
on a graph sheet in the appropriate directions choosing a scale. A closed curve is plotted on the
graph sheets jointing all the resistivity points plotted to get the polar resistivity curve. The area
inside the polar resistivity curve is measured and equivalent circle of the same area is found out.
The radius of this equivalent circle is the average resistivity of the site under consideration. The
average resistivity thus obtained may be used for the design of the earthing grid and other
computations and the results will be reasonably accurate when the soil is homogeneous
(see Figure 89).

Figure 87 Measurement of Soil Resistivity

Figure 88 Test Connection to Measure The Sum of The Potential Electrode Resistance
 FIGURE 89 POLAR CURVE

13.1.7 Two-Layer Soil Model

Where it is determined that a uniform soil model is not appropriate, two-layer models may be
used which are often good approximations of many actual soil structures. A two-layer soil
model consists of an upper layer of finite depth and with different resistivity than a lower layer
of infinite thickness. There are several techniques to determine an equivalent two-layer model
from apparent resistivity obtained from field tests. In some instances, a two-layer model can be
approximated by visual inspection of a plot of the apparent resistivity versus probe spacings.
Other methods are available including Sundes graphical method and the reflection method.
Computer programs are also available to the industry and may be used to derive two layer soil
models.

13.1.8 Multi-Layer Soil Model

Highly non-uniform soil conditions may be encountered. Such soil conditions could require the
use of multi-layer modelling techniques if an equivalent two-layer soil model is not feasible. A
multi-layer soil model may include several horizontal layers or vertical layers. Techniques to
interpret highly non-uniform soil resistivity could require the use of computer programs which
could also allow inclusion of volume resistivity blocks.

13.2 Measurement of Earth Electrode Resistance

13.2.1 Measurement of Earth Electrode Resistance Using an Earth Electrode Test Instrument

The following procedure may be adopted when measurement of the earth electrode resistance
is necessary.

NOTE — The measurement of earth electrode resistance is NOT to be carried out inside the substation
premises. It is be done from the edge of the substation.

An alternating current of a steady value is passed between the disconnected earth electrode, E,
and a temporary auxiliary earth electrode, H, placed at a distance from E such that the resistance
areas of the two electrodes do not overlap.

A second temporary probe electrode, S, which may be a metal spike driven into the earth, is
then inserted half-way between E and H, and the voltage drop between E and S is measured. In
most cases S should be placed at a distance of approximately 20 m from E and H. The electrodes
may be arranged in a linear formation (see Figure 90) or triangular formation (see Figure 91) to
suit available space.

The resistance of the earth electrode is then the voltage between E and S, divided by the current
flowing between E and H, provided there is no overlap of the resistance areas.

To check that the resistance of the earth electrode is a true value, two further readings are taken
with the second electrode, S, moved approximately 10 percent of the linear distance between E
and H from the original position. If the three results are substantially in agreement, the mean of
the three readings is taken as the resistance of the earth electrode E. If there is no such
agreement, the tests are repeated with the distance between E and H increased.

1
E S H

2 3 4

5 5

Figure 90 Electrodes Arranged in Linear Formation

 1

E S H

5 5

2 4

Figure 91 - Electrodes Arranged in Triangular Formation

Key
1) Earth electrode test instrument according to IEC 61557-5
2) Earth electrode resistance RE
3) Temporary probe electrode resistance (voltage) RS
4) Temporary auxiliary probe earth electrode resistance (current) RH
5) Distance between electrodes

Figure 7 Measurement of The Earth Electrode Resistance

13.2.2 Measurement of Earth Electrode Resistance Using Current Clamps

NOTE — The measurement of earth electrode resistance is NOT to be carried out inside the substation premises.
It is be done from the edge of the substation.

The following procedure may be adopted as an alternative method for the measurement of the
earth resistance.

With reference to Figure 92 the first clamp induces a measuring voltage U into the loop, the
second clamp measures the current I within the loop. The loop resistance is calculated by
dividing the voltage U by the current I.

As the resulting value of parallel resistances R1 … Rn is normally negligible, the unknown

resistance is equal to, or slightly lower than, the measured loop resistance.

The voltage and current coils may be in individual clamps separately connected to an instrument
or in a single combined clamp.
This method is directly applicable to TN systems and within meshed earthing of TT systems.

In TT systems, where only the unknown earth connection is available, the loop can be closed
by a temporary connection between earth electrode and neutral conductor (quasi TN system)
during measurement.

To avoid possible risks due to currents caused by potential differences between neutral and
earth, the system should be switched off during connection and disconnection.

It should be noted that the values of resistance obtained using this method will typically be
higher than those obtained using method explained in 13.2.1 because of the earth loop
measurement.

L1
L2
L3
N
PEN 2
PE

1 5 6 7
8

Key

1) RB - resistance of the earth electrode of the supply

2) Main earthing terminal test link
3) Voltage clamp of the test instrument
4) Current clamp of the test instrument
5) RA - resistance of the earth electrode of the installation
6) R1 - resistance of the additional earth electrode of the installation
7) Rn - resistance of the additional earth electrode of the installation
8) Test instrument according to IEC 61557-5

Figure 92 Measurement of Earth Electrode Resistance Using Current Clamps

13.2.3 Measurement of Earth Electrode Resistance Using a Fault Loop Impedance Test
Instrument

Measurement of the earth fault loop impedance at the origin of the electrical installation may
be carried out with a test instrument according to IEC 61557-3.
The test should be performed on the live side of the main switch with the supply to the
installation switched OFF and with the earthing conductor temporarily disconnected from the
MET.

The test instrument should be set to a range appropriate for the value of earth fault loop
impedance likely to be expected for a given system earthing arrangement (typically in the region
of 0 Ω to 20 Ω).

The test instrument should be connected as shown in Figure 93. Where any doubt exists the
instrument should be connected as described in the manufacturer’s instructions.

Only a small proportion of the measured earth fault loop impedance is derived from those parts
of the loop other than the electrode and so the result obtained from this test can be taken as a
reasonable approximation of the earth electrode resistance.

The test result should not exceed the product of 50 V / IΔn (see 7.4.3).

It is important that the earthing conductor is reconnected to the MET of the installation before
the supply is reinstated.

L1
L2
L3
N
2
PE
3

1 4 5

Key

1) RB - resistance of the earth electrode of the supply

2) MET - Main earthing terminal
3) Test link to be temporarily disconnected from the main earthing terminal (MET) during
testing
4) RA - resistance of the earth electrode for the installation
5) Earth fault loop impedance test instrument according to IEC 61557-3

Figure 93 Measurement of The Earth Electrode Resistance Using an Earth Fault Loop
Impedance Test Instrument.
13.3 Measurement of Earth Fault Loop Impedance

13.3.1 The current, which will flow under earth fault conditions and will thus be available to
operate the overload protection, depends upon the impedance of the earth return loop. This
includes the line conductor, fault, earth-continuity conductor and earthing lead, earth electrodes
at consumer’s premises, and substations and any parallel metallic return to the transformer
neutral as well as the transformer winding. To test the overall earthing for any installation,
depending for protection on the operation of overcurrent protective devices, for example, fuses,
it is necessary to measure the impedance of this loop under practical fault conditions. After the
supply has been connected, earth fault loop impedance measurement shall be done by the use
of an earth loop impedance tester as per IEC 61557-3.

13.4 Measurement of Resistances to Earth and Impedances to Earth

13.4.1 General

These resistances and impedances may be determined in different ways. Which method is
suitable depends on the extent of the earthing system and the degree of interference (see 13.6).
NOTE — Attention is given to the fact that while the measurements and preparations are carried out, even
when disconnected, but especially during the measurement, on and between earthed parts (for example
between tower and lifted-off earth wire) touch voltages exceeding permissible limit values could occur.
Examples for suitable methods of measurements and types of instruments are:
13.4.2 Fall-of-Potential Method with The Earth Tester

This instrument is used for earth electrodes and earthing systems, for example single rod earth
electrodes, strip earth electrodes, earth electrodes of overhead line towers with lifted off or
attached earth wires, medium voltage earthing systems and separation of the low-voltage
earthing systems. The frequency of the used alternating voltage should not exceed 150 Hz.
Earth electrode under test, probe and auxiliary electrode shall lie on a straight line as far apart
as possible. The distance of the probe from the earth electrode under test should be at least 5
times the maximum extension of the earth electrode under test (in measuring direction), but not
less than 20 m; the distance of the auxiliary electrode is at least 8 times the maximum extension,
but not less than 40 m.
13.4.3 Heavy-Current Injection Method

This method (see Figure 94) is used particularly for the measurement of the impedance to earth
of large earthing systems. UE can be calculated from this measurement.
By applying an alternating voltage of approximately above system frequency between the
earthing system and a remote earth electrode, a test current IM is injected into the earthing
system, leading to a measurable potential rise of the earthing system.
Earth wires and cable sheaths with earth electrode effect, which are operationally connected to
the earthing system, shall not be disconnected for the measurement.
The modulus of the impedance to earth is given by
𝑈𝐸𝑀
𝑍𝐸 =
𝐼𝑀 × 𝑟
Where,
 UEM is the measured voltage between the earthing system and a probe in the area of the
reference earth (remote earth) in Volts
IM is the measured test current in Amperes
r is the reduction factor of the line to the remote earth electrode (see 10.16). The
reduction factor may be determined by calculation or by measurement. For the
reduction factor for overhead lines without earth wires and cables without shield or
armouring is r = 1.

Earth wires of lines which run on a separated support parallel to the test line between earthing
system and remote earth electrode shall be taken into account if they are connected to the
earthing system under test and the remote earth electrode. If a cable with low-resistance metal
sheath, earthed on both sides, is provided, then the greatest part of the test current will return
via the sheath. If there is an insulating covering around the sheath it can be suitable to disconnect
the earthing of the sheath.
However, for cables which perform the function of an earth electrode, the earthing of the metal
sheaths shall not be disconnected.
The distance between the tested earthing system and the remote earth electrode should be large
enough to ensure separate zones of influence, example: 5 km for extended earthing systems,
depending on local conditions. Local conditions are example: size of interconnected earthing
system, soil layer configuration.
NOTE — For small earthing systems smaller distances can be sufficient.
The test current should be, as far as possible, selected at least so high that the measured voltages
(earth potential rise as well as touch voltages, referred to the test current) are greater than
possible interference and disturbance voltages. This is generally ensured for test currents above
50 A, example: depending on elimination method, size of impedance to earth, resulting earthing
current of test circuit, noise level. Also, smaller or higher test currents could be suitable.
The internal resistance of the voltmeter should be at least 10 times the resistance to earth of the
probe.
Possible interference and disturbance voltages shall be eliminated (see 13.6).
13.4.4 Determination from The Individual Resistances

If the earthing system consists of separate earth electrodes, which practically do not interfere
with each other, but which are interconnected via connecting conductors, for example earthing
conductors or earth wires of overhead lines, then the impedance to earth ZE can be determined
in the following way:
The resistance to earth of each earth electrode is determined for disconnected connecting
conductors by the fall-of-potential method, the impedances of the connecting conductors are
calculated, and the impedance to earth is determined from the equivalent circuit of the resistance
to earth and the impedances of the connecting conductors.
Where the resistance to earth RES (Figure 94) of the designed meshed earth grid has to be
determined, the measurement of the test current and the other currents leaving this earth grid,
Example: by earth wire overhead lines or cable sheathes, allows to obtain the current flowing
through the resistance to earth RES. In general, vector measurements of these currents are
required.
Key
IM Test current (generally only the modulus of the voltage and the current is
determined)
IEM Current to earth during the measurement (in this case not directly measurable)
rE Reduction factor of the line to the remote earth electrode
RES Resistance to earth of the mesh earth electrode
RET Resistance to earth of the tower
UE Earth potential rise during measurement
UvT Prospective touch voltage during measurement

Figure 94 Example for The Determination of The Impedance to Earth by The Heavy-Current
Injection Method

13.5 Measurements of Touch Voltage and Prospective Touch Voltage

Measurements of the touch voltage UT or prospective touch voltage UvT are always based on
heavy current injection method, as described in 13.4. The measurements of touch voltages shall
be done at relevant locations within and outside the installation.

In order to get a rapid overview, the prospective touch voltages UvT can be measured by a
voltmeter with a high internal resistance (example > 1 MΩ) and a probe driven about 10 cm
deep. As these prospective touch voltages UvT are always higher than the touch voltages UT, the
measured values of the prospective touch voltages can be checked against the permissible touch
voltage (UTp; see Figure 5). This is often sufficient and additional measurements of touch
voltages are not required.

The conditions for measuring the touch voltages are the following:
a) The measuring electrode(s) for simulation of the feet shall have a total area of 400 cm2
and lie on the earth with a minimum total force of 500 N, shall be placed at a distance
of 1 m from the exposed part of the installation, and for concrete or dried soil it shall be
on a wet cloth or water film. An alternative measuring electrode is to use a probe driven
at least 20 cm deep into the soil.
 b) The measuring electrode(s) for simulation of the hand is a tip-electrode and shall be
capable of piercing a paint coating (not insulation) reliably.
c) One terminal of the voltmeter is connected to the hand electrode, the other terminal to
the hand or feet electrode, depending on the local conditions.
d) The human body shall be simulated by a resistance of 1 kΩ.

The procedures shown are based on a given fault duration tf and a test current. The measured
voltages on site shall be converted from test current level to fault current level. Depending on
the design of the earthing systems different types of touch voltage measurement could be
necessary.

For a design without additional resistances the following touch voltage measurements apply
(Figure 95, Figure 96):

a) Measurement of UvT according to Figure 95

If the criteria UvT ≤ UTp, then the requirement is fulfilled. If not, then measurement Figure 96
shall be done

b) Measurement of UT according to Figure 96

If the criteria UT ≤ UTp, then the requirement is fulfilled. If not, then the design shall be improved
or additional safety measures may be taken (see Figure63).

For a design with additional resistances the following touch voltage of measurements apply
(Figure 97, Figure 98):

Either

c) Measurement of UT according to Figure 97

If the criteria UT ≤ UTp, then the requirement is fulfilled. If not, then the design shall be improved
or additional safety measures may be taken (see Figure 63).

or

d) Measurement of UvT according to Figure 98

If the criteria UvT ≤ UvTp, then the requirement is fulfilled. If not, then the design shall be
improved or additional safety measures may be taken (see Figure 63).
 Figure 95 Measurement of Prospective Touch Voltage UVT

NOTE — An alternative measuring is to use a probe driven up to 20cm deep into soil.

Figure 96 Measurement of Touch Voltage UT

Figure 97 Measurement of Touch Voltage Ut with Additional Resistance.

 NOTE — This open circuit measurement of UvT measured without the voltage across the additional
resistance RF2 is for comparison with the limit of UvTp’

Figure 98 Measurement of Prospective Touch Voltage Uvt with Additional Resistance.

13.6 Elimination of Interference and Disturbance Voltages for Earthing Measurements

For the determination of the earth potential rise (see 13.4b) distortions of the measured values
due to interference and disturbance voltages of every type (for example inductive interference
of the test circuit by parallel systems in operation) may occur. Examples for methods proved
useful in practice for the elimination of such disturbing effects are:
13.6.1 Beat method
In this case a voltage source (for example emergency generating set) is used, whose frequency
deviates some tenth of a Hertz from the system frequency. The voltages caused by the test
current are added vectorially to possible disturbance voltages Ud, whose modulus and phase
angle for sufficiently short duration of a measuring cycle may be regarded as constant. Due to
the asynchronous superposition the pointer or the display of the voltmeter swings between a
maximum value U1 and a minimum value U2. The voltage caused by the test current is
determined by
𝑈1 + 𝑈2
𝑈= for 2 ∗ 𝑈𝑑 < 𝑈1
2

𝑈1 − 𝑈2
𝑈= for 2 ∗ 𝑈𝑑 > 𝑈1
2

𝑈1
𝑈= for 2 ∗ 𝑈𝑑 = 𝑈1
2

13.6.2 Polarity Reversal Method

For this purpose, a system synchronous voltage source (transformer) is used, whose voltage is
reversed 180° electrically in the phase angle after a dead interval. During the flow of the test
current the occurring voltages Ua before the reversal, Ub after the reversal and the disturbance
voltage Ud for the test current switched off are measured. For a sufficiently short duration of a
measuring cycle the possible disturbance voltages Ud is regarded as constant with respect to
modulus and phase angle. The disturbance voltage contains mainly the contribution of the test
current frequency. Because of vectorial relations the voltage caused by the test current is
calculated by

𝑈𝑎2 + 𝑈𝑏2
𝑈=√ − 𝑈𝑑2
2
13.6.3 Vector Measurement
Long measuring leads should be laid rectangularly to the test line, as far as possible. If this is
not possible because of space conditions, the part of the voltage induced in the measuring line
by the test current can partly be eliminated by vector measurement equipment.
13.6.4 Blocking of Direct Currents
If the disturbance voltages have high direct voltage contents, a voltmeter which blocks the direct
voltage could be required.
13.6.5 Frequency Selective Method
A test current with a frequency above or below the power frequency is injected. The voltages
and currents are measured frequency selective.
13.7 Continuity Resistance Measurement

Measuring the continuity resistance (impedance) and comparing the result with the requirement
of the particular application is an essential part of protective and functional earthing. The test
equipment shall be capable of measuring in a four-lead configuration (two voltage measuring
leads and two current injecting leads) as illustrated in Figure 99 and Figure 100. The injected
current depends upon the application and in most cases, should be about 10 A. (See respective
standard for more information)

NOTE — Example of some of the applications are

1 IS 732 and NEC 2023 (SP 30): Resistance of all protective conductors including the joints shall be verified.
Maximum allowed resistance depends on the size and length of protective conductor. Maximum allowed
resistance of conductors are include in NEC 2023 (SP 30) part 1 section 17, annex B. Where copper
conductors are used, they shall be class 1 / Class 2 conductors.

2 IS/IEC 60439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies: The resistance between protective
earthing terminal to exposed conductive parts shall not exceed 0.1 Ω, measured with a meter of at least 10
Amps.

3 See 11.2.4.6 and 11.2.5.3 for requirements of continuity resistance in medical locations.

4 Continuity resistance measurements are also required for electrical equipment such as Lifts, machines,
switchgear and controlgear assemblies, etc.

5 Lightning protection as per IS/IEC 62305-3: Maximum overall resistance of 0.2 Ω between the air-
termination system and the equipotential bonding bar or other connection to the structure’s (lightning) earth
network.

13.7.1 Continuity Resistance of Structures

The test equipment shall be capable of measuring in a four-lead configuration (two voltage
measuring leads and two current injecting leads) as illustrated in Figure 99. The injected current
depends upon the application and in most cases, should be at least 10 A. For Lightning
protection system, the test shall be carried out at diagonally opposite side between top and
bottom of the structure. See respective standard for expected continuity resistance values in
each case.

Key,
a current carrying test leads,
b voltage measuring test leads,
c bonding bar or earth network connection,
d connection to steel reinforcement rods,
e earth network connection.

Figure 99 Example of Measuring the Overall Continuity Resistance of Steel Reinforcement for
Ligtning Protection.

13.7.2 Continuity Resistance of Conductors

The test equipment shall be capable of measuring in a four-lead configuration (two voltage
measuring leads and two current injecting leads) as illustrated in Figure 100. The injected
current depends upon the application and in most cases, should be about 10 A. See respective
standard for expected continuity resistance values in each case.
 a current carrying test leads,
b voltage measuring test leads,
1 bonding bar (example: MET),
2 Bonding bar of a location or PE terminal of an equipment
PE conductor (sized as per Table 12) bonds 1 and 2. The continuity resistance of the conductor
including the joints is not more than then resistance of the conductor.

Figure 100 Example of Measuring the Continuity Resistance of Protective Conductor in an

Electrical Installation.
 ANNEX A
EARTHING OF MULTIPLE SOURCES
(Informative)

A-1 TN SYSTEM

The contents of this clause are related to any kind of Generating stations such as synchronous
machines, solar PV, wind etc.

NOTES

1 System with more than one source in TN system, refer IS732.

2 Other methods of multiple source system with changeover facility are explained in Figure 49 to Figure 52.

In the case of an inappropriate design of an installation forming part of a TN system with more
than one source some of the operating current can flow through unintended paths. These
currents can cause

a) Fire.
b) Corrosion.
c) electromagnetic interference.

Installations with more than one source shall be designed as to reduce the probability for current
in the protective earthing conductors under normal situation to a minimum, and shall comply
with the following:

a) no direct connection between the neutral point of the transformer and/or of the
generating sets and earth shall be established (see “1” in Figure A-1),
b) the neutral conductor connecting the neutral point of the transformer and/or generating
sets to the (main) distribution board shall be insulated and shall not be connected to any
current-using equipment (see “7” in Figure A1 and (see “7” and "10" in Figure A2),
c) only one connection between the interconnected neutral points of the sources and the
protective earthing conductor shall be provided in the installation. This connection shall
be located inside the distribution board (see “6” in Figure A-1 and 93),
d) the protective earthing conductor shall be connected to an earth electrode through the
MET (see “2" in Figure A-1 and Figure A-2),
e) downstream of the distribution board, the neutral conductor and the protective earthing
conductor shall not be interconnected. However, additional earthing of the protective
earthing conductor in the installation may be provided (see “5” in Figure A-1 and Figure
A-2);
f) circuits supplying distribution boards to which an internal source is connected, shall not
be provided with means for disconnection of the neutral conductor (fault protection
provided to the installation during the islanding mode the internal source may be
affected in case of disconnection of Neutral conductor);
g) in TN-C-S System with at least one local source and one external source a system-
referencing-conductor shall be installed as part of the electrical installation, see Figure
A-2.

Where an installation is extended with more generating sets, the protective measures shall
remain effective in all situations.
 4
1
L1 L2 L3 N PE

2
7
8

L1
L2
1 L3
N
PE

7
8 3 5

Key,

1) Local source.
2) Earth electrode for earthing of the system.
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part.
4) Distribution board.
5) Additional earthing which may be provided throughout the installation.
6) System-referencing-conductor.
7) Neutral conductor connecting the neutral point of the source to the distribution board.
8) Protective conductor for protective earthing of the source.

Figure A-1 Example of an a.c. TN-S Multiple Source System with Two Local Sources

Where an installation is supplied from an external distribution network (either public or private),
especially where the distribution network is originating from outside a building housing the
installation, special measures need to be considered:

a) The live conductors of the distribution network need to be provided with a system-
referencing-conductor within the installation itself (preferably at origin of
installation), independent of any electrical source being connected to it. The
distribution network cannot rely upon a system-referencing-conductor being installed
in one of the electrical installations as that installation might be disconnected.

b) An electrical installation with an internal source, intended to operate in island mode,

may be disconnected from the distribution network. Therefore, it cannot be assumed
that a live part of the installation is effectively connected to earth, as the system-
referencing-conductor in the distribution network might not be present.

Additional earthing of a protective earthing conductor may be provided throughout the

system/installation. PEN conductor additionally earthed at the distribution only (before origin
of installation). Therefore, where an electrical installation with an internal power source is
connected to a distribution network and supplied with a PEN-conductor, the neutral conductors
in the electrical installation reliably connected to the installation protective earthing conductor.

4 1
L1 L2 L3 N PE

9
7
8
6

2
10

L1
L2
11
L3
N
PE

3 5

Key,

1) Local source.
2) Earth electrode for earthing of the system in the installation.
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part.
4) Distribution board.
5) Additional earthing which may be provided throughout the installation.
6) System-referencing-conductor.
7) Conductor between the neutral point of the source and the distribution board.
8) Protective conductor for protective earthing of the source.
9) External source, example: from distribution network.
10) PEN conductor between external source and the distribution board.
11) Earth electrode for the earthing of the system at the external source (example: the
distribution network).

Figure A-2 Example of an a.c. TN-C-S Multiple Source System with One Local Source and One
External Source (Example: Public Power Supply Network)

A-2 TT SYSTEM

The contents of this clause are related to generating stations such as solar PV, wind etc.

NOTE — System with more than one source in TT system also refer IS732.
In the case of an inappropriate design of an installation forming part of a TN system with more
than one source some of the operating current can flow through unintended paths. These
currents can cause

a) Fire.
b) Corrosion.
c) electromagnetic interference.

Installations with more than one source shall be designed so as to reduce the probability of
current in the protective earthing conductors under normal conditions to a minimum, thus:

a) no direct connection between the neutral point of the transformer and/or the generating
sets and earth is established, see “1” in Figure A-3,
b) the neutral conductor connecting the neutral point of the transformer and/or the
generating sets to the (main) distribution board is insulated and is not connected to any
current-using equipment, see “7” in Figure A-3.
c) only one connection between the interconnected neutral points of the sources and an
earth electrode is provided. This connection is located inside the distribution board, see
“6” in Figure A-3,
d) the exposed-conductive-parts in the installation are earthed to a separate, independent
earth electrode.

Figure A3 shows an installation with two local sources only and the earthing electrode for the
system earthing and the earth electrode for the earthing of the exposed-conductive-parts are
electrically independent of each other.

1 4
L1 L2 L3 N
6

2
7
PE
8

L1
1 L2
L3
N
PE

7
8
3 5

Key,

1) Local sources within the electrical installation.

2) Earth electrode for earthing of the system (of the sources at only one point).
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part.
4) Distribution board.
5) Earthing of exposed-conductive-parts.
 6) System-referencing-conductor.
7) Conductor between the neutral point of the source and the distribution board.
8) Protective conductor for protective earthing of the source.

Figure A-3 Example of an a.c. TT Multiple Source System with Two Local Sources

Where an installation is supplied from an external distribution network, especially where the
distribution network is originating from outside a building housing the installation, the
principles laid out in Figure A-3 need to be amended because:

a) The live conductors of the distribution network need to be provided with a system-
referencing-conductor within the distribution network itself, independent of any
electrical installations being connected to it. The distribution network cannot rely upon
a system-referencing-conductor being installed in one of the electrical installations as
that installation might be disconnected.
b) An electrical installation with an internal source might be disconnected from the
distribution network (islanding mode). Thus, the installation cannot rely upon that the
system-referencing-conductor located somewhere in the distribution network is
always present, and consequently, a system-referencing-conductor needs to be
installed as part of the electrical installation.

A fundamental characteristic of a TT electrical system is that the earth electrode provided for
earthing of the system-referencing-conductor is electrically independent of the earth electrode
used for earthing of the exposed-conductive-parts. Therefore, where an electrical installation
with an internal source is connected to a distribution network, special measures need to be taken
as follows:

a) When the installation is disconnected from the external distribution network, the
installation is operated as an IT installation see Figure A-4, or
b) Where an earth electrode can be provided that is electrically independent from the one
used for earthing of exposed-conductive-parts, a system-referencing-conductor is
established when the installation is disconnected from the external distribution
network, enabling the neutral conductor of the installation to be connected to an earth-
electrode, see Figure A-5, or
c) Where an earth electrode that is electrically independent from the one used for earthing
of exposed-conductive-parts cannot be provided, and exposed-conductive-parts are
connected to the same earth electrode, a system-referencing-conductor is established
between the neutral conductor of the installation and the protective earthing
conductors used for protective earthing of exposed-conductive-parts when the
installation is disconnected from the external distribution network, and the installation
operates as a TN-system, see Figure A-6.
 4 1
L1 L2 L3 N PE

7
8

L1
9 L2
L3
12
N
PE

10

6 3
5
11

Key,

1) Local source.
2) Not used.
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part.
4) Distribution board.
5) Earthing of exposed-conductive-parts.
6) System-referencing-conductor.
7) Conductor between the neutral point of the local source and the distribution board.
8) Protective conductor for protective earthing of the source.
9) External source, Example: external electric power network.
10) Neutral conductor between external power source and distribution board.
11) Earth electrode for the earthing of the system at the external source (Example: the
distribution network).
12) Isolating switch for disconnection of the external supply.

Figure A-4 Example of An External Source in an a.c. TT Supply System with A Local Source in
an Installation Operating as an It Installation When Disconnected from The External Source.
 4 1
L1 L2 L3 N PE

7
6 8

L1
9
L2

12 L3
N
PE

10

6 3
5
11

Key,

1) Local source.
2) Earth electrode for earthing of the system when the external source is disconnected.
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part.
4) Distribution board.
5) Earthing of exposed-conductive-parts.
6) System-referencing-conductor.
7) Conductor between the neutral point of the source and the distribution board.
8) Protective conductor for protective earthing of the local source.
9) External source, Example: external electric power network.
10) Neutral conductor between external power source and distribution board.
11) Earth electrode for the earthing of the system at the external source (Example: the
distribution network).
12) Isolating switch for disconnection of the external supply, interlocked with a SRC
switching device.
NOTE — No. 2 and No. 5 are electrically independent.

Figure A-5 Example of an External Source in an a.c. TT Supply System with A Local Source in
an Installation Operating as A TT Installation When Disconnected from The External Source
 4 1
L1 L2 L3 N PE

7
6 8

L1
9
L2
L3
12
N
PE

10

6 3
5
11

Key,

1) Local source.
2) Not used.
3) Electrical equipment with exposed-conductive-part.
4) Distribution board.
5) Earthing of exposed-conductive-parts.
6) System-referencing-conductor.
7) Conductor between the neutral point of the source and the distribution board.
8) Protective earthing conductor for protective earthing of the local source.
9) External source, Example: external distribution network.
10) Neutral conductor between external power source and distribution board.
11) Earth electrode for the earthing of the system at the external source (Example: the distribution
network).
12) Isolating witch for disconnection of the external supply, interlocked with a SRC switching
device.

Figure A-6 Example of An External Source in an a.c. Tt Supply System with A Local Source in
An Installation Operating as an TN Installation When Disconnected from The External Source.
 ANNEX B

EARTHING AND BONDING: EMC IN BUILDINGS

(Informative)
B-1 General

Large buildings with substantial amount of electronics (example: Datacentre, Telecom

Installations, Hospitals) shall adopt additional EMI mitigation measures combined with
earthing.

NOTE — Functional earthing and bonding requirements of application where large concentration of electronic
systems are involved are to be carried out based on ISO/IEC 30129 and IEC 61000 (various parts).

Effect of conducted and radiated EMI inside a protected volume is reduced by shielding and
bonding measures. Every exposed and extraneous conductive parts including system earthing
of an electrically separated supply (Example: Neutral of an isolation transformer) shall be
bonded to the respective common bonding busbar of the zone. Use of shielded cables and their
routing also shall satisfy the requirement of shielding.

NOTE — Nonstandard practices explained in Figure 23 to Figure 25 is not permitted.

Key

H Radiated EMI
H1 AND H2: Reduced effect of EMI due to shielding
U, I : Conducted EMI
U1, I1 AND U2 I2: Reduced effect of EMI due to Filters/SPD and equipotential bonding
1, 2 AND 3: Filters / SPD

Figure B-1 Zonal Concept of Bonding and Shielding to Reduce Conducted and Radiated Effects
of EMI.
Common bonging network including protective earthing, functional earthing and grid-like
spatial shields consisting of metal reinforcement in the ceilings, walls and floors, the metal
framework, the metal roofs, and metal facades reduce the effect of radiated EMI.
 ANNEX C

PORTABLE EQUIPMENT FOR EARTHING OR EARTHING AND SHORT-

CIRCUITING FOR LIVE WORKING

(Informative)

C-1 General

Portable equipment for earthing or earthing and short-circuiting are used for temporary earthing
or earthing and short-circuiting of electrically isolated or de-energized a.c. and d.c. installations,
distribution and transmission networks, whether they are overhead or underground for all
voltages.

The equipment comprises an earthing or a short-circuiting or an earthing and short-circuiting

device and insulating component. An example is given in Figure C-1 A and Figure C-1 B. It
also covers:
a) earthing or short-circuiting or earthing and short-circuiting devices intended to be
installed with insulating means. An example of an earthing device is given in Figure C-
1 C;
b) separate components, such as conductive extension (see Figure C-1 C) or clamp or cable
with end fittings.

NOTE — Commonly these devices are also called as discharge rod / earthing rod / portable earthing rod.

The performance of equipment, devices and components used for this application shall consider
electro-dynamic and electro-thermal effects acting during short-circuit. The withstand
capability of the devices and equipment is expressed by their rated values of current, time and
peak factor. No rated voltage is given, but the geometrical dimensions of the equipment are also
linked to the voltage of the installation.

Examples of connection diagrams of earthing and short-circuiting devices are given in Figure
C-2 and Figure C-3. Associated usual lengths of cables are given in Table C-1.
 Figure C-1.A – Multi-Phase Equipment Figure C-1.B – Single-Phase
Equipment with Extension
Key
1. Earth clamp or rail clamp
2. Line clamp or contact line clamp
3. Short-circuiting cable(s)
4. Earthing cable(s)
5. Connecting cluster
6. Earth permanent connection point or rail
7. Line permanent connection point or overhead
contact line profile
8. Insulating element
9. Handle limit mark
10. Handle of earthing stick
11. Installation conductor or bar
12. Earthing system
13. End cap of stick
14. End fitting, permanent or detachable
15. Stick coupling, detachable for transport reasons
16. Conductive extension
LI Length of insulating element
LH Length of handle
LO Overall length of earthing stick and conductive
extension component

NOTES
Figure C-1.C – Earthing Device
1 The earthing and short-circuiting device comprises
NOTE — The same device can be used for components 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 16.
short-circuiting. 2 The earthing stick comprises components 8, 9, 10,
13, 14 and 15.
3 The earthing device comprises components 1, 2 and
4.
Figure C-1 Examples of Portable Equipment and Device for Installations, Network and Railway
Systems Application

Figure C-2.A Figure C-2.B

Figure C-2.C Figure C-2.D

Key
1 Earth clamp
2 Line clamp
3 Short-circuiting cable(s)
4 Earthing cable(s)
5 Connecting cluster
11 Installation conductor or bar
16 Conductive extension

HVA (Y) = High voltage distribution, Y Neutral system

LV (Δ) = Low voltage, Δ Neutral system
Figure C-2.E
 Figure C-2.F Figure C-2.G

Figure C-2 Connection Diagrams of Single and Multi-Phase Earthing and Short-Circuiting
Devices for Network Application
NOTE — Figure 99 shows examples only of connection arrangements. Not all are suitable for all situations.
It is the responsibility of the user to consider movement of connecting cables from magnetic forces. This has
to be considered prior to a final connection.

Table C-1 Usual Lengths of Earthing and Short-Circuiting Cables for Different Types of
Installations and Different Voltage Levels
 Key
1 Earth clamp
2 Line clamp
4 Earthing cable(s)
11 Installation conductor
17 Short-circuiting bar
18 Earthing cable connection

Figure C-3 Illustration of A Three-Phase Earthing And Short-Circuiting Device with Short-
Circuiting Bar and Earthing Cable(S) for Installation and Network Application.

C-2 REQUIREMENTS

C-2.1 General Requirement

The equipment, devices and components shall be designed to contribute to the safety of the
users provided the equipment, devices and components are used by skilled persons, in
accordance with safe methods of work and the instructions for use (see IEC 61230).

NOTES

1 According to safe procedure, electrical installations are considered energized or live until all protective
earthing and short-circuiting equipment have been properly installed.
2 Where applicable, national or regional regulations should be followed, such as live working or dead working
procedures.

Earthing and short-circuiting devices and their components shall be designed to withstand all
the mechanical stresses to which they are submitted during normal use. Devices and
components shall withstand the maximum short-circuit current, time and Joule integral for
which they are rated. They also should be designed in order to also accept transit current.

Earthing and short-circuiting devices, when installed according to instructions for use, shall be
able to withstand all stresses from short-circuit currents for which they are designed without
causing electrical, mechanical, chemical or thermal danger to persons.

NOTES

1 For indoor use and enclosed space, poisonous effects should be considered.
2 Highest possible temperature rise of cables is therefore adopted to reduce weight.
The manufacturer or the end assembler of all component parts of the equipment shall be
responsible to ensure that the equipment meets all the requirements of IEC 61230. Examples of
some of the requirements are listed form C-2.2 to C-2.10

C-2.2 Electrical Rating

Earthing and short-circuiting devices and their components shall be rated in terms of a short
circuit current (Ir), a time (tr) and the corresponding peak factor.

For d.c. applications, the values shall be the same.

Most common values for the rated time are the following:

3 s, 2 s, 1 s, 0.75 s, 0.5 s, 0.25 s, 0.1 s

The rating of the complete device shall be expressed as rated current in kiloamperes, as rated
time in seconds and rated peak factor (see C-2.9).

Separate components of the equipment shall be provided with their rated values and their
corresponding test configurations (see C-2.10).

C-2.3 Cables for Earthing and Short-Circuiting

Earthing and short-circuiting cables, whether they are made of aluminium or aluminium alloy
or made of copper, shall be designed to meet the performance requirement of their rating. Cables
shall have adequate mechanical, chemical, environmental and electrical properties to meet all
the requirements of this standard (see IEC 61230).

Cables for earthing and short-circuiting purposes shall be flexible. Cables shall be insulated for
mechanical protection.

The selection of the nature of the insulating material shall be made to fulfil chemical,
environmental and temperature conditions met in practice.

Earthing cables used on solidly earthed systems shall have the same cross-section as the
associated short-circuiting cables or bars.

Earthing cables used on non-solidly earthed systems may have a cross-section less than the
corresponding short-circuiting cables or bars, but never less than that given in Table 24. For
values in between those listed in the first column, the value of the second column shall be the
next higher size.

Table C-2 Minimum Cross-Section of Earthing Cables Related to The Cross-Section of The
Short-Circuiting Cables and/or Bars on Non-Solidly Earthed (Neutral) Systems.

Copper equipment cross-section of

Minimum copper equivalent cross-
SI No. short-circuiting cables and/or bars
section of earthing cables mm2
mm2
(1) (2) (3)
 i) 16 16
ii) 25 16
iii) 35 16
iv) 50 25
v) 70 35
vi) 95 35
vii) 120 50
viii) 150 50

C-2.4 Short-Circuiting Bars

Short-circuiting bars, whether they are made of aluminium or aluminium alloy or made of
copper, shall be designed to meet the performance requirement of their rating. They shall be
designed to be compatible with the installation on which they may be positioned. For this
purpose, dimensions of short-circuiting bars are not standardised (see IEC 61230).

C-2.5 Connections of Cables to Rigid Parts within Devices

Excellent fatigue resistance is required for the connections of cables to rigid parts (ferrules,
cable lugs, end fittings, clusters, etc.). The connections shall be made with great care to ensure
that the specified minimum characteristics of the cables are maintained. Soldered connections
are not permitted. The connection between end fittings and cables shall be protected from water
penetration. All attachments shall be protected against unintentional loosening. Single screws
or nuts, if used, shall always be combined with a device, for instance lock washers, that
positively prevents slippage or rotation. Ferrules, cable lugs, end fittings, etc., shall have at least
a current-carrying capacity equivalent to the associated cables (see IEC 61230).

C-2.6 Clamps

Clamps shall be designed to withstand the stresses for which they are rated. They shall provide
reliable contact performance and shall withstand the thermal and mechanical stresses produced
by the rated short-circuit currents. Line and earth clamps shall be suitable for the surface and
shape of the connecting point and shall permit easy and safe installation without causing damage
to clamps and without danger for personnel.

For tightening type, the manufacturer or the end assembler shall provide a rated torque which
shall be properly defined for the installation. For other types such as spring clamps they shall
not require an unusual force during the positioning and the removing operations.

Each different design of clamp of the same rating shall be type tested in the same conditions in
order to be considered equivalent.

C-2.7 Earthing and Short-Circuiting Device

The different components of an earthing and short-circuiting device may come from the same
manufacturer or from different manufacturers. The final assembly shall be made under the
responsibility of the manufacturer or the end assembler of the device. Manufacturer or supplier
of separate components shall give sufficient information in order to maintain the capability of
the complete device. The final quality of the device after assembly relies only on its end
assembler. An earthing and short-circuiting device can use cables in parallel as short-circuiting
or earthing cables.

For a multi-phase earthing and short-circuiting device, all cables exposed to a rated short circuit
current shall have the same cross-section, but the earthing cable(s) may have a smaller cross-
section in case of use on non-solidly earthed system.

C-2.8 Basic Safety Requirements for The Insulating Element(S) of The Insulating
Component

The insulating elements(s) of the insulating component (earthing stick or other type) shall make
use of insulating material(s) and shall be designed such as to provide basic electrical insulating
properties to permit the workers to establish the appropriate electrical insulation when installing
and removing the portable equipment for earthing or earthing and short circuiting.

The manufacturer shall identify the design parameters associated with the basic insulating
properties of the insulating element.

C-2.9 Marking

The marking shall be clearly legible. It shall be durable and not removable. Each device, cable
and clamp shall be marked properly. When a device is made of several components of different
rating, the marking of the rated values of the device shall be the minimum of the rated capacity
of each component and under the responsibility of the final assembler.

C-2.10 Instructions for Use

Each device or equipment shall be supplied with manufacturer’s written information and
instructions for use and care. These instructions shall be prepared in accordance with the general
provisions given in IEC 61477.

They shall include at least the following:

a) instructions for assembling the complete device or equipment.

b) limitation, if any, of the main characteristics such as rated values, temperature
conditions, indoor use, etc.
c) rated values (current, time and peak factor) of the separate components.
d) guidelines for maintenance, use, storage and inspection.
e) torque and force values and instructions for securing of auxiliary fasteners, which may
loosen during use.
f) information about the use of aluminium for cables, clamps and other parts of the devices,
if relevant.
g) statement that “the devices shall be removed from service after exposure to short-circuit
current”.
h) number of the relevant IEC standard and the year of publication with amendment, if any.

NOTE — Additional instructions for use may be requested by the customer.

 ANNEX D
MAXIMUM ALLOWED RESISTANCE OF PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

(Normative)

D-1 General

The continuity of protective conductors and connection to exposed-conductive-parts and

extraneous-conductive-parts, if any, shall be verified by a measurement of resistance. The
measurement includes the length of the protective conductor including its connections to the
earthing arrangement. Test instrument with higher test current (Example: 10 A) may provide
accurate values. Table D-1 provide the maximum allowed resistance value likely to be obtained
during continuity resistance measurement.

Table D-1 Specific Conductor Resistance R For Copper Wiring at 30 °C Dependent on The
Nominal Cross-Sectional Area S for Rough Calculation of Conductor Resistances

SI Nominal cross-sectional Specific conductor resistance

No. area S R at 30 °C
mm2 mΩ/m
(1) (2) (3)
i) 1.5 12.5755
2.5 7.5661
4 4.7392
6 3.1491
10 1.8811
16 1.1858
25 0.7525
35 0.5467
50 0.4043
70 0.2817
95 0.2047
120 0.1632
150 0.1341
185 0.1091
The specific conductor resistance values are related to a conductor
temperature of 30 °C. For other temperatures the conductor
resistances 𝑅𝜃 can be calculated by the use of the following formula:
𝑅𝜃 = 𝑅30 [1 + 𝛼(𝑇𝜃 − 𝑇30 )]
where  is the temperature coefficient (for copper  = 0,003 93)
 ANNEX E

CALCULATION OF EARTH FAULT LOOP IMPEDANCE

(Informative)
E-1 General

This informative annex may be used in low voltage installations. The Central Electricity
Authority (Measures Relating to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2023, regulation 43
made compliance of fault loop impedance mandatory in every circuit.

Earth Fault Loop Impedance of a circuit is the impedance of the earth fault current loop (phase-
to-earth loop) starting and ending at the point of earth fault. The earth fault loop impedance has
to be low enough to allow adequate earth fault current to enable automatic disconnection of a
protective device. This impedance is denoted by the symbol Z.

The earth fault loop comprises the following impedances, starting at the point of fault:

a) the protective conductor (from the equipment to MET).

b) the MET.
c) for TN systems, the metallic fault return path from the installation to the earthed point
of the source (typically the neutral). The impedance through earth electrodes in this case
is considerably higher and not consistent, hence need not be considered.
d) for TT and IT systems, the fault return path through earth electrodes and the general
mass of earth.
e) the path through the earthed neutral point of the transformer.
f) the transformer winding.
g) the line conductor from the transformer to the point of fault.

In order to calculate earth fault loop impedance, the size and length of each of the conductors
in the loop (circuit) are to be known, from which the impedance of the circuit conductors are
calculated. The Impedance of the transformer winding is added to the impedance of the circuit
conductors. A safety margin of 2/3 is taken into account, considering the increase in the
resistance of the conductors with the increase of temperature during fault conditions.

The sample calculations included in this annex consider resistive and reactive component. For
simplified calculation the reactive component may be neglected as its influence is negligible in
small installations. However, for installations with cables having a cross-sectional area larger
than 16 mm2, or where busbars are used, the influence of the reactive component is significant.
A detailed calculation is recommended in such cases.

NOTE — For the calculation of reactance where busbars are used, see subclause 2.7, IS 13234-2.
Key,
1. Neutral earthing of source
2. Body earthing of source
3. Earth Electrode of the source.
(fault current return through metallic conductor)

Figure E-1 Earth Fault Current in TN System

Key,
1 Neutral earthing of source
2 Body earthing of source
3 Earth Electrode of the source.
4 Common earth electrode of the installation (electrically independent from source earth electrode).
5 Fault current though general mass of earth.

Figure E-2 Earth Fault Current in TT System

E-2 REQUIREMENT OF FAULT PROTECTION BY AUTOMATIC

DISCONNECTION
From the calculated fault-loop impedance, the current causing the automatic operation of the
protective device as explained in Eq E-2 shall be ensured.

The maximum allowed fault-loop impedance shall satisfy the following (see 7.4.2.7):

2 𝑈𝑜
𝑍𝑠 (𝑚) = × Eq. E-1
3 𝐼𝑎
Where:
Zs(m) is the measured/calculated fault loop impedance starting and ending at the point of
the fault (Ω)
Uo is the nominal a.c. or d.c. line to earth voltage in volts (V)
Ia is the current in amperes (A) causing the automatic operation of the protective device
within the time specified in Table 1. When a residual current device (RCD) is used
this current is the residual operating current providing disconnection in the time
specified in Table 1.

Based on Eq. E-1, the current causing the automatic operation of the protective device within
the time specified in Table 1 shall meet the following requirement:

2 𝑈𝑜
𝐼𝑎 = × Eq. E.2
3 𝑍𝑠

Where:
Zs is the calculated fault loop impedance starting and ending at the point of the fault (Ω),
Uo is the nominal a.c. line to earth voltage in volts (V),
Ia is the current in amperes (A) causing the automatic operation of the protective device
within the time specified in Table 1. When a residual current device (RCD) is used
this current is the residual operating current providing disconnection in the time
specified in Table 21.

E-3 CALCULATION OF IMPEDANCE OF TWO WINDING TRANSFORMERS

The impedance of two-winding transformers shall be calculated from the rated transformer
data as follows:
2
𝑢𝑘𝑟 𝑈𝑟𝑇
𝑍𝑇 = × Eq. E.3
100 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑆𝑟𝑇
2
𝑢𝑅𝑟 𝑈𝑟𝑇 𝑃𝑘𝑟𝑇
𝑅𝑇 = × = 2
100 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑆𝑟𝑇 3 × 𝐼𝑟𝑇 Eq. E.4

𝑋𝑇 = √𝑍𝑇2 − 𝑅𝑇2 Eq. E.5

Where:
UrT is the rated voltage of the transformer on the low-voltage side;
IrT is the rated current of the transformer on the low-voltage side;
SrT is the rated apparent power of the transformer;
 PkrT PkrT is the total loss of the transformer in the windings at rated current;
ukr is the short-circuit voltage at rated current in per cent (also known as short circuit
impedance of the transformer- see table E-1)
uRr is the rated resistive component of the short-circuit voltage in per cent.
NOTE — For more information see 6.3 of IS 13234-0

The resistive component uRr can be calculated from the total losses PkrT in the windings at the
rated current IrT, both referred to the same transformer side.

The short-circuit voltage at rated current in per cent (also known short circuit impedance of the
transformer) shall be taken from manufacturers' data. In the absence of such details during the
initial design stage, the below table, taken from IS 2086-2 shall be considered.

Table E-1 Recognised Minimum Value of Short Circuit Impedance for Transformers as Per
Table-1 of IS 2026-5.

SI No. Short-circuit impedance at rated current

Rated Power Minimum short circuit
(kVA) impedance
Percentage
(1) (2) (3)
i) 25-630 4.0
ii) 631-1 250 5.0
iii) 1 251-2 500 6.0
iv) 2 501-6 300 7.0
v) 6 301-25 000 8.0
vi) 25 001-40 000 10.0
vii) 40 001-63 000 11.0
viii) 63 001-100 000 12.5
ix) Above 100 000 12.5

NOTE — For generators, 16 percent may be considered as short circuit impedance.

E-4 CALCULATION OF IMPEDANCE OF CONDUCTORS

The impedance (Z) consists of a resistive component (R) and a reactive component (X),
expressed as:
𝑍 = √𝑅 2 + 𝑋 2 Eq. E-6
For simplified calculation the reactive component may be neglected as its influence is negligible
in small installations. However, for high current application, the influence of reactive
component is substantial (Example: larger than resistive component). Hence a detailed
calculation may be necessary.

E-4.1 Resistance of Conductors

The resistance of conductors shall be obtained from manufacturer data, or reference to IS 8130
(if the conductor is an insulated conductor), or by calculation as below:
The resistance of a conductor, for a particular length is calculated by the following equation:
𝜌 𝐿
𝑅= × Eq. E-7
𝑆 1000
Where:
R is the resistance of the length of conductor, in Ω,
ρ is the resistivity of the conductor, in mΩ mm2 / m,
S is the cross-sectional area of the conductor, in mm2,
L is the length of the conductor in m.
Values of ρ may be taken from Table E-2.

Table E-2 Resistivity of Conductors at 20°C (ρ)

SI No. Copper Aluminium Aluminium Alloy Steel

(mΩ mm2 / m) (mΩ mm2 / m) (mΩ mm2 / m) (mΩ mm2 / m)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 18.51 29.41 32.26 158.00

E-4.2 Reactance of Conductors

The reactance of conductors shall be obtained from manufacturer data, or reference to IS 13234-
2 (if the conductors are single core cables), or by calculation as below:

𝐿
𝑋=𝑥× Eq. E-8
1000
Where,
X is the reactance of the length of conductor, in Ω
x is the reactance of the conductor, in mΩ / m
L is the length of the conductor in m

NOTE — The calculation of reactance in this method does not consider the conductor cross-sectional area.

Values of x may be taken from Table E-3.

Table E-3 Reactance Per Metre of Conductors (x)

SI Multicore Single core Flat touching Flat spaced

No. cables cables in trefoil single core single core
arrangement cables cables
(mΩ / m) (mΩ / m) (mΩ / m) (mΩ / m)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 0.08 0.08 0.09 0.13

For conductors having a cross-sectional area of less than 25 mm2, reactance may be neglected
as it is considerably smaller than the resistance.

E-5 EXAMPLE CALCULATION

Consider an electrical installation as illustrated in Figure E-3

 Move

Figure E-3 Illustration of an Electrical Installation for Calculation.

NOTE — Figure E-3 is divided into two (transformer to sub-DB and sub DB to socket) to be understood as
one circuit.

The transformer, is a two-winding transformer having the following characteristics:

Rated Primary Voltage 11 kV

Rated Secondary Voltage 433 V
Rated Apparent Power 315 kVA
Load losses at 75oC 2800 W
 Impedance Voltage (Z) 4.75 percent
Resistance 0.89 percent

The cables used are multicore cables.

E-5.1 Method 1 (Simplified Calculations):

This method of calculation considers the impedance of the transformer as calculated in Eq. E-
3. It does not consider the individual resistive and reactive components of the transformer’s
impedance. For conductors, E-5.1 considers only their resistance. It does not consider their
reactance.

E-5.1.1 Impedance of Transformer

From Eq. E-3, the impedance of the transformer (in ohms) is calculated as below:

4.75 4332
𝑍𝑇𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟 = × = 0.0283
100 315000

E-5.1.2 Impedance of Conductors from The Transformer to The Main DB:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

29.41 25
𝑅= × = 0.0031
240 1000

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

29.41 25
𝑅= × = 0.0061
120 1000

E-5.1.2.1 For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the main DB, the earth-
fault loop impedance is calculated as:

SI No. Impedance (Z)

Ω
(1) (2) (3)
i) Impedance of Transformer 0.0283
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061
Total Z main DB 0.0375

E-5.1.3 Impedance of Conductors from The Main DB to The Sub DB:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:
 29.41 50
𝑅= × = 0.0155
95 1000

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

29.41 50
𝑅= × = 0.0294
50 1000

E-5.1.3.1 For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the sub-DB, the earth-fault
loop impedance is calculated as:

SI No. Impedance
(Z) Ω
(1) (2) (3)
i) Impedance of Transformer 0.0283
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061
iv) Line conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0155
v) PE conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0294
Total Z sub DB 0.0824

E5.1.4: Impedance of Conductors from The Sub DB to The Final DB:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 50
𝑅= × = 0.0578
16 1000

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 50
𝑅= × = 0.0578
16 1000
E5.1.4.1: For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the final DB, the earth-fault
loop impedance is calculated as:

SI No. Impedance
(Z) Ω
(1) (2) (3)
i) Impedance of Transformer 0.0283
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061
iv) Line conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0155
v) PE conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0294
vi) Line conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578
vii) PE conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578
 Total Z final DB 0.1980

E-5.1.5 Impedance of Conductors from The Final DB to The Switch:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 25
𝑅= × = 0.1157
4 1000

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 25
𝑅= × = 0.1157
4 1000
E-5.1.5.1 For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the Switch, the earth-fault
loop impedance is calculated as:

SI No. Impedance (Z)

Ω
(1) (2) (3)
i) Impedance of Transformer 0.0283
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061
iv) Line conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0155
v) PE conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0294
vi) Line conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578
vii) PE conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578
viii) Line conductor from Final DB to Switch 0.1157
ix) PE conductor from Final DB to Switch 0.1157
Total Z up to switch 0.4294

E-5.1.6 Impedance of Conductors from The Switch to The Socket:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 25
𝑅= × = 0.1157
4 1000

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 25
𝑅= × = 0.1157
4 1000
E-5.1.6.1 For an earth fault occurring at the terminals of the socket, the earth-fault loop
impedance is calculated as:

SI No. Impedance (Z)

Ω
(1) (2) (3)
i) Impedance of Transformer 0.0283
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061
iv) Line conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0155
v) PE conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0294
vi) Line conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578
vii) PE conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578
viii) Line conductor from Final DB to Switch 0.1157
ix) PE conductor from Final DB to Switch 0.1157
x) Line conductor from Switch to Socket 0.1157
xi) PE conductor from Switch to Socket 0.1157
Total Z up to socket 0.6608

E-5.2 Method 2 (Detailed Calculation)

This method of calculation considers the reactive and resistive components of the transformer’s
impedance. For the conductors with a cross-sectional area >=25 mm2, their resistance and
reactance are considered. For conductors with a cross-sectional area <25 mm2, their resistance
is only considered.

E-5.2.1 Impedance of Transformer

From Eq. E-3, the impedance of the transformer (in ohms) is calculated as below:

4.75 4332
𝑍𝑇 = × = 0.0283
100 315000

From Eq. E-4, the resistive component of the transformer impedance (in ohms) is calculated
as below:

0.89 4332
𝑅𝑇 = × = 0.0053
100 315000

The resistive component of the transformer impedance (in ohms) may also be calculated from
the load losses with Eq. E-5 as below:

2800
𝑅𝑇 = = 0.0053
3 × 420.012
NOTE — As observed, the results as per Eq. E-4 and Eq. E-5 are substantially the same. Both equations are
provided annex E, in order to avoid confusion as each are considered in some standards.

From Eq. E-5, the reactive component of the transformer impedance (in ohms) is calculated as
below:
 𝑋𝑇 = √0.02832 − 0.00532 = 0.0278

Therefore, from Eq. E-6, for an earth fault occurring at the terminals of the transformer, the
earth-fault loop impedance (in ohms) is calculated as below:

𝑍𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟 = √0.00532 + 0.02782 = 0.0283

Note that this value is the same as E-5.1.1, However for larger transformers (say > 1500
kVA), there can be an influential difference.

E-5.2.2 Impedance of conductors from the Transformer to the Main DB:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

29.41 25
𝑅= × = 0.0031
240 1000
From Eq. E-8, the reactive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

25
𝑋 = 0.08 × = 0.0020
1000

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

29.41 25
𝑅= × = 0.0061
120 1000

From Eq. E-8, the reactive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

25
𝑋 = 0.08 × = 0.0020
1000

E-5.2.2.1 For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the main DB, the earth-
fault loop impedance is calculated as:

SI No. Resistive Reactive

component (R) Component
Ω (X) Ω
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Transformer 0.0053 0.0278
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031 0.0020
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061 0.0020
Total 0.0145 0.0318

E-5.2.2.2 Therefore, from Eq. E-6, for an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of
the main DB the earth-fault loop impedance is calculated as:
 𝑍𝑚𝑎𝑖𝑛 𝐷𝐵 = √0.01452 + 0.03182 = 0.0349

E-5.2.3 Impedance of Conductors from The Main DB to The Sub DB:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

29.41 50
𝑅= × = 0.0155
95 1000
From Eq. E-8, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

50
𝑋 = 0.08 × = 0.0040
1000

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

29.41 50
𝑅= × = 0.0294
50 1000
From Eq. E-8, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

50
𝑋 = 0.08 × = 0.0040
1000

E-5.2.3.1 For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the sub DB, the earth-fault
loop impedance is calculated as:

Resistive Reactive
SI No. component Component
(R) Ω (X) Ω
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Transformer 0.0053 0.0278
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031 0.0020
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061 0.0020
iv) Line conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0155 0.0040
v) PE conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0294 0.0040
Total 0.0594 0.0398

E-5.2.3.2 Therefore, from Eq. E-6, for an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of
the sub DB, the earth-fault loop impedance is calculated as:

𝑍𝑠𝑢𝑏 𝐷𝐵 = √0.05942 + 0.03982 = 0.0715

E-5.2.4 Impedance of Conductors from The Sub DB to The Final DB:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:
 18.51 50
𝑅= × = 0.0578
16 1000
Reactive component neglected (= 0 ohms) as conductor cross-sectional area is < 25 mm2

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 50
𝑅= × = 0.0578
16 1000
Reactive component neglected (= 0 ohms) as conductor cross-sectional area is < 25 mm2

E-5.2.4.1 For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the final DB, the earth-fault
loop impedance is calculated as:

Resistive Reactive
SI No. component (R) Component
Ω (X) Ω
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Transformer 0.0053 0.0278
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031 0.0020
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061 0.0020
iv) Line conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0155 0.0040
v) PE conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0294 0.0040
vi) Line conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578 -
vii) PE conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578 -
Total 0.1750 0.0398

E-5.2.4.2 Therefore, from Eq. E-6, for an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of
the final DB, the earth-fault loop impedance is calculated as:

𝑍𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝐷𝐵 = √0.17502 + 0.03982 = 0.1795

E-5.2.5 Impedance of Conductors from The Final DB to The Switch:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 25
𝑅= × = 0.1157
4 1000
Reactive component neglected (= 0 ohms) as conductor cross-sectional area is < 25 mm2

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 25
𝑅= × = 0.1157
4 1000
Reactive component neglected (= 0 ohms) as conductor cross-sectional area is < 25 mm2
E5.2.4.1: For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the switch, the earth-fault
loop impedance is calculated as:

SI No. Resistive Reactive

component Component
(R) Ω (X) Ω
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Transformer 0.0053 0.02798
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031 0.0020
iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061 0.0020
iv) Line conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0155 0.0040
v) PE conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0294 0.0040
vi) Line conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578 -
vii) PE conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578 -
viii) Line conductor from Final DB to Switch 0.1157 -
ix) PE conductor from Final DB to Switch 0.1157 -
Total 0.4064 0.0398

E-5.2.4.2 Therefore, from Eq. E-6, for an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of
the switch, the earth-fault loop impedance is calculated as:

𝑍𝑠𝑤𝑖𝑡𝑐ℎ = √0.40642 + 0.03982 = 0.4084

E-5.2.6 Impedance of Conductors from The Switch to The Socket:

For the line conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 25
𝑅= × = 0.1157
4 1000
Reactive component neglected (= 0 ohms) as conductor cross-sectional area is < 25 mm2

For the PE conductor:

From Eq. E-7, the resistive component (in ohms) is calculated as below:

18.51 25
𝑅= × = 0.1157
4 1000
Reactive component neglected (= 0 ohms) as conductor cross-sectional area is < 25 mm2

E-5.2.6.1 For an earth fault occurring at the incoming terminals of the socket, the earth-fault
loop impedance is calculated as:

Resistive Reactive
SI No. component Component
(R) Ω (X) Ω
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Transformer 0.0053 0.0278
ii) Line conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0031 0.0020
 iii) PE conductor from Transformer to Main DB 0.0061 0.0020
iv) Line conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0155 0.0040
v) PE conductor from Main DB to Sub DB 0.0294 0.0040
vi) Line conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578 -
vii) PE conductor from Sub DB to Final DB 0.0578 -
viii) Line conductor from Final DB to Switch 0.1157 -
ix) PE conductor from Final DB to Switch 0.1157 -
x) Line conductor from Switch to Socket 0.1157 -
xi) PE conductor from Switch to Socket 0.1157 -
Total 0.6378 0.0398

E-5.2.6.2 Therefore, from Eq. E-6, for an earth fault occurring at the terminals of the socket,
the earth-fault loop impedance is calculated as:

𝑍𝑠𝑜𝑐𝑘𝑒𝑡 = √0.63782 + 0.03982 = 0.6391

E-6 CONCLUSION

From simplified calculation the fault loop impedance at the final socket as calculated in E-
5.1.6.1: 0.6608 Ω and with detailed calculation as per E-5.2.6.2: 0.6391

From Eq. E-2 The minimum current required for automatic disconnection of the protective
device can be calculated for a 230/400-volt system as below

From E-5.1.6.1 the resultant current available for disconnection is

2 230
𝐼𝑎 = × = 348 𝐴
3 0.6608

From E-5.2.6.2 the resultant current available for disconnection is

2 230
𝐼𝑎 = × = 359 𝐴
3 0.6391

However, for larger transformers (say > 1500 kVA), there can be an influential difference,
while considering the reactance of the loop.
 ANNEX F

SHARED PE CONDUCTORS AND PROTECTIVE EARTHING

(Informative)
F-1 General

This informative annex is only for the purpose of explaining earthing in industrial premise,
where the source of energy (example: Transformer / DG) is within the premise of the consumer.
As recommended in the code, HV side and LV side of the transformer are interconnected as a
Global Earthing System (see 10.2.4) and TN-S system is considered in LV (see 11.1.6). This
annex is not suitable for applications in public distribution except in cases where the source of
energy, owned by DISCOM is installed within the consumer premise.

Figure F-1 Typical Schematic of Earthing of One Transformer and Installation. TN-S System
 Figure F-2 Typical Schematic of Earthing of One Transformer and DG Manual Change Over
TN-S System

Figure F-3 Typical Schematic of Earthing of Multiple Sources Running Parallel TN-S System

Key: (Common for Figure F-1, Figure F-2 and Figure F-3)
1 Main Earth Terminal (MET or Main Earth Bar)
2 System Referencing Conductor (Neutral Earthing of Energy Source): Typically, 2 connections are
recommended, however the number can be reduced to one if a reliable connection is made. Providing
disconnection link in System Referencing Conductor may be useful during insulation resistance test.
Measurement or monitoring (M) of current through System Referencing Conductor is useful to
implement earth leakage monitoring / earth fault protection.
3 Protective Earthing of Transformer: Typically, 2 connections are recommended. However unitised
substations (Compact Substation or Package Substation) may have only one provision. In such care
should taken to insist the supplier to make provision for two earthing. Modifications at the site for
providing additional earth terminal should be avoided.
4 Earthing conductor: Connection to earth electrode (See 8.2.1).
There shall be additional connections to the armouring of incoming HV cable (if available).
Note: HV Surge arrester should be earthed inside the panel / on the structure for better performance.
5 Protective Bonding Conductor: Connections to accessible extraneous conductive parts.
6 Protective Bonding (global earthing system) reduces fault loop impedance, reduces touch/step voltages,
improve shielding efficiency of building from lightning and other radiated effects of EMI.
Bonding to Lightning Protection of building (either to down conductor or to ring earth electrode -
applicable if the transformer is inside or close to the building) is necessary if isolated LPS or electrically
separated LPS is implemented in the premise.
(NOTE — Connections to Sl no.4, 5, 6, can be to a foundation embedded earth electrode with bonding
to structural colum ns in building. (example: An earth grid in soil / floor interconnecting structural
columns for an industrial premise. For commercial / high rise buildings, this earth grid is a superimposed
mesh conductor in RCC).
7 Protective Earth (PE) conductor (also called as equipotential bonding conductor):
PE conductor shall run as close as possible to the line conductors, if possible, through the same cable
tray or busbar trunking system (see 4.5.5).
Size of PE conductor can be selected as per 7.3.2.
For multiple circuits through the same cable route, shared PE conductor may be used satisfying the
requirement in 4.5.4.
Where multiple runs of armoured cables are used, the armouring can be used as PE conductor provided,
they are bonded satisfying 4.5.6.
 Earth grid or similar arrangements are in addition to PE conductor and shall not be considered as an
alternate to PE conductor.
PE conductor can be connected to the MET of the location.
8 Protective earthing conductor of 3 phase equipment (connections in duplicate). (see 4.5.1 to 4.5.3)
M Measurement of earth leakage / earth fault current for disconnection or monitoring.
MDB Main distribution board
SDB Sub distribution board

NOTE — The k value for bare protective conductors in contact with cable covering but not bunched with
other cables as per table 16 is considered.

Figure F-4 Shared PE Conductor – The General Practice is to Use Galvanised Steel as PE
Conductor Running in Contact with Cable Tray.